Home

High End Systems DL.2 User's Manual

Contents

1. DL2 Digital Light User Manual 257 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Graphic 1 Scaling Minimum object size along X axis 1 10 ofo Increases object size along X axis from minimum 1 127 1 49 to actual size 65 Scale X 6 6 6 Actual size along X axis Increases object size along X axis from actual to 429 254 51 99 maximum size Maximum object size along X axis 10 1 1 j Minimum object size along Y axis 1 10 Increases object size along Z axis from minimum 1 127 1 49 to actual size Actual size along Z axis 50 128 60 Increases object size along Z axis from actual to 429 254 51 99 maximum size is 1 1 128 i i 1 55 i i Increases object size along Y axis from minimum 1 127 1 49 to actual size Actual size along Y axis 1 1 128 50 128 Increases object size along Y axis from actual to 129 254 51 99 maximum size Maximum object size along Y axis 10 1 255 100 s 110 EA is 1 1 128 i 1 55 Minimum object size along Z axis 1 10 Le Maximum object size along Z axis 10 1 Graphic 1 Position Moves object left from center of display 0 36767 0 49 X Position Centers object along X axis in display 32768 50 50 00 50 00 50 00 i 50 Moves object right from center of display ee 51 100 Moves object down from center of display 0 36767 0 49 Y Position Centers object along Y axis in display 32768 7 8 9 70 a Moves object up from center of display yan 51
2. cccceeeeeseneseeeeeeneseeeseesaeseeeeeaueeeeeeeesaaeeenenaas 63 In Frame and Out Frame Parameters cccccccceee cece cess eeeeeee eee eeeseeaeeeneeeeeeaaas 63 segment Selection EXamMples sana k lots aiid lacesehele tenements seau E OOO eA 63 Defining Pla yDaCK ssaa a E a E ain Ee sean saeneeee oud 64 Play Dack MOOG raaa a a a A E seca 64 Playback Sped oian T E A T E D 65 Chapter 8 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale You can independently control each Graphic Object s rotation direction and speed along with it s position and scale in x y and z axis directions Rotating a 3 D OD GCE sz i bene a aae nie we wae wa aa aa aE ENESENN 67 Rotation Parameters iroioiiisbikriunniunnier innein aano anoni anana 69 X ROGOR vaaan a a a a a R 69 Vc PROCALION aaa a N E AO 70 Z ROON rr E AE AA 71 Scaling ENG ODJECE wissscectsncsecceeresudace eee a E i AEA ES 72 X SEAE aaa e a A E E ip nse EA eee eee 72 aE E E NTA A E E E A AEE AE E neues A E AT T 73 ZS CAGE pinea NA E A A E E A E A 74 Changing Object P sition siiies cisicsiccdicesdcredadesadecenedccscdseneessssennsssseddcudewedacades 75 Pe POSILIO Ul uiae indica naan ebane ube AO E E ee Mebousene ion 75 1 PO SILIOVAL rE a ton pmenaauuna an E ann mesnenn O 75 AP OSION ates eta cetera te feel asian wa E eed agi Ree RET RETA 77 Chapter 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects You can adjust opacity and apply a variety of color mixing and geometric effects to each indivi
3. Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154 76 100 rotation around Z axis slow to fast 65535 284 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Graphic 3 Scaling Minimum object size along X axis 1 10 oO Oo Increases object size along X axis from minimum 1 127 1 49 to actual size 141 Scale X Actual size along X axis 128 50 Increases object size along X axis from actual to 429 254 51 99 maximum size Maximum object size along X axis 10 1 1 i 0 Minimum object size along Y axis 1 10 EA i 0 Increases object size along Y axis from minimum 1 127 to actual size is 1 1 i 1 55 0 i 142 Scale Y Actual size along Y axis 1 1 128 50 Increases object size along Y axis from actual to 429 254 51 99 maximum size Maximum object size along Y axis 10 1 Minimum object size along Z axis 1 10 ol is 1 1 1 55 0 Increases object size along Z axis from minimum 4 127 to actual size Actual size along Z axis Increases object size along Z axis from actual to 429 254 51 99 maximum size 2 255 Graphic 3 Position 0 36767 Maximum object size along Z axis 10 1 Moves object left from center of display 0 36767 0 49 X Position Centers object along X axis in display 32768 32768 50 Moves object right from center of display nes Moves object down from center of display 0 36767 0 49 Y Position Centers object along Y axis in display 32768 50 32
4. DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 123 CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect Panorama Collage Configurations You can create Collage arrays in any configuration up to 8 x 8 cells The native aspect ratio of one DL 2 or Axon media server output is 4 3 Some of the arrays configured in conjunction with the collage generator will output a different overall aspect ratio Computing Collage Specifications The formula to determine the correct size for your collage footage is fairly simple The native aspect of HES media servers is 1024 x 768 You can use these numbers to determine the correct size and aspect ratio for all collage configurations The total pixel count once adjustments are made should be close to but not exceed 800 000 pixels total Example To determine and create 8 x 2 collage footage 1 Open a new composition in a video editing program such as Adobe After Effects many other programs will work 2 Multiply 8 x 1024 8192 horizontal width enter 8192 into the Width column of you composition setting window 3 Multiply 2 x 768 1536 vertical height enter 1536 into the Height column The correct aspect ratio will appear next to these numbers lock the aspect ratio button In Composition Settings Composition Name 8 1 Collage example this case it is Preset Custom 16 3 Width 8192 4 Adjust the Height ol _ iw Lock Aspect Ratio to 16 3 with the Aspect Height 15
5. l l Corzo Laptop Computer WholeHog 3 Console ptional pe eee DMX 512 Data Cabling Ethernet Cabling NOTE If you are using a DMX console and other automated lighting products compatible with Art Net this network can also serve as the link for DMX control DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 187 CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA Launching the CMA Installing the CMA on Your Computer The CMA can be easily installed on a computer connected through an Ethernet network to remotely manage content software and configuration of multiple media servers You can download the latest version of the application for Windows XP or Mac OS 10 4 based n from the Digital Lighting HP section of the High End Systems website A download wizard simplifies installation on your personal computer The frollowiige are recommended hardware requirements for the CMA The following are recommended software requirements for running the CMA e Windows XP or Mac OS 10 4 or later e Microsoft Net 2 0 and 1 1 with Service Pack 2 installed e 100 1000 base Ethernet card a Gigabit Ethernet card is recommended for fast content uploading of large files NOTE When installing the CMA on a laptop disable the wireless adapter to prevent IP address conflicts that can keep the CMA from recognizing DL 2 or Axon units To automatically install the CMA on your computer s harddrive insert the CD that shipped with your media serve
6. An Archive Image is a compressed file used to store media files folders and object files along with valid identification DMX values This Content Archive is used to backup User Content that can be restored to any media server Using Local Archives to Prepare Content Offline You can create a Local Archive of files stored on your harddrive to be deployed to a server at another time This lets you work on organizing files for a specific show offline and then upload it to a server at a later date Creating a Local Archive For CMA Running Windows XP 1 Under the FILE menu select Create Local Archive to launch the archiving wizard Create Local Content Archive Wirard HIGH END SYSTEMS Selected Object Files CODocuments and Settings ati CA Deeuments and Sa C Documents end Setlings mati CADecumerte and CO Documents and Settings mati a CWocumerts and Settings mati Song 2 c Remove Media C Documents and Setting mall Song d PS i aR eH aoa Co Documerts and Setheges mati Irtemisian Finale I 2 Click on Add Media Folder This will add a media folder to the left hand column named MyMedia0 Each successive media folder will be named MyMedial MyMedia2 and so forth You can rename these folders by single clicking on the name of the folder 3 After creating a folder and renaming it if you wish highlight the folder to add media files 4 Click Add Media This will bring up a file browser window that
7. Graphic Object 2 Texture Effect 1 Effect 2 Graphic Object 3 Texture Visual Effect Effect 1 Effect 2 On Screen Frame Statistics Final Composite Image When the Global Control parameter is set at a DMX Value of 255 the Global Control Modifier channel lets you choose the text color that will best display over your selected image DMX Value o2 Paa 3 Blue DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 113 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Masking Control Mask Shape Select and Strobing The Mask Select parameter lets you choose a mask to frame or overlay a composite image You can choose to apply a mask toan Q 128 Round iris mask closing from outside in image when you don t want an entire image to be seen or you want to transition from an image to black or a solid color without fading Hakeem 6 134 Racial wipe variation provis 30 mask shapes including Hie aa e an ooo a masks that close from inside out or outside in Checker Board Radial also included with variations 14 142 eee ere cee iris mask closing from outside in DMX values 0 127 0 50 are reserved for static mask shapes Values of 128 255 51 100 are reserved for strobing Mask shapes Values not yet implemented default einen A A strobing version of each simple mask shape is defined in the 128 26 154 geet ate SEMAN rane When a strobing mask is selected the strobe rate is controlled by the Mask Edge Fade p
8. Your DL 2 fixture ships with the following e One DL 2 fixture in road case e Two mounting brackets e One safety cable e Documentation CD that contains CMA application User Manual in pdf format Fixture software Recovery software image High End Systems assumes no responsibility for products that are damaged during transport Return a product for repair in its road case Before sending anything to the factory call your High End Systems dealer distributor for a Return Material Authorization RMA number The factory cannot accept any goods shipped without an RMA number DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 5 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Hardware Components Connection Ports The DL 2 fixture s back panel provides ports for 5 pin DMX Data In and Data Out see Setting up a Standard DMX Link on page 10 for more information Ethernet to connect to other DL 2 fixtures and your computer running the Content Management Application CMA software on a fixture link see Setting up an Ethernet Fixture Link on page 11 Two USB ports for connecting peripheral drives to assist with troubleshooting RGBHV VGA and S Video In options for video input Camera Out provides S Video output from the internal camera to another DL 2 fixture or other external video output device Receive LED Link LED indicates indicates DMX data hardware connection coming in via Ethernet Transmit LED Activity LED indicates in
9. fully opaque TIP Use the following steps create a modified Trails effect with the Texture Mixing option 1 Select two Graphic Objects The second object can be a solid black screen Media Folder 1 Media File 1 2 Use Modifier 1 to select the Graphic Object you want to display with a trail effect 3 Set Modifier 2 to a DMX Value 2 4 Set Modifier 3 in a range between a DMX value of 240 254 The closer to 254 the more exaggerated the trail effect appears If Modifier 3 is set to 255 the output will appear to stall or freeze on an image M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Graphic Object 1 media file content Effect Mode parameter DMX value 51 Modifier 1 1 Modifier 2 0 Modifier 3 128 174 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions NOTE This option is also available as a Visual Mode adjusted with 2 Modifier parameters see Texture Mixing on page 99 Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 25 This option varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the z axis without affecting the underlying object to create an effect of wavy ripples moving out from the object s center Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to
10. 32768 50 16 bit Rotates the object clockwise around X axis in 32769 51 74 adjustment Steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151 Continuous rotation stop rotation Continuous rotation stop 49152 52 75 Continuous variable speed clockwise object a 54 76 100 rotation around X axis slow to fast Sag Om Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 object rotation around Y axis fast to slow aloz Continuous rotation stop 16383 _ Y axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around Y 16384 46 4 Rotation axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 27 horizontal flip O otation around Y axis 0 rotation 0 rotation around Y axis Y axis 32768 0 32768 50 16 bit Rotates the object clockwise around Y axis in 32769 54 74 adjustment steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151 Continuous rotation stop rotation Continuous rotation stop 49152 52 75 Continuous variable speed clockwise object o oe 76 100 rotation around Y axis slow to fast 65535 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 object rotation around Z axis fast to slow 16382 Continuous rotation stop 16383 e Z axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around Z 16384 26 49 Rotation axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 0 rotation 0 rotation around Z axis Z axis 32768 50 32768 50 circular 16 bit Rotates the Ui ns o ooo clockwise around Z axis in ze 5174 7 adjustment steps to 720 degrees absolute a ices Continuous rotation stop 49152 75
11. 5 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects This option converts a color image to grayscale and then lets you adjust black level and contrast NOTE can still affect image contrast If content is already grayscale there is no effect applied but Modifier 2 Modifier 1 Adjusts the black level of the grayscale image from a DMX value of 0 Full brightness to 255 completely black Modifier 2 Adjusts contrast of the grayscale image from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum contrast Original Content fi pae WE r Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 4 Visual Mode Modifier DMX value 90 33 3 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 175 77 F P al p a E z Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 4 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 91 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Invert Black and White Keep Color Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 11 This option allows you to invert the black and white components of an image while leaving other colors unaffected You can vary the threshold for the black in a pixel required for inversion Modifier 1 Adjusts the comparison level of black for inversion from a DMX value of 0 inverting only absolute black to 255 100 converting more of the image from black to white Modifier 2 Adjusts the comparison level of white for inversion from a DMX value of 0 inverting only absolute white to 255 100 converting more of the image from white t
12. Global Effect Mode I and Effect Mode 2 There are two Global Effect Mode parameters each with three modifier parameters Both Effect Mode parameters have an identical list of color and visual effect options This lets you apply a dual effect combination to the composite image The table below describes the interaction between an Effect Mode parameter and the three associated Modifier parameters for each option You can find a detailed description of each option in Chapter 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Note Modifier channels for Effect Mode 1 are labeled as CMY in the Wholehog 3 system so you can also make use of the color picker HSI and other Wholehog 3 functions Use the CMY parameter controls to adjust the three Effect Mode 1 Modifier parameters for both the Global and Graphic fixture types The default for Effect Mode 1 is set to CMY1 as well Effect Mode 2 Modifier channels are labeled Mod 1 Mod 2 and Mod 3 Ettect Mode EEE DMX es o Sate noctecsseecion f a o a y a RGB Ada A Pies Red Creon Bue 5 _ RGBAd02 Al Pes Red Green Bue 6 RGB Add AI Norblack Pixels Red Green Bue 7 RGB Swap to GBR Red to Green Green to Blue Blue to Red RGB Swap to BRG Red to Blue Green to Red Blue to Green Solarize 1 If color value lt DMX value invert color Green Blue Solarize 3 If color value lt DMX set color to 0 12 Solarize 4 If color value gt DMX set color to 0 BS a a a All or Nothing If
13. On the beginning of each line indicates the first MEY jOI0 01g 104 u09 z e DMX channel with a value displayed on that 2 qo line Use the scroll bar at the left of the offset number to scroll through all the values The Refresh Rate is the rate at which DMX is being received by the fixture E ims tad m With Refresh Timer set to On you see the raw DMX values updated instantly DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 29 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Set Tab Set_Fixture Screen The Fixture tab provides options for selecting or PNG Pan Invert Off i changing fixture movement dimming the l 3 Tilt Invert Off z Off mechanical iris and controlling the LCD display 8 Pan Tilt Swap black level and orientation Data Loss Timeout Iris Long iq Movement Options 3 Display 100 On Set the Pan Invert option On to invert the g Display Invert Auto direction of the pan motor Use this option to S External SVideo Format NTSC M gt coordinate movements between fixtures facing a E each other in a horizontal orientation Off is the Factory Defaults Off default setting Set the Tilt Invert option On to invert the direction of the tilt motor Use this option to coordinate movements between fixtures facing each other in a vertical orientation Off is the default setting Setting Pan Tilt Swap option On swaps the pan and tilt motor operation to coordinate movements between fixtures mounted p
14. content For more information on specific JE PlayMode 0 Play Speed 192 Graphic Function parameters see Sync Type 0 Sync To o e Chapter 7 Graphic Functions Defining a VisMode 11 02 0 ext Moda 31 02 03 0 P Graphic Functions Rotation y gt Ext od 92 9 3 o l Ei Rotation X 32767 33067 Z 33142 Position Scale Scale X 127 Y 127 Z 127 Position X 32767 Y 32767 Z32767 e Chapter 8 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects and e Chapter 10 Graphic Functions Synchronizing Content 28 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System DMX_Raw Screen You can view the DMX values of all fixtures on the link The Raw Tab displays every DMX value for Channels 001 512 in lines of eight DMX values each per screen The Offset number at 3su 351 oyut am 35 XwWa 000 128 000 128 000 000 128 128 000 000 010 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 255 001 000 000 000 000 000 000 030 000 000 255 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 040 000 000 000 000 000 000 128 128 000 128 050 000 128 000 118 052 000 000 000 001 001 060 000 000 000 255 255 000 128 000 000 001 070 000 000 001 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 128 000 128 000 128 000 128 128 128 128 090 000 128 000 128 000 000 001 001 000 000 100 000 255 255 000 128 000 000 001 000 000 110 001 000 000 G00 000 000 000 000 128 000 120 128 000 128 000 128 128 128 128 000 128 000 128 000 000 001 001 000 000 000 255 Refresh Timer
15. fully transparent to 255 100 fully opaque Zoom Blur Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 22 Zooms into a position on the image with a mult image blurring effect You can control the position of the zoom center on the image Modifier 1 Selects the horizontal center of the zoom point Modifier 2 Selects the vertical center of the zoom point Original Content Visual Mode Modifier 1 DMX value 158 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 20 Visual Mode Modifier 2 DMX value 168 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 99 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Effect Mode and Effect 2 Mode Two Effect Mode parameters are available for each individual 3 D object each with three Modifier parameters Both Effect parameters have an identical list of color and visual effect options This lets you apply a dual effect combination to the selected 3 D object Note Not all modes combine effectively For example you cannot glow a wobbulating object very well The table below describes the interaction between an Effect Mode parameter and its three associated Modifier parameters You can find a detailed description and example of each option in Chapter 11 Effect Mode Descriptions Note Modifier channels for Effect Mode 1 are labeled as CMY in the Wholehog 3 system so you can also make use of the color picker HSI and other Wholehog 3 functions Use the CMY parameter controls to adjust the three Effect Mode 1 Modifier parameters for b
16. inverted green to alpha Mod3 inverted blue to alpha Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from original to source texture Image Scale and Rotate Mod1 scales image Mod2 rotation angle Mod3 rotation speed Film Roll Mod1 horizontal roll speed Mod2 vertical roll soeed Mod3 Image scale Pixelate Mod1 Amount of pixelation Mod2 horizontal scaler Mod3 vertical scaler Faux LED Mod1 LED size Mod2 spacing Mod 3 color peaking Faux Tile Mod1 Tile size Mod2 spacing Mod 3 color peaking Fuzzifier Mod1 Horizontal distance Mod2 vertical distance Mod3 fuzz decay Drop Shadow Mod1 horizontal shadow size Mod2 vertical shadow size Mod3 shadow Opacity Zoom Blur Mod1 horizontal position center Mod2 vertical position center Mod3 zoom Chroma Shift Mod1 horizontal shift Mod2 vertical shift Mod3 Scale ShakeNBake Mod1 horizontal shake Mod2 vertical shift Mod3 Scale Slats Vertical Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade Slats Horizontal Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset DL2 Digital Light User Manual 281 O OD O O O1 QI O1 O1 O1 Ql Ol ol QI gt gt A A gt d NO 00 N O O1 gt ice NO O 00 O1 gt Z gt APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation
17. s onboard menu system Chapter 3 The DL 2 Menu System describes the menu system configuration options in detail Note Most configuration features are also available through the Content Management Application CMA see Viewing Fixture Configuration Values on page 205 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 13 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Software Setup Software setup for DL 2 fixtures requires the following steps 1 After powering on the DL 2 media server launch the CMA software 2 Check the software version installed and upgrade if necessary 3 Configure the DL 2 fixture s DMX source DMX protocol and DMX Start Channel Installing and Launching the Content Management Application CMA The Content Management Application software that shipped on CD with your fixture communicates remotely with Axon and DL2 media servers over an Ethernet network to e Upload and download custom digital content to fixtures e Remotely control all menu commands e Update software Axon media servers can run the CMA directly If you re fixture network is linking DL 2 fixtures only you will need to run the CMA on a computer connected to the Ethernet link you have established The following are recommended hardware requirements for a remote computer running the CMA Windows XP or Mac OS 10 4 or later e Microsoft Net Framework 1 1 with Service Pack 1 installed e 100 1000 base Ethernet card a Gigabit Ethernet card is recommended for f
18. sample distance Mod2 filter pass number Mod3 curve shape Sharpen Mod1 sample distance Mod2 filter pass number Mod3 sharpen scale Reserved Defaults to effect mode 0 Spherical mapping control 1 Mod 1 projector y offset Mod2 sphere y offset Mod3 vertical size Defaults to 0 and is ignored unless Spherical Mapping is selected as a Global Effect option Spherical mapping control 2 Mod 1 vertical bend correction Mod2 vertical bend correction center Mod3 horizontal size adjustment Defaults to 0 and is ignored unless Spherical Mapping is selected as a Global Effect option Pan and Scan Mod1 horizontal position Mod2 vertical position Mod3 Zoom These Modifier parameters adjust the option Effect Mode 1 selected in Channel 72 for DL 2 fixtures or Modifier 1 Channel 51 for Axon Media Servers The type of adjustment and the default value depends on the particular effect Effect Mode 1 NOTE Setting the Graphic Effect Mode DMX Modifier 2 253 or 254 activates specific spherical mapping control options for Modifier parameters For more about Modifier parameter functionality see Effect Effect Mode 1 1 Mode and Effect 2 Mode on page 100 and Modifier 3 specific effect options listed alphabetically in Chapter 13 O O1 N N N 00 00 N N N O gt N O N ine N Ol oO 195 79 83 252 255 0 255 0 100 0 255 0 100 NA NA 0 255 0 100 252 DL2 Digital Ligh
19. www highend com PRIOR to initiating a Full Restore A system restore can be done to replace the O S partition of the drive but should only be done as part of a specified upgrade plan In that case the XPe image the fixture shipped with will need to be updated All system restore operations require the System Restore CD that ships with each media server If you have misplaced or damaged this CD you may contact High End Systems http www highend com for a replacement For a system restore you will also need e External USB CD drive for DL 2 fixtures only e USB keyboard e Optional USB mouse which may require the addition of a USB hub for DL 2 fixtures Performing the System Restore Use the following steps to perform a system restore 1 Plug your USB CD or DVD drive keyboard and mouse optional into one of the external USB ports on the media server On DL 2 fixtures you may need to use a USB hub although this should only be a requirement if you wish to use a mouse 2 Power on or reboot the media server The System Restore menu will display on the Axon monitor or the Menu Screen on DL 2 fixtures DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 225 CHAPTER 18 Restoring the System 3 When the fixture boots and the High End Systems logo is seen press F8 Asus or F10 Intel to enter the boot menu for the respective motherboard 4 Select the appropriate boot device and when you see Hit any key to boot from CD press a ke
20. 38 65 157 62 9D_ 40 23 155 61 9B 41 04 154 60 9A 41 85 153 60 99 42 68 152 60 98 4434 150 59 9 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 287 APPENDIX B MSpeed Conversion Table 46 04 46 90 47 77 48 65 49 54 90 43 91 33 148 58 147 58 146 57 145 57_ 144 56 52 24 53 16 5 96 197 54 89 62 78 130 51 63 79 129 51 5 O1 O Ol O oo o CO O m 7 O l D P co 64 80 65 82 127 50 66 85 126 49 67 89 125 49 68 94 124 49 48 a7 a7 69 99 7105 122 48 72 13 73 20 75 38 118 46 76 49 117 46 7760 116 45 45 45 7 46 46 78 71 45 45 44 44 7 79 84 72 80 98 113 44 82 12 12 4 85 59 109 43 6D 87 95 107 42 6B 90 34 105 4 69 9155 104 4 68 93 98 102 40 66 O 97 70 98 95 100 22 9 8 7 ss 102 77 95 104 05 94 105358 106 65 92 107 96 91 89 109 28 35 3859 114 63 86 34 56 12291 80 3t 50 138 82 69 27 45 14032 68 27 44 a333 e6 26 42 15257 60 24 3C 178 61 44 185 44 195 92 34 13 22 214 04 24 9 18 215 90 23 9 17 217 76 22 9 16 219 63 21 8 15 22151 20 8 14 220 11 16 6 10 231 03 15 6 OF 234 90 13 5 OD 238 79 1 4 0B 240 75 10 4 OA E 24470 8 3 08 246 68 7 3 07 e 06 250 68 5 2 05 246 68 7 3 07 e o 250 68 5 2 05 288 DL 2 Digital Light
21. CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Chroma Shift M Object Effect M Global Effect Visual Mode parameter DMX value 21 This option shifts the red blue and green component colors in an image You can offset color components vertically and or horizontally Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint shift the color components right to a maximum at a value of 0 Values above the midpoint shift the color components left to a maximum at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint shift the color components down to a maximum at a value of 0 Values above the midpoint shift the color components up to a maximum at a value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Not Used NOTE This option is also available as a Visual Mode adjusted with 2 Modifier parameters see Chroma Shift on page 83 Curved Surface Support Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 135 140 Curved Surface Support corrects for shape distortions that occur when you project onto surfaces that aren t flat This Global effect option facilitates projecting onto convex or concave cylinders angular screens spheres and disk shaped surfaces e588 eet t H eE a You can apply this correction to any media server output including multi fixture image panoramas created with the Collage Generator Global Effect option see Global Functions Co
22. DMX value 0 to far DMX value 255 Zoom This Zoom parameter controls the fixture s mechanical zoom from narrow DMX value 0 to wide DMX value 255 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 179 CHAPTER 14 Fixture Motion Functions MSpeed Motor Speed The MSpeed parameter adjusts the time required for a motor to complete movement when changing from one position to another MSpeed provides a method for all motors to reach their target position at the same time even though each motor may have different distances to travel MSpeed movement is extremely smooth because the fixture controls movements independent of DMX refresh rates MSpeed times vary from 0 15 seconds to 252 7 seconds In general allowing the console to crossfade the pan and tilt values for the DL2 fixture is acceptable However extremely slow movements may require the use of Mspeed instead of console crossfades For a listing of exact MSpeed times see Appendix B MSpeed Conversion Table Control Function Options The Control parameter remotely initiates various fixture operations and allows access to the internal projector menu controls Fixture Operations Note All of the following Fixture operation Control parameter settings except for MSpeed Off require the Dimmer be closed DMX Value 0 DMX Value Control Option Description Range 180 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 14 Fixture Motion Functions Projector Control Cont
23. Faux LED Mod1 LED size Mod2 spacing Mod 3 color peaking Faux Tile Mod1 Tile size Mod2 spacing Mod 3 color peaking Fuzzifier Mod1 Horizontal distance Mod2 vertical distance Mod3 fuzz decay Drop Shadow Mod1 horizontal shadow size Mod2 vertical shadow size Mod3 shadow opacity Zoom Blur Mod1 horizontal position center Mod2 vertical position center Mod3 zoom Chroma Shift Mod1 horizontal shift Mod2 vertical shift Mod3 Scale ShakeNBake Mod1 horizontal shake Mod2 vertical shift Mod3 Scale Slats Vertical Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade Slats Horizontal Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation Ql O1 O O1 N O1 00 Ol O O N O oo O K Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 264 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Circular with Z axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation Modi size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation Modi size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with X axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Y axi
24. In the Mac version to access Server Configuration information for an individual server select the Configuration option under the individual server In Windows Explorer configuration information for the server is located directly by selecting the server DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 191 CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA Preloaded Stock Content A large library of Stock Media and Stock Objects ships on every DL 2 or Axon media server and will also be provided through upgrades from High End Systems This content is read only You won t be able to download edit the DMX values or remove these files from the fixture Custom User Content You can create your own custom User Media and User Objects content and upload it to media servers The Stock Content and User Content reside in separate folders The High End Systems Digital Lighting Community forums highend com is a resource for tips and techniques on creating User Content See Custom User Content on page 289 for basic considerations in developing your own content for the Axon or DL 2 media server Media Files Inside User Image and Stock Image folders are Library folders containing collections of media files Media files can be still images or video clips in one of the following formats i ma NOTE Axon and DL 2 media servers supports jpg formatted using RGB color CMYK color files are not currently supported The stock media files provided by High End Syste
25. Installing a Line Cord Cap UK ONIY sccavissccamannivdvewieda weve unsiaeieinntinawiaase ve 7 Vatic Fitter Heads Information Danmark ssssssssssrssrresrrrsrresrrrsrrsrrrsrrrrrrrerrrrne 7 Mounting the FIKUS cuceririi in EA A 8 FOO Machine Warning esrererisserirensr oina da ne EN EEEN ARNEE ENEE 8 Mounting the Fixture Upright sssssssrssererrrererrrrrrsrrrerrresrrrsrrrsrrrerrrerrrerrrere 9 Truss Mounting serrera E aT ETEA ERARA ENEE 9 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual HNKV DEZ CU CS maris Toae aa teed aniena se ocrohensensvahenmende a E 10 Seting Up a standand DMX EINK csser eE eee TE a 10 Setting up an Ethernet Fixture LINK s ssssssrsssrrssrrrsrrrsrrrerrrerrrerrrerrrerrrerrne 11 EINKINGsCOMTIGUEALIONS oian E A E A A 11 POWErNG Ola tAE FEU iarsin a N a A aa 12 ROMIN Che FIXTURES rarase a R R A a a e 13 The DL 2 Menu Display Panel ssnusssnnnsnssnrsenrrnrrrnerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrsrrrerrrerrresrrrere 13 SOTEW AFC SEtUP s et a a a e 14 Installing and Launching the Content Management Application CMA 6 14 Verifying and Upgrading Fixture and CMA Software ssssssssssrrrsrrrsrrrerrrrerrrsrne 15 CONTANO DLE 2 FIXUS miaa a E E ene AE 16 Setup Configuration Using the Menu System ssssssrressresrrrsrrenrrreerrrerrrsrne 16 Setup Configuration Using the CMA ccccccecee cece eeeeeeeee eens eeeeeeeeeneeeeenengaes 17 BMX C OPTOG EUD oh sacar teva alet tan edn E Gana E E abe etezacen ees 18 Patch
26. Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color 30 using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color 34 using Modi red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Scan Line Modi selects scan line as texture Mod2 fades from original image to converted 32 image Mod3 not used reserved 114 93 Effect Transparent Wipes Mod1 width of transparent Mode 2 area Mod2 center of transparent area 33 Mod3 transparency mode Pixel Twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center Mod3 direction and amount of twist Picture in Picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture center Mod3 subpicture size Magnifying Lens Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y 36 lens center Mod3 lens size Magnifying Lens 2 Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center Mod3 lens size Cartoon Edge Modi Edge Color Mod2 Contrast Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity Color DeConverge Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left RGB Swap to BGR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Horizontal Mirror Mod1 mirror center Mod2 e Mod3 not used RGB Swap to RBG 42 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GRB 43 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue DL2 Digital Light User Manual 267 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Modi Color Scheme selection Mod2 Zero intensity point in c
27. Modifier 3 Turns selected intensity range transparent from 0 no change to 128 fully transparent DMX values above the midpoint of the range change all intensities outside of the selected range transparent from 129 no transparency to 255 full reverse transparency 146 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Mask Color Cl Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 128 This option applies color to a selected mask shape Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Mask Color and Edge Fade Color Cl Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 130 This option applies a color to both the selected Mask shape and any selected Edge parameter Color can also be applied to Mask shape see Picture in Picture on page 167 and Edge parameter s separately Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation RGB Add All
28. Note All Central Panorama Collages will have the 4 3 aspect ratio DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 125 CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect Horizontal Panorama Collage Specifications Array Array Maximum Recommended DL 2 m eme e om O ewan s m o oema oe mm on ewn e me n m e Oo e emen o E ee man EEEE oe wen acces Be won DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect Arra Array Configuration W x H HE Eig Ea STS Maximum Recommended DL 2 Image Resolution W x H Units 8x4 1456 W x 531 H 1152 W x 683 H 1136 W x 689 H y 3 3 3 4 4 CT E g 1216 W x 648 H 2 0 5 0 2 8 56 1120 W x 691 H Ea DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 127 CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect Vertical Panoramas Collage Specifications Array Array Maximum Recommended DL 2 Configuration W x H Image Resolution W x H Units me oS E oOo ee i B P o e ele E 128 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect Array Array Maximum Recommended DL 2 Configuration W x H Image Resolution W x H Units 3x5 816 W x 933 H 15 3x6 752 W x 1021 H 704 W x 1106 H 656 W x 1171 H 944 W x 824 H 960 W x 805 H 892 W x 866 H Bo E B E aa D E E DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 129 CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Ge
29. Remove philips screws and lift filter bracket Rear Bezel Open Latches to remove bezel cover and remove the top Pull base housing filter away cover from fixture to clean 4 Slide the top cover back to free it from the front bezel I nspect the filters 5 Lift the prefilter away from the filter bracket 6 Remove the two philips pan screws securing the filter bracket and lift the filter unit off the fixture 7 Remove the bracket and lift the HEPA filter out of the filter housing Inspect both the prefilter and the HEPA filter 8 A dirty prefitler can cause an early Service Filter warning If the prefilter looks dirty clean it with water Thoroughly dry the prefilter before proceeding DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 213 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 9 If the HEPA filter is discolored with particulates replace it with the part listed in Related Products and Optional Accessories on page 4 Reassemble the Fixture 10 Reinstall the HEPA Filter with the rubber gasket ee down 11 Reattach the filter bracket with the two philips pan Screws SS Place HEPA 12 Replace the prefilter over the bracket on velcro tabs 13 Replace the top cover fastening it with the two quarter turn screws 14 Carefully replace the rear bezel making sure to position but do not force the gasket against the lamp cover located on the back of the projector and Relatch the rear bezel
30. Rotates the object clockwise around X axis in 32769 51 74 steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151 Continuous rotation stop 49152 7 Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154 3 X axis Rotation vertical flip 16 bit adjustment rotation around X axis slow to fast ee A Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 0 2 object rotation around Y axis fast to slow 16382 Continuous rotation stop 16383 0 5 4 25 Y axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around Y 16384 46 4g 82 61 Rotation axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 horizontal flip 0 rotation around Y axis 32768 50 2768 50 83 62 16 bit Rotates the object clockwise around Y axis in 32769 51 74 adjustment steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151 Continuous rotation stop 49152 75 4 0 Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154 76 100 rotation around Y axis slow to fast 65535 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 0 2 object rotation around Z axis fast to slow 16382 Continuous rotation stop 16383 25 Rotates the object counterclockwise around Z 16384 axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 eee 0 rotation around Z axis 5 32768 50 Rotates the object clockwise around Z axis in 32769 51 74 steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151 Continuous rotation stop 75 Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154 76 100 rotation around Z axis slow to fast 65535 Z axis Rotation circular 16 bit adjustment
31. The X Scale parameter scales the selected 3 D object along the x axis either expanding it or making it smaller Use it when you want to size the object s horizontal component A DMX value of 128 50 sets the object at its normal size Values less than 50 shrink the object horizontally to the smallest at 0 Values greater then 50 enlarge the object horizontally to the largest at 255 100 Default DMX Value 128 50 Normal Scale Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 2 X Scale DMX value 165 All Scale DMX values 128 50 Scaled 3 times in X direction 72 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Y Scale The Y Scale parameter scales the selected 3 D object along the y axis either expanding it or making it smaller Use it when you want to size the object s vertical component A DMX value of 128 50 sets the object at its normal size Values less than 50 shrink the object vertically to the smallest at 0 Values greater then 50 enlarge the object vertically to the largest at 255 100 Default DMX Value 128 50 Normal Scale Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 2 Y Scale parameter DMX value 165 All Scale parameters DMX values 128 50 Scaled 3 times in Y direction DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 73 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Z Scale The Z Scale parameter scales the selected 3 D object along the z axis either expan
32. all three Graphic Object options to ensure high quality playback 30 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Note After selecting the On or Preview option you can use the numeric up down control to adjust the Menu display brightness level from 25 dim to 100 brightest e Off turns off the display after 20 seconds of inactivity Touching any button on the fixture menu will re enable the display The Display Invert field inverts the display and navigation control functions This is useful in certain fixture orientations There are three invert control options e On manually inverts the display and navigation buttons e Off manually turns off the display invert function e Auto sets the display to invert automatically when the fixture is rotated more than 45 off the horizontal axis This is the default setting The Multiple SVideo Format field lets you designate which SVideo format the fixture will accept DL 2 fixtures support multiple SVideo formats including NTSC_M SECAM_B SECAM_K NTSC_MJ SECAM_D SECAM K 1 SECAM_G SECAM_L PALN_ SECAMH_ SECAM _L1 Note The format must be set to NTSC_M to receive input from the internal camera Restoring Factory Defaults Selecting On in the Factory Defaults field restores all factory default fixture settings Set_Projector Screen a amp oje Internal 4 The projector tab provides settings related to iteka Input y the internal projector
33. oeae e Projector Geiing Orientation Active 209 212 Projector Front Projection Commands 213 216 Projector Rear Pioen T72 External RGBHV to Projector 221 224 224 Graphics Engine to Projector default aa 228 Projector Menu Menu 180 184 184 ee Up arrow cas 188 Control Projector Down arrow 189 192 S Video In to Graphic Engine Internal Camera to Internal Camera to Graphics Engine default 233 236 236 fee E 144 Home Pan Tilt 20 160 168 168 To prevent inadvertent triggering some Control Function options won t activate until the value has been held for a period of time A number in parenthesis is the minimum number of consecutive times a DMX value must be received from a controller before the operation begins 230 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Internal Camera Functions DL 2 fixtures carry Focus position 0 511 511 Camera Focus a 0 100 Manual Focus from In Far End to Out Near End 65535 Camera s IR sensing off illuminator off 0 63 63 0 24 24 Infrared Camera s IR sensing on illuminator off cs 127 a 49 Illuminator Camera s IR sensing on illuminator scaled across the range from FULL to OFF Peo aon te Auto Auto Exposure Full Auto Full Auto Auo posue s WAMO o Exposure Shutter Priority i f Shutter Speed 30 cay Pees Auto Exposure Shutter Priority i Shutter Speed 15 NEO a Camera See alga Ma Priority 427 157 50 62 Shutter gt poe ae uto Expos
34. parameter s Projector Floor Orientation Projector Ceiling Orientation Projector Front Projection and Projector Rear Projection commands map to the Projector s menu control buttons 6 Use the projector s on screen display as discussed in the projector s user manual that shipped with your DL 2 fixture 182 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter I5 Live Video Input and Control The DL 2 graphics engine can receive video from an external source or its own integrated digital video camera equipped with an infared illuminator to provide a direct digital video feed option Live Video Sources Internal Camera Every DL 2 is equipped with a internal T i l Digital Eye video camera projector infrared IR sensor video camera and IR illuminator ae capable of capturing live video even in blackout conditions The camera is mounted on the front of the DL 2 near the projector iris to point wherever the DL 2 fixture is ir directed DL 2 front view All of the camera functions can be controlled via a DMX console see Controlling the Internal Camera Input on page 185 Other Video Sources A DL 2 fixture can also project other live video sources connected to the DL 2 fixture s RGBHV VGA or S Video input ports With S Video input the live video can be further enhanced and manipulated by the DL 2 s graphics engine Note You can configure the graphics engine to capture video from an external source or th
35. vertically option Each option occupies a portion of the DMX value range Cross shape wipes from see table 171 212 center out Box shape wipes from 212 255 edges outward DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 177 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Zoom Blur M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 59 Zooms into a position on the image with a mult image blurring effect You can control the position of the zoom center on the image Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint move the horizontal center of the zoom right to 0 maximum Values above the midpoint move the horizontal center of the zoom left to a maximum at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint move the vertical center of the zoom down as you approach 0 maximum Values above the midpoint move the vertical center of the zoom up to a maximum at a value of 255 100 Modifier 3 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint zoom in to the zoom centerpoint as you approach 0 maximum image size Values above the midpoint zoom out from the zoom centerpoint to a minimum image size at a value of 255 100 NOTE This option is also available as a Visual Mode adjusted with 2 Modifier parameters see Zoom Blur on page 99 178 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter l4 Fixture
36. 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum cyan saturation Modifier 2 Increases magenta color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum magenta saturation Modifier 3 Increases yellow color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum yellow saturation CMY Add All Pixels M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 2 This effect increases color values across all pixels including black pixels Modifier 1 ncreases cyan color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum cyan saturation Modifier 2 Increases magenta color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum magenta saturation Modifier 3 Increases yellow color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum yellow saturation CMY Add Non black Pixels M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 3 This effect increases color values across all pixels except black pixels Modifier 1 Increases Cyan color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 ncreases Magenta color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 3 Increases Yellow color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 143 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Color Cycle W Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 14 The ima
37. 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum offset DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 169 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Sinewave Horizontal M Object Effect JGlobal Effect Sinewave Horizontal w X axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 67 Sinewave Horizontal w Y axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 68 Sinewave Horizontal w Z axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 69 These options create a horizontal sinewave pattern and then vary the boundaries of the underlying object along the designated axis without affecting the media file that is applied as a texture Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum offset Sinewave Vertical M Object Effect Global Effect Sinewave Vertical w X axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 70 Sinewave Vertical w Y axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 71 Sinewave Vertical w Z axis Wobb
38. 1 and Modifier 2 combine to create the effect When Modifiers 1 and 2 both have a value gt 0 Modifier 3 can be adjusted to scale the effect Original Content with Effect Mode 81 ffect Mode 81 Modifier 1 128 Effect Mode 81 Modifier 1 255 Vlodifier 2 128 Modifier 3 128 Modifier 2 255 Modifier 3 255 162 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Horizontal Mirror M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 40 This option duplicates the image vertically and mirrors the image alongside it s original Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 128 50 sets the center point of the edge where the duplicate images meet at the center of the screen Values below the midpoint move the center point toward the left as you approach 0 Values above the midpoint move the center point toward the right as you approach 255 100 Modifier 2 Not Used Modifier 3 Not Used Image Scale and Rotate M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 52 This option lets you scale and rotate the media file texture applied to a 3 D object s surface independent of Graphic Object rotation you set with the Rotation parameters see Rotating a 3 D Object on page 67 This allows scaling and rotating outside the bounds of the 3D object Modifier 1 Scales the texture The default DMX value of 0 no adjustment As you increase the DMX value to 255 100 the s
39. 11 Sync to Ce movie time and rotation 3 Sync to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 1 Sync to Sync to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 2 movie time Sync to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 2 reverse rotation 2 14 Sync to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 3 Reserved Defaults to mode 0 no selection 16 255 No Selection Selection No Selection 0 Sync to Fixture ID Number 1 am 144 123 Syne To ie to Fixture ID Number 2 2 Sync to Fixture Number 254 Sync to Fixture ID Number 255 eae Graphic 3 Effects Off No visual mode processing applied to output Content Optimization Mod1 black level Mod2 contrast Sepia tones Mod1 fades from original color to sepia colors Mod2 controls saturation Red tones Mod1 fades from original color to red tones Mod2 controls saturation Gray maker Mod1 compresses colors to shades 145 124 Visual Mode of gray Mod2 adjusts contrast Gray maker2 Always gray Modi brightness Mod2 contrast Posterizer Mod1 reduces color detail Mod2 adjusts contrast Color to Black amp White Mod1 fades color RGB 0 to B W 50 to white 100 Mod2 not used Fire Gradient Mod1fades original to converted Mod2 not used reserved DL2 Digital Light User Manual 273 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Negative Art Mod1 fades from original image to converted image Mod2 subtracts red from 0 128 subtracts green from 129 255 Exposure Control Mo
40. 3 Transitions blue color component to green from 0 no color change to 255 100 red RGB Swap to BRG M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 8 This option allows you to swap colors All red values become blue all green values become red and all blue values become green Modifier 1 Transitions red color component to blue from 0 no color change to 255 100 blue Modifier 2 Transitions green color component to red from 0 no color change to 255 100 red Modifier 3 Transitions blue color component to green from 0 no color change to 255 100 green RGB Swap to GBR M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 7 This option allows you to swap colors All red values become green all green values become blue and all blue values become red Modifier 1 Transitions red color component to green from 0 no color change to 255 100 green Modifier 2 Transitions green color component to blue from 0 no color change to 255 100 blue Modifier 3 Transitions blue color component to red from 0 no color change to 255 100 red 150 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Swap to GRB M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 43 This option allows you to swap colors All red values become green and all green values become blue Blue values are unaffected Modifier 1 Transitions red color com
41. 3 specific effect options listed alphabetically in Effect Mode 2 Modifier 2 299 0 100 Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Circular with Z axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with X axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Glow Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Glow Color Cycle Mod1 red cycle speed Mod2 green cycle speed Mod3 blue cycle speed Reserved defaults to Effect 0 Downward Vertical Streaks Mod1 start position Mod2 streak angle Mod3 fade Gaussian Blur Mod1 sample distance Mod2 NA Chapter 13 256 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Graphic 1 Rotation Continuous variable speed counterclockwise object rotation around X axis fast to slow ues 0 16382 ontinuous rotation stop 16383 5 2 Rotates the object counterclockwise around X 16384 26 49 axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 0 rotation around X axis 32768 5 32768 50
42. 882 107 US 5 921 659 US 5 934 794 US 5 940 204 US 5 945 786 US 5 953 151 US 5 953 152 US 5 969 485 US 5 980 066 US 5 983 280 US 5 984 248 US 5 986 201 US 6 011 662 US 6 029 122 US 6 048 080 US 6 048 081 US 6 054 816 US 6 057 958 US 6 062 706 US 6 079 853 US 6 126 288 US 6 142 652 US 6 142 653 US 6 172 822 US 6 175 771 US 6 188 933 US 6 208 087 US 6 219 093 US 6 220 730 US 6 241 366 US 6 249 091 US 6 255 787 US 6 256 136 US 6 261 636 US 6 278 542 US 6 278 545 US 6 278 563 US 6 288 828 US 6 326 741 US 6 327 103 US 6 331 756 US 6 346 783 US 6 421 165 US 6 430 934 US 6 459 217 US 6 466 357 US 6 502 961 US 6 515 435 US 6 523 353 US 6 536 922 US 6 538 797 US 6 545 586 US 6 549 324 US 6 549 326 US 6 563 520 US 6 565 941 US 6 570 348 US 6 575 577 US 6 578 991 US 6 588 944 US 6 592 480 US 6 597 132 US 6 600 270 US 6 601 974 US 6 605 907 US 6 617 792 US 6 621 239 US 6 622 053 US 6 635 999 US 6 648 286 US 6 664 745 US 6 682 031 US 6 693 392 US 6 696 101 US 6 719 433 US 6 736 528 US 6 771 411 US 6 775 991 US 6 783 251 US 6 801 353 US 6 812 653 US 6 823 119 US 6 865 008 US 6 866 390 US 6 866 402 US 6 866 451 US 6 869 193 US 6 891 656 US 6 894 443 US 6 919 916 US 6 930 456 US 6 934 071 US 6 937 338 US 6 955 435 US 6 969 960 US 6 971 764 US 6 982 529 US 6 988 805 US 6 988 807 US 6 988 817 US 7 000 417 US 7 011 429 US 7 018 047 US 7 020 370 US 7 033 028 US 7 048 838 US 7 05
43. Circular with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset DL2 Digital Light User Manual 255 O OD O O O1 QI O1 O1 O1 Ql Ol ol QI gt gt A A gt d NO 00 N O O1 gt ice NO O 00 O1 gt Z gt APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol filter pass number Mod3 curve shape Sharpen Mod1 sample distance Mod2 filter pass number Mod3 sharpen scale Reserved Defaults to effect mode 0 Spherical mapping control 1 Mod 1 projector y offset Mod2 sphere y offset Mod3 vertical size Defaults to 0 and is ignored unless Spherical Mapping is selected as a Global Effect option Spherical mapping control 2 Mod 1 vertical bend correction Mod2 vertical bend correction center Mod3 horizontal size adjustment Defaults to 0 and is ignored unless Spherical Mapping is selected as a Global Effect option Pan and Scan Mod1 horizontal position Mod2 vertical position Mod3 Zoom These Modifier parameters adjust the option Effect Mode 2 selected in Channel 76 for DL 2 fixtures or Modifier 1 Channel 55 for Axon Media Servers 0 255 0 100 The type of adjustment and the default value 0 depends on the particular effect NOTE Setting the Graphic Effect Mode DMX 253 or 254 activates specific spherical mapping control options for Modifier parameters For more about Modifier parameter functionality see Effect Effect Mode 2 1 Mode and Effect 2 Mode on page 100 and 9 556 0 100 Modifier
44. Core screen to preview content both still images HES_Digital_A l 2 _ HES Minital and movies Jia m When you select the File tab the file plays in K Acrial_ Effect_012 T Aerial_Effect_O15 the window to the left The bottom right window displays content folders and Aerial Effect_060 CERDO noriai Erect 061 Aerial_Effect_ 108 Alarm Gear mpa DMX Valve 2 Contains 108 files highlights the current file location You can scroll through the Content folders and the files inside each folder to preview any content file 32 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Test Tab Test_Home Screen Homing sets a fixture to it s default posi tioning The fixture automatically homes whenever it is connected to power You can manually home all or separate mechanical functions using this menu tab e Motion All option on this manually homes the entire fixture e Motion Pan Tilt homes only pan and tilt positions Motion Iris Zoom Focus sets the Iris Zoom and Focus to default CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Motion Al _Home _ y Motion Pan Tilt Home 3 Motion Iris Zoom Focus Home Calibrate Motors Calibrat Info File Test e Calibrate Motors realigns the Pan and Tilt stepper motors after maintenance procedures The DL 2 can also be remotely homed via a DMX controller see Control Function Options on page 180 or through the Content Management Application see Editing Configuration Va
45. DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 75 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale The midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value range centers the image on the Y axis Values below the DMX midpoint move the object down and values above the DMX midpoint move the object up Default DMX Value 32768 50 object centered in frame Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 1 Y Position DMX value 32255 All Position DMX values 32768 50 Object 1 Y Position DMX value 33269 76 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Z Position The Z Position parameter moves your object along the z axis with 16 bit precision The midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value range centers the object on the z axis Values below the DMX midpoint move the object away from the viewer and appears to become smaller and object above the DMX midpoint move the object toward the viewer and appears to become larger Default DMX Value 32768 50 object centered in frame Tip This parameter can create a zoom effect Remember that by moving an object you can obscure other objects or move it behind your viewpoint where it is no longer visible r Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 1 Z Position DMX value 31884 All Position DMX values 32768 50 F 2 Object 1 Z Position DMX value 32822 Object 1 Z Position DMX value 33144 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 77 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Func
46. DMX value gt 0 Modifier 3 lets you fade from the original image at a DMX value O to the converted image at a DMX value of 255 100 Original Graphic Object media file content Original Graphic Object media file content Modifier 1 170 Modifier 2 158 Modifier 3 255 156 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Drop Shadow M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 58 This option creates a black plane behind the selected media file texture on a flat rectangular object You can bring the plane from behind positioning it to form a drop shadow You won t see the shadow until you select a Modifier 1 or 2 DMX value above or below 128 50 Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint move the shadow right as you approach 0 maximum horizontal shadow width Values above the midpoint move the shadow left to a maximum horizontal shadow width at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint move the shadow down as you approach 0 maximum vertical shadow width Values above the midpoint move the shadow up to a maximum vertical shadow width at a value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Adjusts the shadow s opacity from full opacity at a DMX value of 0 to minimum opacity at a value of 255 100 Tip To ensure that the shadow remains black and
47. Do not attempt to hot restrike the lamp Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes before you open the lamp cover The inside of the projector can become very hot For continued safety replace with a lamp assembly of the same type Do not drop the lamp module or touch the glass bulb The glass can shatter and cause injury Shut down the fixture and disconnect from power Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes Unlatch and remove the back bezel BR WN e Loosen the two phillips head screws and open the lamp cover 5 Loosen the two phillips head screws grasping the handle and pull out the lamp assembly 6 Replace the lamp assembly see Related Products and Optional Accessories on page 4 Lamp Assembly handle 7 Seat the assembly and tighten the two lamp assembly screws 8 Close the lamp cover and tighten the two lap cover Screws 9 Reconnect to power Lamp assembly screws DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 215 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Replacing the Fuse Replace fuses with the specified type and rating only Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to 130 C 266 F Allow the fixture to cool before handling WARNINGS AN Disconnect power before servicing Ta mans The DL 2 has one user serviceable fuse which controls mains voltage to the fixture To replace a fuse 1 Disconne
48. EA AA E S 152 SONP COO ROB meciimeeriir n in a A T R mneetanine 152 Geometric Effect Opti ns i siccsssinsnen oarnein aaan eden cucu aan AEA ASen REEERE EEE 153 CIOE E uari E E RER E AE E EE T E a 153 Collage Generator aane e EE R NE E EE 153 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CARON SAIE saerait ea a a cacti Rds a e a a e bent E a 154 Curved Surface SUPPONE sidweeecodidy tee hers Eea A ra e E a aaia 154 Downward Vertical Streaks doniis reaa T A A a 156 VOSS VAIO WG dortoir aE E AEE EEE E OE A 157 Edge Detect Black and White ssussssssrrsrrresrresrrrsrrrerererrrerrrerrrerrrerrrerresee 157 Edge Detect Colar srela A aA a L sister saan ye 158 FaU BE D e a E a E a a E E aaa saceer ed 158 Fe veriri e E A A E E A O A 159 PA RON areare A AEE A AE E AEEA 159 EEE ah A TE E A at E A E A E E ch eee 160 Framing hUtter EMUAUON niararnagn iaria aa 160 FUZZ OI are A EI A E E N Ea 162 GAUSSIALY BUF esenee aa ATAA E AAO ANE 162 Horizontal MITOM orosei E T T a 163 Image Scale and Rotate parismina e aE aa EA E E NEN OE 163 MaAGMInVING LEMS sianar na aaa T EET TAi 164 Magniy TNS 52a ct ca E E Searle E 164 Mae aas n lest aaaei ten tase tems a atten tac amas reer al eu E uasere 165 Pamani SCAN iiadwnemnnccuucnupepenccanneianeor suck umrnava paws aati A 167 PIC EUSA PICUNG srmntu atin greta aa a E galnasan r E O TE eaten 167 PUSS Sre a A A A E EEEE 168 PIXErTWIS rere A iain reir nee saa aaa eenetiaeiaes 168 PVN GO D S eae a easiest A ot aman aed
49. Effect Mode 1 are labeled as CMY in the Wholehog 3 system so you can also make use of the color picker HSI and other Wholehog 3 functions Use the CMY parameter controls to adjust the three Effect Mode 1 Modifier parameters for both the Global and Graphic fixture types 8 Change the X Rotation parameter to 5 DMX 32887 9 Change the Y Rotation parameter to a real world value of 32 DMX 32033 Define Graphic Object 2 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Select GRAPHIC OBJECT 2 and set the Opacity parameter to DMX 255 100 Change the Media Folder parameter to DMX 6 Sean Bridwell Change the Media File parameter to DMX 16 Fractal_Flower Change the Object parameter to DMX 9 moir swirl Change the X Rotation parameter to 28 DMX 33405 Change the Y Rotation parameter to 36 DMX 33577 Open the Effect Mode 1 parameter and set DMX 66 Circular Sinewave Z axis Wobbulation 50 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 5 Tutorials Adjust this effect with the Modifer parameters 17 Set the Effect Mode 1 Modifier 1 parameter to DMX 104 41 to adjust wave size 18 Set the Effect Mode 1 Modifier 2 parameter to DMX 86 34 to adjust wobbulation rate 19 Set the Effect Mode 1 Modifier 3 parameter to DMX 114 45 to adjust offset NOTE Modifier parameters make different adjustments depending on the effect you choose DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 5
50. Ethernet Cabling Configuration Option 1 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 11 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration DMX Universe 1 DMX Universe 2 WholeHog 3 Console See DMX 512 Data Cabling Ethernet Cabling Configuration Option 2 Powering On the Fixture WARNING This equipment is designed for connection to a branch circuit having a maximum overload protection of 20 A CAUTION Do not power on the fixture until verifying that the line cord cap is suitable for the power source in your location For more information see Attaching a Power Cord Cap on page 7 To power on the DL 2 fixture simply connect it to an appropriately rated power source CAUTION Always isolate DL 2 media servers from generators with a UPS or good quality power conditioner to prevent damage occurring to the integrated media server and projector housed in the DL 2 from generator drop outs and sharp voltage and frequency fluctuations 12 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Homing the Fixture When the DL 2 fixture is connected to an appropriately rated power source it automatically begins a homing procedure to verify that the major functions of the fixture and its internal projector are oriented properly Shortcut Holding down the inner most i e middle two menu tab buttons for more than two seconds will home the unit The DL e2 Menu Display Panel The DL 2 display panel gives access to the fixture
51. Frame setting to Out Frame Play forward once if opacity gt 0 setting and holds on the last frame Plays only when the content opacity value is greater than zero ES Plays media segment from In Frame setting to Out Frame setting 4 7 Play forward if opacity gt 0 looping continuously Plays only when the content opacity value is greater than zero Stops playback at the frame currently playing then jumps to the In Scrub In Frame Displays frame that has been defined by the In Frame parameter Displays frame that has been defined by the Out Frame l Pan Displays frame that has been defined by the In Frame parameter Scrub In Frame with statistics with media file data overlaid on the output n Displays frame that has been defined by the Out Frame ES SEUS OUE Pra EN SINSE parameter with media file data overlaid on the output Scrubbing displays the selected frame of the composite output of the media server While scrubbing the In Frame the frame selected by the In Frame coarse and fine channels will be displayed Likewise scrubbing the Out Frame will display the frame selected by the Out Frame coarse and fine channels When the with statistics option is selected the composite output includes text data related to the selected frame Remember that the In Frame and Out Frame parameters are defined as a DMX value mapped to the percentage of the media file length not a specific frame Note Ifthe Global Control Mode param
52. Global centerpoint Mod3 Not used Effect 2 l Corrects output for vertical concave cylinder Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 Not used Corrects output for vertical inside corner Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 adjusts horizontal centerpoint NA Corrects output for vertical outside corner Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 adjusts horizontal centerpoint correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 adjusts horizontal centerpoint Curved Surface Inside Sphere Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 adjusts horizontal centerpoint Enhanced Collage Mod1 grid style selection Mod2 grid portion displayed Mod3 edge blend spherical Mapping Outside Mod1 logitude angle Mod2 latitude angle Mod3 center latitude Spherical Mapping Inside Mod1 logitude angle Mod2 latitude angle Mod3 center latitude Mattes Mod1 Mode Mod2 Matte Select Mod3 texture source Reserved Defaults to effect 0 145 254 240 DL2 Digital Light User Manual Curved Surface Outside Sphere Mod1 139 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Global Pan and Scale Mod1 horizontal position Effect 2 Mod2 vertical position Mod3 Zoom Global Effect 2 These Modifier parameters adjust the option Modifier 1 selected in Channel 27 for DL 2 fixtures or 0 255 0 100 Channel 3 for Axon Media Servers Global Effect 2 The type of adj
53. Important Safety Information Instructions pertaining to continued protection against fire electric shock and injury to persons are found in Appendix E Please read all instructions prior to assembling mounting and operating this equipment Important Informations De S curit Les instructions se rapportant a la protection permanente contre les incendies lectrocution excessif et aux blessures corporelles se trouvent dans l Annexe E Veuillez lire toutes les instructions avant d assembler de monter ou d utiliser cet quipement Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise Sicherheitsanleitungen zum Schutz gegen Feuer elektrischen Schlag und Verletzung von Personen finden Sie in Anhang E Vor der Montage dem Zusammenbau und der Intbetriebnahme dieses Ger ts alle Anleitungen sorgf ltig durchlesen Informazioni I mportanti Di Sicurezza Le istruzioni sulla protezione da incendi folgorazione e infortuni sono contenute nell appendice E Si prega di leggere tutte le istruzioni prima di assemblare montare e azionare apparecchiatura Informacion I mportante De Seguridad En el Ap ndice E se encuentran instrucciones sobre protecci n continua contra incendios descarga el ctrica y lesiones personales Lea por favor todas las instrucciones antes del ensamblaje montaje y operaci n de este equipo DL 2 Digital Light User Manual V Symbols The following international caution and warning symbols appear in margins throughout this m
54. Mod1 horizontal shadow size Mod2 vertical shadow size Mod3 shadow opacity Zoom Blur Mod1 horizontal position center Mod2 vertical position center Mod3 zoom Chroma Shift Mod1 horizontal shift Mod2 vertical shift Mod3 Scale ShakeNBake Mod1 horizontal shake Mod2 vertical shift Mod3 Scale Slats Vertical Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade Slats Horizontal Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation Ql O1 O O1 N O1 00 Ol O O N O oo O K Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset 268 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Circular with Z axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation Modi size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation Modi size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with X axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation Modi size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Glow Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Glow Color Cycle Mod1 red cycle speed Mod2 114 93 Effect M
55. Modifier 2 DMX 13 Modifier 2 DMX 13 Modifier 3 DMX 203 Modifier 3 DMX 0 Modifier 1 This parameter determines transparency and color options for the selected matte alte Modifier 1 Action 2 White transparent use matie coor O 5 White transparent using a Graphic Object media fle content as the matte texture 10 Black transparent with matte color controlled by Modifier 3 as lookup in internal color gradient map 11 Black transparent with matte color controlled by Modifier 3 as lookup in internal color gradient map and inverted DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 165 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Modifier 2 The first 20 DMX values are assigned to the following Matte pattern options Modifier 3 This parameter determines the texture for the Matte mode selected with the Modifier 1 parameter Modifier 1 value NA Not Used 0 Graphic Object 1 texture without applied Effects Graphic Object 1 texture including its first applied Effect Graphic Object 1 texture including its first two applied Effects Graphic Object 1 texture including its first three applied Effects Graphic Object 2 texture without applied Effects a Graphic Object 2 texture including its first applied Effect Graphic Object 2 texture including its first three applied Effects Graphic Object 2 texture including its first two applied Effects Graphic Object 3 texture without applied Effects Graphic Object 3 texture including its first two appl
56. Pixels W Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 4 This option adds color to all pixels including black using the RGB color model Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 147 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Adde All Pixels M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 5 This option adds color to all pixels including black using the RGB color model Modifier 1 ncreases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation RGB Add to Non black Pixels M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 6 This option adds color to all pixels except black using the RGB color model Modifier 1 ncreases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifie
57. SERVICE stop homing WARNING 0000 Large Format Error Warning Message Display Status Message Menu Display The DL 2 fixture menu displays error warning information in two ways The first is the large block format that can be viewed from a distance when the menu is idle When there is more than one message the large format display cycles through the messages Each message displays for 3 seconds before cycling to the next message and continues looping through these messages until they have been cleared internally or you interact with the menu DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 219 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Button Action When in the large format display pressing any Status Message List Proj Status Cooling button reverts to the normal menu display showing the Detailed Message Display pane in the Info_Status tab of the menu At that point you can view the detailed information for the SMPs UDISI3A SINGH error warning messages or navigate elsewhere Inactivity Timer Status Message Detail l o Project t Id before i stri After 30 seconds of inactivity from the display i aes ines eee TETAS RU a Lee esa navigation editing buttons has passed the display returns to the large format error display y 3531 OMT jy S xwa should there be any new messages to be displayed or if there is a persistent error A persistent error is a case where the error condition continues to occur The se
58. Scrub Display the selected Out Frame Scrub Display the selected In Frame with statistics Scrub Display the selected Out Frame with statistics Palae Normal Speed Slow speeds from slowest toward normal 1 127 104 83 Play Speed 1 49 Normal Speed 128 Faster than Normal to Fastest 129 255 DL2 Digital Light User Manual 51 100 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Graphic 2 Synchronization No selection selection SS to Sync to Graphic 1 movietime 1 movie time Sreto Graphie t movete to Sync to Graphic 2 movie time 2 movie time aa SS to Sync to Graphic 3 movie time 3 movie time a to Sync to Object rotation 1 rotation 1 RoE to Object rotation 2 o to Object rotation 3 Sr gene n e to reverse Object rotation 1 105 84 Sync Mode ee a asee to reverse Object rotation 2 Sateen Oates oo to reverse sae A rotation 3 Sync to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 2 _ to apis movie time Sync to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 2 _ reverse rotation 2 14 No Selection Selection No Selecion o Sync to Fixture ID Number 1 z 106 85 Sync To eat to Fixture ID Number 2 2 Sync to Fixture Number 254 Sync to Fixture ID Number 255 255 Graphic 2 Effects Off No visual mode processing applied to output Content Optimization Mod1 black level Mod2 contrast Sepia tones Mod1 fades from original color to sepia colors Mod2 controls saturation Red tones Mod1 fades from original color to
59. Test Selecting On starts a test sequence for Focus Focus mechanical functionality Video Selecting a Video Pattern and On displays a Test sample video to test graphics engine functionality Reboot Media Server Selecting Restart reboots the internal media server Delete User Content Selecting Delete erases all User Content on server Upgrade Factory Selecting Upgrade installs updates to factory Content content requires connection to the CMA 26 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Menu Screen Descriptions Menu screens are presented on the display as a tabs Sub levels for a specific menu appear as that tab as is selected DMX Tab gt 5 The DMX screen lets you configure the fixture 9 amp source for the DMX link view the DMX settings for the g DMX512 i 5 fixture on each channel of its range and view po Protocol Start all 512 channel values on the DMX link nm St dad gt i o MEGLE Hanne DMX_Control Screen g Use the Control Tab to configure your fixture JEN Fixture ID You can choose from three DMX Protocol 3 types 3 1 e Standard protocol requires 170 channels o d bl Il DL 2 ters for direct amp ae esa parameters for direct Source ee T control T 1 1 5 F a e Dual protocol reduces the fixture footprint Art Net to 132 channels by implementing only two 8 Protocol Start graphic objects Standard Standard 7 e Sing
60. User Manual xxii DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter l Product Overview This chapter describes the features and specifications of the DL 2 fixture and the Content Management Application software The DL 2 Digital Light 2 fixture merges video projection and automated lighting technologies with a DMX controllable digital media server housed in a moving yoke fixture The built in 32 bit Graphics Engine utilizes Windows XP Embedded and DirectX application programming interface to provide extensive image control of up to three 3 D graphic objects DL 2 fixtures use DMX512 protocol to control hardware functions like pan tilt and zoom as well as media control functions including loading images and movies and mapping them onto 3 D graphical objects The internal graphics engine lets you manipulate position scale rotation apply visual effects and color mix each graphic object You can create and control up to three of these objects and then apply global effects to the composite image The DL 2 fixture provides a fully equipped internal digital camera and IR illuminator to input live video to its own graphic engine or to another DL 2 fixture or device While combining camera and light from the same source to allow a unique point of view the camera also features optical and digital zoom frame rate and invert effects as well as freeze frame color negative and grayscale conversion effects The ability to point the camera at it s own
61. ainawoa tin ocean taatanie 168 SHaAKCNBOKS sanndraaa wecascnie nus a anna intra A eee A a Naaceeey 169 SINC WaVe Ceulan ss aurcaint Sasnseattud O ais haben a aE 169 Sinewave Circular w X axiS WODDUIAtION ccccccc cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneas 169 Sinewave Circular W Y axiS WODDUIAtION cece cece cece e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 169 Sinewave Circular w Z axiS WODDUIAtION cece cece cece e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneas 169 SINC WAVE HORIZON bal axicceonenssea aia AT AA N E E ARA 170 Sinewave Horizontal w X axiS Wobbulation ccc cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneas 170 Sinewave Horizontal w Y axis Wobbulation ccc cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenees 170 Sinewave Horizontal w Z axiS Wobbulation ccc cece eee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 170 SINGWaVe Veral sruenccatanuasaaataat iii asa N aaa aaa 170 Sinewave Vertical w X axiS Wobbulation cccccc cece cece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 170 Sinewave Vertical W Y axiS Wobbulation ccc cece cece cece ee eeeeeseeeeeeeennenees 170 Sinewave Vertical w Z axiS Wobbulation cece cece cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 170 SI GES aaa tesa ea ican enaean ae caaivaies a bleu Renter A RAS eek A 171 VET Cal SIAES cajiinmitnawesear rsh A seia cota dide cess a a tar aa nica 171 Horizontal Slats are a cite asians rasa athena iowa E S 171 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual xvii spercl Map ONG s nciire ted ox ewan entureteute etre on ea
62. and it is visible from every viewpoint and position This option allows you to apply color to the background Modifier 1 Defines the red color component from DMX values of 0 no red to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Defines the green color component from DMX values of 0 no green to 255 100 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component from DMX values of 0 no blue to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Background Color Cycle Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 132 There is a background behind every composite image You cannot rotate scale or position the background and it is visible from every viewpoint and position This option allows you to cycle a color sequence on the background controlling the transition speed Modifier 1 Defines the red color component speed A DMX value of 128 50 default cycle speed DMX Values above the midpoint increase cycle speed in a forward direction to 255 100 fastest change speed DMX values below the midpoint increase cycle speed in a backward direction to 0 fastest change speed Modifier 2 Defines the green color component speed in the same way as Modifier 1 Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component speed in the same way as Modifier 1 140 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Chromakey W Object Effect MGlobal Effect A chromakey removes a color or small
63. color range from one graphic image to reveal another behind it The removed color becomes transparent Modifier parameters define the color you want to select as the chromakey in terms of Red Green and Blue values Chromakey Coarse Effect Mode parameter DMX value 28 The Chromakey Coarse parameter selects a color range 40 either side of the defined value Chromakey Fine Effect Mode parameter DMX value 26 The Chromakey Fine parameter selects a color range 15 either side of the defined value Chromakey Medium Effect Mode parameter DMX value 27 The Chromakey Medium parameter selects a color range 25 either side of the defined value Modifier Parameters Modifier 1 Defines the red color component from DMX values of 0 no red to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Defines the green color component from DMX values of 0 no green to 255 100 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component from DMX values of 0 no blue to 255 100 maximum blue saturation DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 141 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Chromakey Inverse M Object Effect M Global Effect A chromakey removes a color or small color range from one graphic image to reveal another behind it The removed color becomes transparent The modifier parameters define the color you want to select as the chromakey in terms of Red Green and Blue values The Inverse Chromakey
64. color value gt mod value 15 Green Blue ae eo o oo 255 else color 0 17 am caer aB Invert From Red From Green to ee Blue to Cyan Magenta to Yellow RGB Invert and Swap to GBR Red to Green Green to Blue Blue to Red RGB Invert and Swap to BRG Red to Blue Green to Red Blue to Green 108 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual i Red CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Ettect Mode a DMX a Edge Detect Color Horizontal Vertical Comparison 20 search size search size threshold Edge Detect B W Horizontal Vertical Comparison 21 search size search size threshold Texture Ripple Horizontal Amplitude Texture Ripple Vertical Amplitude Texture Ripple Circular a recto oe se nts 25 Texture Ripple Circular Asymmetrical Amplitude 26 Chromakey Fine select key color using Modifier Green Blue channels 97 Chromakey Medium select key color using Green Blue Modifier channels Chromakey Coarse select key color using Modifier Green Blue channels Chromakey Fine Inverse select key color using Green Blue Modifier channels Chromakey Medium Inverse select key color using Green Blue Modifier channels Chromakey Coarse Inverse select key color using ns Green Blue Modifier channels Scan Line converts image colors to colors ina Selects Fades to l i i i Not used single line of the image scan line converted image Transparent Wipes opens the selected graphic to Selects center of Selects from 6 i Mi ers Area of wipe i i revea
65. default the In Frame is the beginning of the media file and the Out Frame is the end of the file Media files can have different lengths In Frame and Out Frame Parameters You can select any segment of a media file for playback by assigning an In Frame value as a start point and an Out Frame as an end point Note DMX parameter values for these parameters do not correspond to a particular frame They are defined as a percentage of the movie length This makes it possible to create segments with an Out Frame preceding the In Frame and simplifies playback synchronization between media files The In Frame parameter corresponds to a 16 bit DMX value equal to a starting point for the playback segment of the selected file The Out Frame parameter corresponds to a 16 bit DMX value equal to an end point for the playback segment of the selected media file Assigning the In Frame and Out Frame parameters to default DMX values will playback the entire movie file Choosing other settings are useful when you want to e begin or end a media file at any point other than the default e start or stop on a specific image e you need to shorten the media file to a specific length In Frame Default DMX Value 0 The beginning of a media file is the playback start point Out Frame Default DMX Value 65535 The end of a media file is the playback endpoint As you move from 0 to 100 of the In Frame value range you can select the beginning of a media file s
66. domain and can be used freely by anyone without payment or licensing If the work is not public domain it is considered literary property The Copyright Act provides substantial penalties for copyright infringement ranging from 10 000 for accidental infringement to 250 000 for willful infringement However contrary to popular belief there really is not that much material in the public domain so this approach will limit you creatively DL 2 Digital Light User Manual vil What if want to use a clip in a public performance It s not being filmed or taped Surely don t need permission for that Public gatherings require clearance whenever copyrighted data is projected to audiences or for any use other than just personal viewing Concerts trade shows industrial shows parties and raves are all examples of public performance and permission must be obtained Suppose want to use a still photo or a magazine cover or a television clip Do have to obtain permission for them too Yes they are also copyrighted works whose owners must grant a license for their usage Do need any other permissions to use this material In many cases you do You may need to obtain permission to use the appearance of actors who appear in the clip as well as pay the writers and directors of the film that your clip comes from What about music hear you can use 8 bars for free 8 bars for free is a fallacy that has been passed around as a fact for a lon
67. for each individual media stream including A choice of multiple play modes and play speeds The ability to define any segment of a video loop including Scrub capability Multiple color mixing and visual effects that can be combined any way you choose Variable Opacity to allow for crossfading or dissolves between media streams Full control of image Rotation Positioning and Scaling on X Y and Z axes Visual Modes that let you control black level and contrast to optimize content Video input or camera capture you can apply to 2d 3d objects 35 Global parameters provide graphic controls to the composite image created by up to 3 media streams Collage Generator technology configures multiple media server outputs to display a single image in arrays up to 8 x 8 Curved Surface Support corrects for shape distortions that occur when you project onto surfaces that aren t flat Intensity overlays the opacity control to provide system wide intensity level Overall image Color Mixing applied to composite media stream image Color Effects including edge colors allow for combined image color mixing Multiple Mask selections with edge fading and strobe effects Edge fading for creating montages Keystone correction on output projection Viewpoint controls provide ability to change viewing angle perspective on images Multiple modes for synchronizing content playback on multiple media servers
68. functionality A F Projector In By DMX jector Lan On i Use the Projector Input option to select 5 Proj Lamp Projector Powerup DMX 4 which input the projector should accept When Zoom Override 128 j Off Focus Override 128 Off i External is selected the projector takes input directly from an external source and bypasses wy yay opu the internal graphics engine When Internal Projector Ceiling Off is selected the projector takes input directly Projector Rear Off from the graphics engine Internal is the Projector OSD Menu Activate default configuration setting Projector Defaults Reset Setting the Projector In By DMX field to Yes sets DMX as the projector s input source The Projector Lamp field lets you manually turn the lamp On or Off Use the Projector Powerup to choose the control option for turning the lamp on The options are ALWAYS ON MANUAL DMX This only takes effect when the fixture powers up e Always On turns the projector lamp on when the fixture starts up regardless of whether there is a DMX Art Net signal If there is no DMX Art Net signal the lamp shuts off when the shutdown timeout period expires DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 31 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System e Manual turns on the projector lamp only when set to On via DMX Menu or the CMA e DMX only turns the lamp on when it receives a DMX signal or Art Net signal connected to it When the internal proje
69. in preparing files for a local Archive e A top level folder which contains a Media and Objects folder e The Media folder must contain subfolders and valid files may go into those subfolders e Only objects with a x extension are allowed in the Objects folder no subfolders Creating Content Backup Archive Backups are created using the Content Archive feature An Content Archive file is a compressed file containing all the User Content from a single fixture along with the assigned DMX values for folders and files To create a Content Archive 1 In the Management Client Window select All Server in the left pane 2 Select the Server with the content you want to backup in the right pane 3 Select Create Content Archive from the Media Files or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list Deploying a Content Archive Deploying the Content Archive you created restores the user content to a fixture To replicate this content to other fixtures on the link use the Clone Content feature see Cloning User Content on page 201 200 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA Cloning User Content Cloning is a file transfer operation where all the User Content of a single fixture is replicated across one or more other fixtures Cloning preserves all user content naming and DMX values This allows you for example to send the custom content for a specific show to all the fixtures used in
70. left direction on the Navigation button DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 23 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System DL 2 Menu Options The menu display consists of a set of top level tabbed screens and their associated subtabs Tab Sereens Controis OPtions Function Notes DMX Control Source Sets DMX as fixture communication source Art Net Set Universe field from 0 16 Art Net protocol Set Subnet field from 0 16 Art Net protocol Protocol Motion global 3 objects 170 channels Motion global 2 objects 132 channels Single Motion global 1 object 94 channels Fixture ID ELO 255 Assigns the fixture a unique number on fixture network Start 1 512 Sets the fixture s DMX start channel Channel Raw View Main Table Displays DMX values for all 512 DMX link channels in rows of values Offset Scrolls Scrolls through rows of DMX values rows of DMX values E keameseaionennniaall Times second for refreshing displayed values Rate Refresh On DMX values updated instantly Timer or Display does not refresh Protocol a ie eae fixture Movement and Camera parameter View ee eleanor Global Displays Intensity Iris Edge Fade Viewpoint and Keystone correction parameters values for the composite image Obj 1 Displays Position Rotation Scaling and Effects Ob D parameters values for the selected graphic object lt 3 Fixture Pan Invert Inverts the direction of the pan motor Default Tilt Invert Inverts the dire
71. linked through an Ethernet network Content Management Application Available for Windows and Mac operating systems Communicates with other Axon and DL 2 media servers over an Ethernet network Uploads and downloads custom digital content to DL 2 fixtures Configures Axon and DL 2 media servers Updates software including content applications and operating system to Axon and DL 2 media servers DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 1 Product Overview Hardware 17 Motion Parameters for mechanical fixture control include Mechanical Iris adjustment to full black out 400 degree Pan and 240 degree Tilt movement DMX control of projector zoom and focus DMX control of camera functions e Integrated digital camera feeds digital video capture directly into the graphic engine that provides Optical digital zoom to increase image up to 216x Options for 1 30 frame captures sec Vertical and or Horizontal image inversion Black and White Color Negative and Freeze Frame effects White Balance including Red and Blue gain control e Infrared illuminator allows video capture even in blackout settings e Remote video input and output switching let you select live video from external source including another DL 2 fixture s camera feed e Full color display and menu functions e Powered by a 3 2GHZ Pentium 4 HT processor with an ATI X850XT Graphics Processor e Gigabit Ethernet for fast content uploading and multiple fixture synchron
72. master file Or if you are intermediate video editor yourself there are many Video editing packages that will allow you to size and optimize the master for your application Once the master file s are created you will need high definition encoder software HES suggest Expert HD for PC www pixeltools com For more information on creating DL 2 content see Custom User Content on page 289 or go to Collages Using Live S Video Input Axon and DL 2 media servers can create collage arrays using S Video input All the media serv ers used to project a collage need to be receiving the same source input signal to use video as a Collage feed For example using DL 2 Camera outputting across a 2 x 2 20 K lumen Central Panorama Col lage all four DL 2 are assigned an output from the D Tek switcher to each S Video input and a fifth DL 2 is used as the source DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 137 CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect 138 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter I3 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Effects can be applied to the Media File content texture mapped onto a 3 D object Multiple Color and Geometric options are available in Effect Mode parameters for both individual Graphic object and Global control Most of the effect options you will find described in this chapter are available for Effects 1 and Effect 2 parameters at both the graphic control level for each Graphic Object as well as the
73. must be packaged in a suitable manner to ensure the protection of such Product unit or parts and such package Shall be clearly and prominently marked to indicate that the package contains returned Product units or parts and with an RMA number Accompany all returned Product units or parts with a written explanation of the alleged problem or malfunction Ship returned Product units or parts to 2105 Gracy Farms Lane Austin TX 78758 USA Note Freight Damage Claims are invalid for fixtures shipped in non factory boxes and packing materials Freight All shipping will be paid by the purchaser Items under warranty shall have return shipping paid by the manufacturer only in the Continental United States Under no circumstances will freight collect shipments be accepted Prepaid shipping does not include rush expediting such as air freight Air freight can be sent customer collect in the continental United States REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED FOR UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER OTHER THAN THE LIMITED WARRANTY STATED ABOVE HIGH END SYSTEMS INC MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO ANY PRODUCT AND HIGH END SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HIGH END SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE INCLUDING LOST PROFITS SUSTAINED OR INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCT OR CAUSED BY PRODUCT DEFECTS OR THE PARTIAL OR T
74. of 255 100 172 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Modifier 3 Adjusts to the size of the sphere A DMX value of 64 25 no adjustment Adjusting toward 0O compresses the grid toward the vertical center Values above the midrange stretch the grid toward the edges of the image at a DMX value of 255 100 When the Spherical Mapping option is selected in a Global Effect parameter and a Graphic Effect parameter s DMX value 254 the Graphic Effect Modifier parameters make the following Spherical Mapping adjustments Modifier 1 Corrects the vertical bend A value of 0 no adjustment Values below the midpoint bend the horizontal lines toward the equator to a maximum at 255 Modifier 2 Adjusts the center of the vertical bend A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Adjusting toward 0 moves the bend center down to the bottom of the image Values above the midrange move the bend center up to the top of the image at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Adjusts the center of the horizontal bend A DMX value of 64 25 no adjustment Adjusting toward O bends the vertical grid lines toward the center of the output Values above the midrange bends the lines away from the vertical center to a maximum at 255 100 TIP Modifier channels for Effect Mode 1 are labeled as CMY in the Wholehog 3 system so you can also make use of the color picker HSI and other Wholehog 3 functions U
75. projection combined with adjustable zoom creates unique realtime video feedback and hall of mirrors effects The IR illuminator allows visibility focusing and fading in blackout situations The Content Management Application CMA runs on your workstation or laptop computer and communicates with DL 2 fixtures over an Ethernet network The CMA lets you remotely upload move and clone content files configure fixtures and upgrade software Features System e DL 2 software based on Windows XP Embedded and DirectX technology e Powerful Content Management and Configuration software can remotely manage multiple DL 2 fixtures e Integrated Sony camera with Super HAD technology and infrared illuminator provides live video input and output from fixture location e Supports importing of custom content including 3D objects media files still images e DMX512 and Art Net support e Remote software upgrade capability e Royalty free stock digital art collection features over 1000 lighting optimized files DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 1 CHAPTER 1 Product Overview RGBHV and S Video connections accept a wide range of media device inputs Collage software included with graphics engine Graphics Engine Simultaneous playback of three discrete media streams on separate 2D 3D objects Image Optimizing Controls let you adjust both Black Level and Contrast for each cue and for each image 30 Object parameters give you graphic controls
76. reconfigure the upgrade is complete you may remove all your external USB devices Return to Main Menu 228 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Appendix A DL e and Axon DMX Protocol DL 2 fixtures and Axon Media Servers utilize the same DMX protocol except that DL 2 fixtures include channels for motion and camera control This table describes the Standard Dual and Single Protocol for DL 2 fixtures and Axon Media Servers Motion and Camera Control Standard Dual Single Protocol Movement Functions DL 2 fixtures iA 1 NA Pan Course 2 NA Pan Fine Moves projector head from 0 to 400 a 0 100 32768 50 ARA S M head f 0 to 240 0 100 32768 50 3 oves projector head from 0 to aoa Tilt Fine a NA Ce i ae ee 7 NA Zoom Adjusts zoom from narrow to wide 0255 0 100 128 60 e NA MSpeed See Appendix B tor conversion ables 0255 0100 o o o NA macro Reserved for tutureuse o2 omo o o Reserved 14 1 14 19 Fee Control Reserved 8 eee ooo o l C To prevent inadvertent triggering some Control Function options won t activate until the value has been held for a period of time A number in parenthesis is the minimum number of consecutive times a DMX value must be received from a controller before the operation begins DL2 Digital Light User Manual 229 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Home Focus Zoom Iris 20 170 178 Function Projector Left arrow o Left arrow 193 196 196
77. red tones Mod2 controls saturation Gray maker Mod1 compresses colors to shades Visual Mode of gray Mod2 adjusts contrast Gray maker2 Always gray Mod1 brightness Mod2 contrast Posterizer Mod1 reduces color detail Mod2 adjusts contrast Color to Black amp White Mod1 fades color RGB 0 to B W 50 to white 100 Mod2 not used Fire Gradient Mod1fades original to converted Mod2 not used reserved 260 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol a DL2 Digital Light User Manual 261 Negative Art Mod1 fades from original image to converted image Mod2 subtracts red from 0 128 subtracts green from 129 255 Exposure Control Mod1 adjusts color contrast Mod2 adjusts color shift Invert B amp W Keep Color Mod1 black comparison level Mod2 white comparison level Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file ma Crossfade from original to source texture Image Scale and Rotate Mod1 image scale Mod2 rotation angle Film Roll Mod1 horizontal roll speed Mod2 Vertical roll soeed Pixelate Mod1 amount of pixelation Mod 2 not 15 used 107 Visual Mode Faux LED Mod1 LED size Mod2 spacing Faux Tile Mod1 Tile size Mod2 spacing Fuzzifier Mod1 x axis distance Mod2 y axis distance Drop Shadow Mod1 horizontal shadow size Mod2 vertical shadow size Zoom Blur Mod1 horizontal position center Mod2 vertical position center
78. the image horizontally to a maximum at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 0 no adjustment Increasing DMX values blur the image vertically to a maximum at a DMX value of 255 100 Original Content Visual Mode Modifier 1 DMX value 255 100 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 18 Visual Mode Modifier 2 DMX value 255 100 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 89 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Gray maker Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 4 This effect gradually transitions the color image to a grayscale image Use the Gray Maker effect when you want to add an undertone of grey to the colors in an image NOTE If content is already grayscale there is no effect applied but Modifier 2 can still effect image contrast Modifier 1 At a DMX value of 0 the image will be full color As you increase the DMX value more gray is introduced until at a DMX value of 255 all color has been replaced with shades of gray Modifier 2 Adjusts the brightness of the image at the grayscale transition level selected with the Modifier 1 parameter Ci Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 4 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 4 Visual Mode Modifier DMX value 128 50 ae Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 4 Visual Mode Modifier DMX value 190 75 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100 90 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Gray maker 2 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value
79. will allow you to navigate to the spot on your hard drive containing the media you want to add You can add single files or multiple files To add multiple files hold down shift and select multiple media files with your mouse DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 199 CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA 5 Click Add Objects if you wish to add custom 3 D objects to the archive This will again bring up a file browser window to navigate to you 3 D objects Any 3 D objects added will appear in the right hand column of the wizard 3 D objects do not get added to folders 6 Click Next at the bottom of the wizard This will take you to another screen where you choose where to save and what to name your archive 7 Click Browse to navigate to where you want to save and name your archive 8 Click Next Your archive will then be created NOTES The Remove Media and Remove Object buttons can be used to remove media files and objects from the wizard when creating the archive Currently the archive will not be created unless each media folder created has at least one media file in it All media folders files and objects will be assigned DMX addresses in alphabetical fashion For CMA Running Mac OS 10 4 To create a Local Archive you must first create the folder structure recognized by the CMA The Creative Local Archive compresses these files into a dlc format that can be recognized for uploading Use the following folder structure
80. 0 a 24 Bottom Lett Y Move botiom left comer y value to conter 0258 000 0 0 Global Viewpoint Perspective View Spherical Coordinates Look at point center of universe oO o Look at point graphic 1 aa Look at point graphic 2 2 NA Look at point graphic 3 Perspective View Cartesian Coordinates Look at point center of universe tao i i Look at point graphic 1 5 27 Viewpoint p grap sz Mode Look at point graphic 2 6 NA Look at point graphic 3 Orthogonal View Cartesian Coordinates Look at point center of universe ie i oe 28 29 30 21 32 33 Look at point graphic 1 za Look at point graphic 2 10 Look atpoint graphic2 10 NA Look at point graphic 3 Maximum horizontal angle clockwise 0 Oo Viewpoint Genter 32768 32768 50 X Position Maximum horizontal angle counterclockwise 65535 Maximum Vertical angle clockwise Oo oO pene Center 32768 32768 50 Y Position Maximum Vertical angle counterclockwise 65535 Maximum distance from origin in front of view Viewpoint target eiea ii 32768 eel Maximum distance from origin behind view target 65535 49 50 51 52 53 54 244 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol No control selected Safe Reserved Axon Shutdown when Intensity 0 80 Reserved w N ere pers A A Reset when Intensity 0 80 s T T N Or _ Global Reserved Control Spherical Control Statistic
81. 0_Lavalamp O22 O21 SO Cloud01O mv SO DeepO0l mv2 S0fpsmve mey 8 SD _ARip myv2 mey 9 SO _Rollup mve m O23 50_Slink O24 O26 02 025 30fps mve mey 11 SO Smeltovem SD Softripple mve SD Spotlightmye SD Stack mye mney fd Apollo Glass 2 off Artbeats 3 D Digit_Airials_1 8 a ff HES Foliage 11 E HES Gothic 12 E HES Logos 13 f HES Setup and T Managing User Content All Stock and User content can be viewed and refreshed but the CMA client gives you additional control over other aspects of your custom content Within the CMA window you can e Rename user files and folders e Delete files and folders e Control DMX value assignment to files and folders e Move files and folders between your local drive and a media server Naming and Deleting User Content Files and Folders You can Rename any user content folder or file displayed in the right pane of the CMA window using the pull down Media Folders or 3D Objects menu or with a right click selection Use the standard Windows operating system naming conventions You can Delete any user content folder or file displayed in the right pane of the CMA window using the pull down Media Folders or 3D Objects menu or with a right click selection NOTE You cannot Delete a movie if the media server is playing it 194 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA Assigning DMX Values to User Content Th
82. 1 CHAPTER 5 Tutorials Lesson 5 Viewpoint This lesson demonstrates the global parameters including viewpoint and global effects 1 Be sure that the MOTION Dimmer parameter for DL 2 fixtures the GLOBAL Intensity parameter and GRAPHIC OBJECT 1 Opacity parameter are all set to 100 DMX 255 Define Graphic Object 2 With GRAPHIC OBJECT 1 selected change the Media Folder parameter to feedback video DMX 8 3 Change the Media File parameter to DMX 7 7 SD_Cloud010 4 Change the Object parameter to DMX 21 triangle 5 Set the Z Position parameter to 118 pixels DMX 35187 the Y Position parameter to 30 pixels DMX 33372 and the X Position parameter to 43 pixels DMX 31888 Define Graphic Object 2 6 Select GRAPHIC OBJECT 2 and bring the Intensity parameter to 100 DMX 255 7 Change the Media Folder parameter to DMX 8 feedback video 8 Change the Media File parameter to DMX 9 9 SD_Deep01 9 Change the Object parameter to DMX 8 toroid chk board 10 Change the Z Position parameter to a value of 64 pixels DMX 34087 Define Graphic Object 3 11 Select the GRAPHIC OB ECT 3 and change the Intensity parameter to 100 DMX 255 12 Set the Media Folder parameter to DMX 8 feedback video 13 Set the Media File parameter to DMX 8 8 S_ Dash 14 Change the Object parameter to DMX 44 star bevel 4 15 Set the Z Position parameter to 40 pixels DMX 33592 the Y Position param
83. 1 Adjusts black level from 0 full black through 255 100 brightest At a DMX value of 128 50 there is no adjustment Modifier 2 from 0 least contrast through 255 100 maximum contrast At a DMX value of 128 50 there is no adjustment Tip All the factory content provided has been optimized already This parameter is especially useful for optimizing user content or camera capture DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 85 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Faux LED Visual Mode parameter DMX value 16 This options divides the image into a grid of circles to mimic an LED wall The color of the center pixel in each cell defines the solid color for that circle You can control the number and spacing of LEDs choose between a black and white grid and adjust color peaking Modifier 1 Controls the number of LEDs The default DMX value of 0 a 10 x 10 grid of tiles Increasing the DMX value increases grid divisions to a maximum of 100 x 100 tiles at a value of 255 100 Note A small number of larger tiles will also result in reduced color variation Modifier 2 Adjusts the LED spacing DMX values below the midpoint of the range increase the Spacing between tiles on a black background from O to a maximum space between tiles at a DMX value of 127 Values above the midpoint increase the spacing between tiles on a white background to a maximum space between tiles at a DMX value of 255 100 Original Conte
84. 1 Adjusts the longitude horizontal angle A value of 0 no adjustment The number of degrees of angle increases as you increase value to maximum at 255 100 Modifier 2 Adjusts the latitude vertical angle A value of 0 no adjustment The num ber of degrees of angle increases as you increase value to maximum at 255 100 Modifier 3 Adjusts the center of the latitude angle A value of 128 no adjustment and assumes the center of the latitude angle is at the equator Values below the midpoint move the center of the latitude angle down from the equator to a minimum at 0 Values above the midpoint move the center of the latitude angle above the equator to a maximum at 255 When the Spherical Mapping option is selected in a Global Effect parameter and a Graphic Effect parameter s DMX value 253 the Graphic Effect Modifier parameters make the following Spherical Mapping adjustments Modifier 1 Controls the vertical offset of the projector A value of 128 no adjustment to maximum at 255 100 Values below the midpoint compress the grid toward the equator Values above the midpoint stretch the horizontal grid lines away from the equator Modifier 2 Adjusts the vertical offset of the sphere A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Adjusting toward O moves the center of the adjustment down toward the bottom of the image Values above the midrange move the bend center up to the top of the image at a DMX value
85. 1 Note Tiling on Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2 Mod1 x axis tiling scaler Mod2 y axis tiling scaler Mod3 not used Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 green to alpha Mods blue to alpha Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2 inverted green to alpha Mod3 inverted blue to alpha Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from original to source texture Image Scale and Rotate Mod1 scales image Mod2 rotation angle Mod3 rotation speed Film Roll Mod1 horizontal roll speed Mod2 vertical roll soeed Mod3 Image scale Pixelate Mod1 Amount of pixelation Mod2 horizontal scaler Mod3 vertical scaler Faux LED Mod1 LED size Mod2 spacing Mod 3 color peaking Faux Tile Mod1 Tile size Mod2 spacing Mod 3 color peaking Fuzzifier Mod1 Horizontal distance Mod2 vertical distance Mod3 fuzz decay Drop Shadow Mod1 horizontal shadow size Mod2 vertical shadow size Mod3 shadow Opacity Zoom Blur Mod1 horizontal position center Mod2 vertical position center Mod3 zoom Chroma Shift Mod1 horizontal shift Mod2 vertical shift Mod3 Scale ShakeNBake Mod1 horizontal shake Mod2 vertical shift Mod3 Scale Slats Vertical Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade Slats Horizontal Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation Mod
86. 1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset DL2 Digital Light User Manual 277 O OD O O O1 QI O1 O1 O1 Ql Ol ol QI gt gt A A gt d NO 00 N O O1 gt ice NO O 00 O1 gt Z gt APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Circular with Z axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with X axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Glow Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Glow Color Cycle Mod1 red cycle speed Mod2 green cycle speed Mod3 blue cycle speed Reserved defaults to Effect 0 75 79 Downward Vertical Streaks Mod1 start position Mod2 streak angle Mod3 fade Gaussian Blur Mod1 sample distance Mod2 filter pass number Mod3 curve shape Sharpen Mod1 sample distance Mod2 filter pass number Mod3 sharpen scale Reserved Defaults to effect mode 0 83 252 Spherical mapping control 1 Mod 1 projector y offset Mod2 sphere y offset Mod3 vertical size Defaults t
87. 100 Moves object nearer from center of display 0 36767 0 49 0 nt 0 36767 0 49 Centers object along Z axis in display 32768 73 Moves object back along Z axis at center of 36769 51 100 display 65535 89 90 91 92 93 94 258 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Graphic 2 Functions Standard Dual Selects ely suai level from completely l Opacity transparent 0 to opaque 255 Ceo O00 eee ee Graphic 2 Content Definition OEE eC BC 75 3 D Object File First Stock 3 D Object flat plane Additional Stock 3 D Objects 2 149 First User 3 D Objects Additional User Objects No selection selection HES Folder 1 kesre oo HES folder 2 40 76 Media Folder First User folder 44 User folder 41 a Folders 42 239 ER 239 Integrated video camera capture The Media File parameter is ignored No selection 77 Media File First Media File 1 er Pa Additional Media Files 2 255 2 255 99 78 Defines the beginning of a Media File segmentas 0 0 100 100 79 a percentage of the movie length 65535 E 80 Defines the end of a Media File segment as a foe er OutFrame percentage of the movie length ee eae ooze ie Play forward looping continuously Play forward once and hold on the last frame Pause Play forward if opacity gt 0 hold on last frame Play forward if opacity gt 0 looping continuously Pause and rewind to In Frame 1094 2 uaymoee Scrub Display the selected In Frame
88. 19 Out Frame percentage of the movie length r pee ease Play forward looping continuously Play forward once and hold on the last frame Pause Play forward if opacity gt 0 hold on last frame Play forward if opacity gt 0 looping continuously Pause and rewind to In Frame 120 Play Mode Scrub Display the selected In Frame Scrub Display the selected Out Frame Scrub Display the selected In Frame with statistics Scrub Display the selected Out Frame with statistics Reserved Normal Speed Slow speeds from slowest toward normal 142 Play Speed Normal Speed Faster than Normal to Fastest DL2 Digital Light User Manual 10 255 1 127 128 129 255 1 49 50 51 100 NO CO Ol O APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Graphic 3 Synchronization No selection selection a a to Sync to Graphic 1 movie time 1 movie time Se to SynctoGraphic2movietime 2 movie time Se to SynctoGraphic3movietime 3 movie time a to Object rotation 1 ii e to Syne to Objectrotation2 rotation 2 a oe Sync to reverse Sync to reverse Object rotation 1 rotation 1 Sync to reverse Object rotation 143 122 Sync Mode Sync to reverse Objectrotaion2 8 Sync to reverse Object rotation 3 Ez Sync to Sync to Graphic movie time and rotation 1 movie time and rotation 1 Syneto Graphie movie tme and rotation 1 to Sync to Graphic movie time and rotation 2 movie time and rotation 2
89. 2 Adjusts contrast from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 for maximum contrast Tip All the factory content provided has been optimized already This parameter is especially useful for optimizing User content or camera capture 82 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Chroma Shift Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 21 Shifts the red blue and green component colors in an image You can offset color components vertically and or horizontally Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint shift the color components right to a maximum at a value of 0 Values above the midpoint shift the color components left to a maximum at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint shift the color components down to a maximum at a value of 0 Values above the midpoint shift the color components up to a maximum at a value of 255 100 Original Content Visual Mode Modifier 1 DMX value 105 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 21 Visual Mode Modifier 2 DMX value 148 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 83 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Drop Shadow Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 19 You can create a drop shadow behind the media file texture on a 3D object and vary it s size horizontally and vertically This option creates a black plane behind the selected media file text
90. 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase speed and direction A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255 100 fastest speed DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction from no adjustment to 0 fastest speed Texture Ripple Circular M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 24 This option varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the z axis without affecting the underlying object This creates an effect of concentric rippling out from the object center Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase speed and direction A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255 100 fastest speed DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction from no adjustment to 0 fastest speed DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 175 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Texture Ripple Horizontal M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 22 This option varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the x axis
91. 3 or 254 activates specific spherical mapping control options for Modifier parameters For more NA NA about Modifier parameter functionality see Effect 113 92 Effect Mode 1 1 Mode and Effect 2 Mode on page 100 and 0 255 0 100 Modifier 3 specific effect options listed alphabetically in Chapter 13 DL2 Digital Light User Manual 265 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Off no effects selection 0 OO CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB reduces color values 1 Modi cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values D Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color values 3 Modi cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow RGB Add All Pixels 4 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add 2 All Pixels 5 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add non black pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR 7 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to BGR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 1 if color value lt DMX value invert color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 2 if color value gt DMX invert color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Effect Solarize if color value lt DMX set color to 0 114 93 Mode 2 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 11 NA Solarize 4 if color value gt DMX set color to 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue DotP and Resample 13 Mod1 Mod2 and Mods control resamplin
92. 36 ratio locked then Pixel Aspect Ratio Square Pixels el peace eee multiply the Height and Width Frame Rate 24 Frames per second and make adjustments to the Width until your pixel count is close to 800 000 total 5 Once you have achieved a pixel count close to 800 000 make sure it is a multiple of 16 for correct MPEG encoding by simply dividing your width by 16 and making adjustments 6 The image shows the resulting configuration determined for a 8 x 2 array 7 Add your HD footage size scale and or crop accordingly light optimize and out put your master file for encoding 124 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect The following tables shows configuration specifications for selected Collage options Array describes the number of outputs positioned horizontally by the number of outputs positioned vertically each displaying their portion of the content The second set of numbers is the aspect ratio for the overall panorama configuration I mage Resolution is represented as width and height in pixels The number of DL2 units required is also noted Central Panorama Collage Specifications Array Array Maximum Recommended Configuration W x H Image Resolution W x H 2x2 DL 2 Units 1024 W x 768 H 3x3 1024 W x 768 H O 1024 W x 768 H N O1 1024 W x 768 H 1024 W x 768 H 49 1024 W x 768 H O K O TOAWKTH a ee ee
93. 5 963 US 7 055 964 US 7 057 797 US 7 073 910 US 7 078 869 US 7 092 098 US 7 119 902 US 7 161 562 US 7 175 317 US 7 181 112 US D347 113 US D350 408 US D359 574 US D360 404 US D365 165 US D366 712 US D370 080 US D372 550 US D374 439 US D377 338 US D381 740 US D409 771 AT E169413 CA 2142619 CA 2145508 CA 2245842 DE 22588 4 08 DE 621495 DE 655144 DE 69320175 4 DE 69322401 0 DE 69331145 2 DE 69525856 7 DE 69734744 3 DE 797503 DK 0655144 DK 1447702 EP 0475082 EP 0621495 EP 0655144 EP 0662275 EP 0767398 EP 0797503 EP 0969247 EP 1447702 ES 0621495 FR 0621495 FR 0655144 FR 0662275 FR 1447702 GB 2043769B GB 2055842B GB 2283808B GB 2290134B GB 2291814B GB 2292530B GB 2292896B GB 2294909B GB 2295058B GB 2303203B GB 2306887B GB 2307036B GB 2316477B IE 0621495 IT 034244BE 2005 IT 0621495 IT 0655144 JP 3495373 JP 3793577 NL 0621495 NL 0797503 NL 0969247 UK 0621495 UK 0655144 UK 0662275 UK 0797503 UK 0969247 UK 1447702 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN45104 Manufacturer s name High End Systems Inc Distributor s name High End Systems Inc Distributor s address 2105 Gracy Farms Lane Austin Texas 78758 USA Declares that the product Product Name DL 2 Product Number All Product Options All conforms to the following EEC directives 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC 89 336 EEC as amended by 92 31 EEC an
94. 5g Drop Shadow creates a scalable drop shadow Horizontal Vertical Shadow behind the graphic object shadow size shadow size opacity 59 Zoom Blur Zooms into a position on the Horizontal Vertical Zoom image with a mult image blurring effect position center position center in and out Chroma Shift Shifts the red blue and green Horizontal Vertical i Not Used component colors shift shift 61 ShakeNBake Introduces a random vibration Horizontal Vertical Scale effect Shake Shake Slats Vertical renders the image in offset vertical l Fade from Number Vertical slats l Normal to of Slats Displacement Slats Vertical distance Fuzz Decay Slats Horizontal renders the image in offset Fade from Number Horizontal horizontal slats Normal to of Slats Displacement Slats Downward Vertical Streaks pulls the image down Vertical Start Streak Fade from Position Angle Normal to Strea 110 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Ettect Mode a DMX Gaussian Blur Sample Number of Filter Scales the 81 Distance Passes Effect Sharpen enhances image detail Sample Number of Filter Scales the 82 i Distance Passes Sharpen Effect 128 Mask Color applies color to mask parameter Red Green fo Be selection 129 Edge Fade Color applies color to Edge Fade Green Blue Parameter selection Mask Color and Edge Fade Color applies the same 130 color to both the selected Mask and Image Edge Green Blue Fade parameters Back
95. 768 50 Moves object up from center of display pais Moves object nearer from center of display 0 36767 0 49 Centers object along Z axis in display 32768 50 32768 50 Moves object back along Z axis at center of display DL2 Digital Light User Manual 285 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol 286 DL2 Digital Light User Manual Appendix B MSpeed Conversion Table APPENDIX B MSpeed Conversion Table This table lists the MSpeed motor movement times and their corresponding DMX controller values If you have a numeric type DMX controller use the Value Decimal dec column If you have a fader type DMX controller use the Value Percentage column If your DMX controller allows you to program hex values use the Value hex column 0 17 253 99 FD 019 252 99 FC 021 251 8 FB 025 250 98 FA 029 249 8 F9 0 47 246 9 F6 055 245 9 FS 063 244 9 F4 2 66 230 90 E6 286 229 90 E5 3 07 228 89 E4 3 29 227 89 ES 3 52 226 89 E2 5 06 220 86 DD 5 34 219 86 DB 594 217 85 D9 6 25 216 8 D8 6 89 214 84 D6 D1 208 82 DO 10 17 205 80 10 58 204 80 CC 10 99 203 80 CB_ CF CE CD BC BB BA B8 2151 182 71 B6 2454 177 69 Bt 25 17 176 69 BO 25 80 175 69 AF 26 45 174 68 AE 27 10 27 76 AC 28 43 AB 29 11 AA 29 80 169 66 A9 30 49 168 66 AB
96. A PrOtOcCO Leve Eia a a E A A a 39 AXON Protocol Levels Saone ar A A A E tatcucd acerca Mees 40 Lighting Console TIPS sssicsccceii tic cevsdesiineieeeieedesseedenedadecedaseasssereensscteeetesnieadds 41 FISPORE IDa ES araa A a EAA EREIN 41 Patching DL 2 Fixtures and Axon Media Servers ssssssssrsrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrerrrene 41 DMX QUEDUE IOUS DIGV Ss paiar pnn cad ad iene ara EREE AEAEE 41 Wholehog II Programming Notes ccsssceesesecsseeeeessneseeesesaeeeeeeeeeaunaeeeneaaes 42 Play S peeun uel oo dage icine d ied eee ees Lareara as E ce tela eametaty eas 42 MaSK SODS cays sth i wick tdianmnattiiuleraanuieudy ey sh cua Ghd Riparian E d ea aisle A A 42 Play Modes ODaCILY seraa a N O AA AAE 42 CNT n E EE elec ata hana E A T ainda 42 C MtrolGhrannel FUNCT OMS eisena re e a a e E cea awn 42 Quick Start Axon and DL 2 Control with a Wholehog Console ccccsssssssees 43 Chapter 5 Tutorials Five simple lessons get you started programming DL 2 and Axon media servers with a Wholehog 3 or other DMX console Fixture Set up DL 2 Media ServerS sssssssnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnunnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 45 Lesson 1 Cross Fading Between Graphic ObjectS sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 46 Detine Grapnic ODjece de aaea EN a a O NAA 46 Add the DL 2 logo as Graphic Object 2 ssssssssrrrsrresrrrsrrrerrresrresrresrrrsrrene 46 Define Grap Mic ODECE aroniecaniss i OnE AAE EEA EENE ENARA 46 Create Crossfade CUCS iis cri
97. APTER 5 Tutorials Lesson 2 Working with Multiple Graphic Objects In this lesson you will combine 2 Graphic Objects and use Chromakey Effect options to create transparencies You will be building off of cue 3 that was created in Lesson 1 1 Be sure that the MOTION Dimmer parameter for DL 2 fixtures the GLOBAL Intensity parameter and GRAPHIC OBJECT 1 and 2 Opacity parameters are all set to 100 DMX 255 Apply Transparency ffects 2 With the GRAPHIC OBJECT 2 selected open the Effect Mode 1 parameter 3 Select the Chromakey Medium option DMX 27 The DL 2 logo floats on a water background IN Select Invert Chroma Fine option DMX value 29 Now the Graphic Object 1 content shows through the logo U1 Record this look to your console HIGH ENBISKSTEN f ai LE F p aA E l _ _ lt lt _ DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 47 CHAPTER 5 Tutorials Lesson 3 Girt the Fire Breathing Lizard In this lesson you will use Rotation X Y and Z positioning and scaling parameters to control the interaction of multiple Graphic Objects Before you begin clear any information out of your programmer Also release playback of cues used in Lessons 1 and 2 You may want to start a new cuelist for this exercise If you are using a DL 2 be sure that you have set the fixture s motion parameters up as described in the beginning of this tutorial 1 Be sure that the
98. B 43 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue DL2 Digital Light User Manual 263 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Modi Color Scheme selection Mod2 Zero intensity point in color scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme Mod2 45 44 Intensity bandwidth Mod3 Transparency level Raindrop effect Mod1 controls size speed Mod2 seeds the random number generator and Mod3 46 controls raindrop rate Scale RGB Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green Mod3 scale blue Maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and 47 Mod3 sets overall color range Tiling On Scaler of 128 1 to 1 Note Tiling on Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2 48 Mod1 x axis tiling scaler Mod2 y axis tiling scaler Mod3 not used Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 49 green to alpha Mod3 blue to alpha 50 Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2 inverted green to alpha Mod3 inverted blue to alpha Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from 51 original to source texture Image Scale and Rotate Mod1 scales image 52 Effect Mod2 rotation angle Mod3 rotation speed m Mode 1 Film Roll Mod1 horizontal roll speed 53 ne i Mod2 vertical roll speed Mod3 Image scale 4 Pixelate Mod1 Amount of pixelation 5 Mod2 horizontal scaler Mod3 vertical scaler
99. Brn me Bera is Er E a bnan 5 5 H Heas 3 F H one p 3 By le fa B a l Configuration You can also view the installed software versions by navigating to the I nfo gt Version screen of a DL 2 fixture s menu system The Software Version field displays software versions as Major Minor Build For downloading and upgrading CMA or fixture software see Upgrading Software on page 202 IP Adchess 3 192168 1 106 192168 1 106 1921681703 1921681704 Briari sic ree Orc 35 KWo jol UoRuaA NOH eH a OE ak am Software Version Firmware Version Pan Encd Version Tilt Encd Version Unique ID Fixture Name IP Address Solhwene Yeron 71 00 2085 100 218 1 00219 1 00 219 1000 1 2048 200 1 0 i0 0011112F4B81 0011112F4B81 192 168 1 100 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 15 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Configuring DL 2 Fixtures Before programming the DL 2 fixtures from a DMX512 console you need to You Identify the DMX Source for the fixture Select the Protocol type to determine the DMX channel range this fixture will utilize Select a Fixture Number to identify this fixture on the DL 2 fixture link required if you will be synchronizing output between fixtures Assign a valid Start Channel the first channel in the unique range of DMX channels designated by the console for this fixture can configure fixtures directly using the DL 2 menu system or re
100. Chroma Shift Mod1 horizontal shift Mod2 vertical shift ShakeNBake Mod1 horizontal shake Mod2 vertical shake Reserved Defaults to 0 19 254 Pan and Scan Mod1 horizontal position Mod2 vertical position Adjusts option selected in Channel 107 for DL 2 108 87 Visual Mode fixtures or Channel 86 for Axon Media Servers 0 255 0 100 N Moalfler 1 The type of adjustment and the default value depends on the particular visual mode option Visual Mode For more about Modifier parameter functionality m2 2 Modifier 2 see Visual Mode on page 80 and Visual Mode 0 255 0 100 Options on page 82 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Off no effects selection BE CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB reduces color values Modi cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow RGB Add All Pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add 2 All Pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add non black pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR 7 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to BGR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 1 if color value lt DMX value invert color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 2 if color value gt DMX invert color Mod1 red Mod2 gree
101. Coarse parameter selects a color range either side of the defined value and then sets every other color as chromakeyed Chromakey Coarse Inverse Effect Mode parameter DMX value 31 The Inverse Chromakey Coarse parameter selects a color range 40 either side of the defined value and then sets every other color as chromakeyed Chromakey Fine Inverse Effect Mode parameter DMX value 29 The Inverse Chromakey Fine parameter selects a color range 15 either side of the defined value and then sets every other color as a chromakey Chromakey Medium Inverse Effect Mode parameter DMX value 30 The Inverse Chromakey Medium parameter selects a color range 25 either side of the defined value and then sets every other color as chromakeyed Modifier Parameters Modifier 1 Defines the red color component from 0 no red to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Defines the green color component from 0 no green to 255 100 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component from 0 no blue to 255 100 maximum blue saturation 142 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions CMY M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 1 This parameter simulates CMY color by inverting RGB color components Use this parameter when you want to color mix with a CMY color model instead of RGB color model Modifier 1 Increases cyan color component from
102. Coefficient Sets Sphere s Adjusts Vertical Vertical View Offset Size Adjusts Vertical p Adjusts ical Mapping Adj 2 i Spherical Mapping Adjustment Geometry E P Horizontal Correction View Size Center Pan an n Zooms in and pans across a Horizontal l 255 a e acA OOMS In ANED n Vertical position Zoom still image position Sets Projector s Spherical Mapping Adjustment 1 Vertical Offset DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 103 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects 104 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter IO Graphic Functions Synchronizing Content After designating a master fixture you can synchronize the content of other Axon or DL 2 fixtures to any Object on the master in terms of playback time rotation or both Synchronization Overview Any Axon or DL 2 media server can synchronize playback between graphic objects projected from different servers on the same Ethernet network Synchronization is not Slaving With Slaving the master s DMX values for the synchronized function s overrides replaces the Slave DMX values When synchronizing content for Axon or DL 2 fixtures the appropriate DMX channels for all the synced fixtures and the master fixture must be set to the same values Fixture Identification A fixture ID default of 1 is assigned to every DL 2 and Axon server on your Ethernet fixture network For synchronization to work you will need to assign each DL 2 and Ax
103. D Objects ENE zr First User 3 D Objects Additional User Additional User Objects sas 255 a ooo selection HES Folder 1 kerer HES Folders 2 40 38 Media Folder FirstUserFolder4t 0 User Folder 41 FirstUserFolder4t NA User Folders 42 239 42 239 Reserved 240 254 254 Ha video camera capture The Media File parameter is ignored No No selection 39 Media File re Media File Additional Media Files 2 255 ms El ee a eta e o o a percentage of the movie length 65535 oe nes A orane perange sits move BoR S forward Play forward looping continuously continuously peyman watacenestne T Pause forward if Play forward if opacity gt 0 hold on last frame gt 0 hold on last frame Pe matey ngs t Pause and rewind to In Frame and rewind to In AE 44 Play Mode Scrub Sc ay ea Fe the selected In Frame NA Seem Scrub a the selected In Frame with statistics Scrub ae the selected Out Frame with ae Normal Normal Speed me Slow a from slowest toward normal 127 1 1 49 Pem Famas S a 246 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Graphic 1 Synchronization No selection selection a a a to Sync to Graphic 1 movie time 1 movie time Se to SynctoGraphic2movietime 2 movie time Se to SynctoGraphic3movietime 3 movie time a to Object rotation 1 ii e to Syne to Objectrotation2 rotation 2 a oe Sync to reverse Sync to reverse Object rotation 1 rotati
104. D wall The color of the center pixel in each cell defines the solid color for that circle You can control LED size background and color peaking Modifier 1 Controls the LED size The default DMX value of 0 displays a 100 x 100 grid of LEDs Increasing the DMX value decreases the grid divisions to a minimum of 10 x 10 ata value of 255 100 NOTE A small number of larger LEDs will also result in reduced color variation This option is also available as a Visual Mode adjusted with 2 Modifier parameters see Faux LED on page 86 Modifier 2 Adjusts the grid spacing and color around each LED A DMX value of 0 the min imum black line between cells The spacing increases to a maximum at a DMX value of 127 49 At a value of 128 50 the space between cells reverts to the minimum spacing and turns white Increasing the value further increases the white spacing to a maximum at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Adjusts the color peaking to simulate lighting at the LED center A DMX value of 0 no adjustment and flat color across the cell As you increase the DMX value the peaking increases to a maximum at 255 100 158 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Faux Tile M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 56 This options creates divides the image into a grid of tiles with simulated lighting at the edges The color of the
105. DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Appendix Safety Information Warning For Continued Protection Against Fire this equipment is designed for connection to branch circuit with a maximum overload protection of 20 A Warning For Continued Protection Against Electric Shock 1 If this equipment was received without a line cord plug attach the appropriate line cord plug according to the following code e brown live e blue neutral e green yellow earth 2 Asthe colours of the cores in the mains lead of this equipment may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows e the core which is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol D or coloured green or green and yellow the core which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured black the core which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured red Class equipment This equipment must be earthed 4 Equipment suitable for dry locations only Do not expose this equipment to rain or moisture Refer servicing to qualified personnel no user serviceable parts inside Axon Media Server User Manual 295 APPENDIX E Safety Information Appendice Importantes Informations Sur La S curit Mise En Garde Pour Une Protection Perma
106. DLe Digital Light with Collage Software User Manual High End Systems Inc 2006 All Rights Reserved Information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice High End Systems Inc assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual Trademarks used in this text High End Systems WholeHog III Catalyst the Catalyst Logo and LithoPatterns are registered trademarks and Collage Collage Generator Hog iPC the High End Systems globe logo and the Hog logo are trademarks of High End Systems Inc or High End Systems Europe Ltd Belden is a registered trademark of Belden Inc Microsoft DirectX and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Super HAD and Sony are registered trademarks or trademarks of Sony Corporation in the United States and or other countries Art Net is a registered trademark of Artistic License Corporation Lightwave 3 D is a registered trademark of Newtek Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc registered in the U S and in other countries Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products High End Systems disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names owned by others HIGH END SYSTEMS 2 DL 2 User Manual P N 60600245 Software Release Versi
107. Downloading Content from a Media Server to Your Local Drive The CMA supports downloading User content files or folders from a media server to your local drive To download a file or folder of User Content 1 Display the Folder or File that you wish to move in the right pane of the CMA window 2 If the destination for the file on your local drive is visible you can simply drag and drop the folder or file to that location or an external drive connected to your computer OR 3 Select Copy from the Media Files or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list 4 Browse to the destination on your hard drive then select Paste from the Media Files or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list Mac OS X Downloading files You can drag single or multiple files and folders from a fixture to the Finder You can use the copy paste Apple C Apple V to move multiple files from a fixture to the Finder Mac OS X File transfer SMB limitation is 4GB file size per transfer What this means is more than 4GB of data may be transferred but no file can be greater than 4GB in size Uploading Content from Your Local Drive to a Media Server You can upload User Content Media files Media folders and 3D object files from your hard drive to an Axon or DL 2 media server provided they are e A valid file format jpg gif png omp avi mpg m2v for Media Files x for 3D Object files e You are uploading them t
108. E cetera ML nan a haaanretpien penned 96 PUSE TOREO Semen te eee Een ree em meee yeni Ce See a meee ne eee eee ae neg eee 97 PUSPTO SEDIE trnou sie DEERE EOE EE ENNIST NEESI age dee ETEEN 98 Sak SIN BK E a ena E A N aa ET 99 Texture MIXING sirra aan a E EAE E 99 ZOOM BIUT mrsa a a E a A A o ARO 99 Effect 1 Mode and Effect 2 Mode sssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 100 Chapter 10 Graphic Functions Synchronizing Content After designating a master fixture you can synchronize the content of other Axon or DL 2 fixtures to any Object on the master in terms of playback time rotation or both Synchronization OvervieW sssssssusssuunnnnunnununnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n 105 FIXCURG GeNtMCALION nieur a a a T eteniaae 105 Playback TIIN setkat e eea EAA N EE a A E T 105 Synchronization Parameters sssssssssnnsuunnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n 106 SYAC TO amet tus anaE REE TAE A E a T A a aE 106 SS VIS MOGE 6 asc cercegs 6c occ cama E E E E A AEA 106 Chapter 11 Global Functions Global Graphic controls affect the composite image created by defining two or three separate object graphics You can adjust intensity define masks select a point in space to view the composite image and control keystone correction Global Intensity ssisiisceceweieceveessescedse versie canesenssesetnssnisesssessenseneesnaewseseaeaeels 107 Global Effect Mode 1 and Effect Mode 2 ssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
109. ER 11 Global Functions Image Edge Fade Four Image Edge Fade parameters let you control the Edge Fade for individual sides of your object top bottom left and right When projecting abutting images adjusting the Edge Fade parameter lets you smooth the line between two images and also allows you to change an object s boundary Default DMX Value 0 all edges are sharp and hard Adjust each side separately for edge fade from 0 no fade to 255 100 opaque Original Conten 100 Left Edge Fade 100 Top Bottom Left Right Edge Fade DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 117 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Keystone Correction Parameters When you output an image from a Top Left X Top Right X projector at an angle the image may appear skewed Eight Keystone parameters adjust the Top To Left Y image shape and compensate for Right Y this effect You can control each of the four corners of the graphics output to reshape your image toa Bottom Bottom form that projects correctly Left Y Right Y Default DMX Value 0 no keystone correction has been lt 1 gt Bottom Left X Bottom Right X applied i Original Content Each corner has an xanda y value that adjust and correct scale of the projection from any corner toward the image center on that axis Setting all Keystone X and Y parameters DMX values to zero will place the four corners of the image at the four corners of the projector output Adjus
110. Ensure that the fixture is on a solid surface Select Calibrate Motors through the Test_ Home menu screen and leave the fixture undisturbed for 10 minutes while calibration Occurs 218 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This section discusses troubleshooting LED states and general troubleshooting suggestions Button Shortcut Commands DL 2 fixtures have button commands available for controlling and overriding functionality when you are troubleshooting your fixture e Holding the Menu amp Enter buttons for more than two seconds disables motion system Motors are still energized so unit can be pointed for trouble shooting To Exit this mode press the Menu amp Enter buttons again for two seconds or send a Global Reset command e Holding down the middle two menu Tab Select buttons for more than two seconds initiates a Global Reset of the motion hardware and homes the unit e Holding down the second from the top and second from the bottom Tab Select buttons for more than two seconds opens the iris when the fixture software is not running to allow navigation for content upgrades and motion uploads To Exit this mode press the same button combination again for more than two seconds Z Press at the same ii time to open Iri Press at the same time to Home yj os 9 Jmod J3AJ S aaua sn e 5 Jop fod ord FILTER
111. G All PIXGIS wssecertstesannsclrceceveteus o E EEEE R AAA R EE E ENNEN 143 EMY Add NON DIACK PIXEIS errr NE E AT EET 143 EC OIG CYCO anea a a a A a A E 144 Color DECONVErOS yirino E i EEE aa a E a 144 Colorize Gray SCEE a O E AEA 144 C OOF TOAD E EE E A E AOE E REENE 145 Color tovAl pha TAVerted eina A a A a 145 DOUP ane ReSaMDIE Aiara a A E a a a ganas 145 EdJE FdE COON erennere TEE E a A A E A 145 GOW rrna a r a a a a 146 Gow COF CYCO Triru a a A A AE eam saaaumes 146 LAECHSIEY KEY riina Aaa E A E A a A a 146 MaSK COIF versioi aT a a a a eammunnd 147 Mask Color and Edge Fade Color ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeee tees eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessgannneeneey 147 RGB AGO APIK Si a a A A T 147 RGB Add2 Al PIXEIS eela a A a E A E 148 RGB Add to NOn bIack PIXE Siana a E A E E E ADi 148 RG Dalen ace ti a EE E A E EEE O EEA 148 RGE InVert and Swap TO BRG ereenn aon a EO E E A e A ERSE NE ay 149 RGE TVer ond SWap PO GBR arrere eNi eE T a a A rA N 149 RGB SCale arcana aea EE A E S 149 ROBSWapP tO BOR sacisen daar aya a O E E R A TAERA 150 RGB SWap tO BRG ieri ois tre r a a a a a e as 150 RGB SWAP tO GBR rreri Reki aae E E E E TG 150 RGB SWa p to GRB ouairi sini iena earan aE NAANA RAE E AAAA 151 RGB S Wap lo RBG eke o E E TR E O 151 SaN EINE eae cats tee cree E E E A ESO AN 151 SZE rar S E a a T a OS 152 Solari ze Ay oa A A a a Whine e E A 152 SAE E E A a a eee err ye 152 SOI ZES o EE E E ESEA 152 El o rA E cla TAA eri eae eh A A A E E E TEE O A
112. Global control level for the composite image The following pages describe all the Effect Mode options available along with a description of how each Modifier parameter functions with that mode selected Check boxes in the upper right hand corner indicate M Object Effect MGlobal Effect whether this mode is available as a Graphic Object Effect a Global Effect or both Because the options for Effect 1 Mode and Effect 2 Mode are identical you can apply up to two options at the graphic level and another two options at the global level This lets you choose for example whether to apply a color effect option to an individual object or to the composite image at the global level After you select a mode using either a Graphic Object Effect Mode or a Global Effect Mode parameter you can use the three associated Modifier parameters to adjust the effect The behavior of the Modifier parameters depends upon the selected effect e For a general information on Graphics Control features see Graphics Engine Overview on page 55 e For a table of graphic level Effects parameter options see Effect 1 and Effect 2 on page 76 e For a table of global level Effects parameter options see Global Effect Mode 1 and Effect Mode 2 on page 108 NOTE Both Object and Global Effect parameters include options for swapping colors to provide quick color conversions Use the following DMX Values in any of the Effect parameters to make these color conversions DMX Value C
113. L 2 products on http www highend igital lightin Default DMX Value 1 full screen flat surface TIP You can select the same object file for images that will be interacting with each other If both objects occupy exactly the same area in 3 D space Z fighting a shimmering effect on some portions of the composite image can occur as the graphics engine tries to determine which object should be in the foreground You can avoid this effect by making a slight adjustment to one of the object s scale or moving it forward or back using the Z Position parameter in respect to the other 60 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Defining Content Media Folder This parameter defines a folder directory containing a collection of media files The media files within the assigned folder can then be selected using the Media File parameter Media Folder DMX values are assigned as follows e DMX values from 1 38 select from the stock Media collections that shipped with your media server e A DMX value of 39 is reserved for a Setup and Test folder e DMX Values 40 239 are reserved for assignment to Custom folders containing user Media collections e A DMX value of 255 selects the live video feed from a DL 2 integrated video camera capture or S Video input Default DMX Value 1 HES Core Media files Media Folder Descriptions 6 Sean Bridwe Digtal vdeo loops promotor Feedback Video Digtal vdeo lo
114. MOTION Dimmer parameter for DL 2 fixtures the GLOBAL I ntensity parameter and GRAPHIC OBJECT 1 Opacity parameter are all set to 100 DMX 255 Define Graphic Object I 2 Set the Media Folder parameter for GRAPHIC OBJ ECT 1 to DMX 14 HES Theme Stills 3 Set the Media File parameter to a DMX value 10 10 Tropical_ 10 jpg Define Graphic Object 2 The following steps select and position a flame graphic object 4 Select the GRAPHIC OBJECT 2 and set the Opacity parameter to DMX 255 100 5 Set the Media Folder parameter to DMX 4 HES Atmospheric 6 Set the Media file parameter to DMX 16 16 Fire_Triple_ Burst 7 Set Effect Mode 1 parameter for GRAPHIC OBJ ECT 2 to DMX 28 to select the Chromakey Coarse effect This will make the black background transparent Reduce the Y Scale parameter to 5 7x DMX 55 9 Reduce the X Scale parameter to 2x DMX 102 O0 10 Set the X Position parameter to a real world value of 37 pixels DMX 33530 11 Set the Y Position parameter to a real world value of 13 pixels DMX 33042 12 Set the Z Rotation parameter to a real world value of 25 DMX 33042 48 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Define Graphic Object 3 The following steps create and position a puff of smoke 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2L CHAPTER 5 Tutorials Select the GRAPHIC OBJECT 3 and set the Opacity parameter to DMX 255 100 Set the Media Fold
115. MY controls functionality for each effect option in Chapter 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions on page 139 Control Channel Functions Many of the control channel functions in the motion fixture only operate if the dimmer changes from gt 0 to 0 at the same time or just after a change is made to the control channel See the DL2 protocol for specific information 42 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 4 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start Quick Start Axon and DL e2 Control with a Wholehog Console After Setting up and Configuring your media server see Setup and Configuration on page 5 use the following steps to get to the point of displaying output Step 1 In the Fixture Schedule or Add Fixtures window of Wholehog software Add 1 motion 1 global and 3 graphic fixtures for each complete DL 2 unit or 1 global and 3 graphic fixtures for each complete Axon unit Step 2 Assign user numbers for these items Set up user numbers 1 5 that correspond to DL 2 fixture number 1 where user number 1 is the motion 2 is the global and 3 5 the graphic fixture types Axon media servers will have user number 1 4 where user number one is global and 2 4 the graphic fixture types Patch the motion first the global second and the graphic fixture types last DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 43 CHAPTER 4 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start 44 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter 5 Tutorials Five s
116. Management Application CMA A Content Management Application CMA running on an Axon media server or a computer connected through an Ethernet network gives you remote control of content software and configuration management functions Launching the CMA cevsssiciscsseaiedsdededsdedsdvdessantndetededncaeddessanaeadestenseseeeeceonee Aaa 188 Installing the CMA on Your Computer s sssssssrsssrrnsrrnsrrrsrrrsrrrorrrerrrerrresrresrre 188 Launching the CMA ONAXON irn a a r a a a teiadaweneds 189 AUTO DISCOVERY hraoa a EA a a E E 189 Fixture tdentincatl oN yenna a e a a a 190 The Management Client WinNndOW ssssnssnsnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 190 Viewing Server Identification Information s sesssssrsesrsresrrrsrrrsrrrerrrerrresrrrerne 190 Client Window Content Organization s sssrsssrrssrrrsrererrrerrrerrrerrrrrrrrerererere 191 Preloaded Stock Content seorererureii niina E E E A E matawn de 192 Custom User Content sirnani a a a a a A E AA 192 Media FUSS siereiereir anaE a E E E ae E A EN 192 SD OD ETFS iae e E E A A E ATE E E T AAEE 192 Viewing Server Configuration Data sssssssssrrrsrresrrrsrrrerrrerrrerrrrrrrrrrerrrere 192 VIEWING C ONEEN E simarin nae ean E a aa E AR 193 VIEWING FOldorS irrar REE EAE E E T AET 193 VIEWING FIGS ostat a a S a ATE N 193 Managing User Content s ssiru AANE E 194 Naming and Deleting User Content Files and Folders ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 194 Assign
117. Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Circular with Z axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation Ed Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with X axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Glow Mod red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Modi red Mod2 Glow Mod red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Mod3 blue Glow Color Cycle Mod1 red cycle speed we 8 152 131 Effect Mode 2 green cycle speed Mod3 blue cycle speed 0 Reserved defaults to EffectO defaults to Effect 0 75 79 79 oc Vertical Streaks Mod1 start position Mod2 streak angle Mod3 fade Gaussian Blur Mod1 sample distance Mod2 81 filter pass number Mod3 curve shape Sharpen Mod1 sample distance Mod2 filter 82 pass number Mod3 sharpen scale Reserved Defaults to effect mode 0 83 252 Spherical mapping control 1 Mod 1 projector y offset Mod2 sphere y offset Mod3 vertical size Defaults to 0 and is ignored unless Spherical Mapping is selected as a Global Effect option Spherical mapping control 2 Mod 1 vertical bend correction Mod2
118. Modifier 1 Selects from color schemes along a range of values from 0 255 Modifier 2 Sets the zero point of the color intensity level from 0 no intensity to 255 100 maximum intensity Modifier 3 Fades from original color scheme to new color scheme using selected intensity 144 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Color to Alpha M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 49 This parameter varies the transparency level of an image s component color values Modifier 1 ncreases the red component opacity or intensity from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 full red opacity intensity Modifier 2 Increases the green component opacity or intensity from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 full green opacity intensity Modifier 3 ncreases the blue component opacity or intensity from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 full blue opacity intensity Color to Alpha Inverted M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 50 This parameter varies the transparency level of the inverse of an image s component color values Modifier 1 Increases the inverse red component opacity or intensity from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 full green and blue opacity intensity Modifier 2 Increases the green component opacity or intensity from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 full red and blue opacity intensity Modifier 3 Increases the blue com
119. Motion Functions This chapter describes mechanical control for the DL 2 fixture with it s internal projector Pan and Tilt The DL 2 fixture has a 400 pan range and a 240 tilt range Two DMX channels for Pan and two for Tilt provide 16 bit position adjustment to a fraction of a degree MSpeed values can control the timing of pan and tilt motion for DL 2 fixtures see MSpeed Motor Speed on page 180 To control Pan and Tilt movement timing via a DMX controller crossfading leave the Pan Tilt MSpeed in it s default Off setting Note The DL 2 fixture uses optical encoders for pan and tilt to instantly correct the fixture s position if the fixture is jarred from its programmed position If a physical obstruction prevents the fixture from correcting its position this correction feature times out to prevent wear on the motors If the fixture s position correction has timed out remove the obstruction and home the fixture to return it to normal operation Dimmer The DL 2 fixture has a mechanical iris located in front of the projector output lens that functions as a dimmer for the fixture s output This feature gives the operator the ability to fully shutter the output and eliminate the residual luminance from video black The Dimmer parameter controls the dimming iris adjustment from closed DMX value 0 to fully open DMX value 255 Focus The Focus parameter controls the fixture s mechanical focus from near
120. OTAL FAILURE OF ANY PRODUCT REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE WAS FORESEEN OR UNFORESEEN Warranty is void if the product is misused damaged modified in any way or for unauthorized repairs or parts This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights specific to your locality What You Should Know About Copyright The following FAQ can help you understand copyright laws and how they apply to content used with the DL 2 fixture By Suzy Vaughan Associates for High End Systems I want to use a film clip from When Harry Met Sally in a promotional piece advertising my services What do I have to do to be able to do that First of all you need to obtain permission to use the clip from its owners The clip is considered intellectual property just as though it were your car or some software code developed by and belonging to Microsoft This is because the U S Copyright Act gave creators of literary works which include books films television programs art works still photos and musical compositions and recordings the right to sell or license these works and to make money from them for the period of the copyright But what about public domain material heard that lots of material is in the public domain and can be used for free Once the copyright runs out the creative work falls into the public
121. R Modi red to inverted green Mod2 green to 18 inverted blue Mods blue to inverted red RGB Invert amp Swap to BRG Mod1 red to inverted blue Mod2 green to 19 inverted red Mod3 blue to inverted green Edge Detect Color Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 20 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold 275 Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 D4 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Texture Ripple Horizontal 99 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Vertical 23 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Chromakey Fine Select key color using 26 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Medium Select key color using 97 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Coarse Select key color using 28 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using 29 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color 30 using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color 34 using Modi red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Scan Line Mod1 selects scan line as texture Mod2 fades from original image to converted image Mod3 not used reserved Transparent Wipes Mod1 width of transparent area Mod2 center of t
122. S Core folder Media Folder 1 wrapped on a Flat Plane Object 1 Remember The Dimmer Opacity and Global Intensity Parameters all have to be greater than zero before the image you create becomes visible DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 59 CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Defining Content Content Selection Parameters The following sections outline parameters you will use to create an image from content and define it s playback You will set the parameters described in this chapter for each individual Graphic Object you define Note The suggested default DMX values given for each parameter are recommended to build libraries that provide the easiest and most reliable content selection rendering and output They are the default values built into the Wholehog libraries for High End Systems consoles Object The Object parameter selects the 3 dimensional object component of an image Object files are the 3 D object shapes used to build a total image The graphics engine supports a combined total of 255 stock and user created object files Stock Objects have a fixed DMX value and cannot be edited DMX values 1 149 are reserved for identifying stock object files User created object files must be assigned a unique DMX value from 150 255 For a reference of 3 D object files available as stock content with your media server and information on how to create your own object files go to the link for the Stock Object Guide for the Axon or D
123. SYSTEMS BR All Servers 4 servers SewerID ServerName IF Address Software Version brian 5 Bs brian 192 168 1 106 1 0 0 206 DL2 B three 3 B two 192 168 1 108 1 0 0 218 DL2 H one 1 B three 192 168 1 103 1 0 0 218 DL2 B two 2 Bi one 192 168 1 104 1 0 0 218 Axon All Configuration Upgrading the CMA Software Close the CMA before upgrading the CMA software To Upgrade software 1 Download the latest version of the application from the Support section of the High End Systems website www highend com A download wizard simplifies installation on your personal computer 2 A dialog box will give you the option to Run or Save the application Pressing Run automatically un installs any existing CMA version on your hard drive and installs the new version Upgrading Server Software The server software for DL 2 and Axon media servers can only be uploaded to fixtures from the CMA You must first save the latest version of the software from the High End Systems website www highend com to your hard drive and then use the CMA to upload it to any media server on your link To Upgrade Server Software 1 Using your internet browser select the latest version from the support section of the High End Systems website A dialog box will give you the option to Save 2 Select the location and press Save again to put a copy of the Fixture software on your local drive 3 Click on All Servers in the left pane of CMA Management windo
124. SYSTEMS double click on the line with DMX Source in the Name column to bring up the edit dialog box Choose a new configuration value 2 Choose between DMX512 and ArtNet as the source HSE from the drop down list in the option field cancel R To Select a DMX Protocol type T Edil Configuration 1 Scroll down the Configuration list in the right pane and double click on the line with DMX Protocol in the Name HIGH END SYSTEMS column to bring up the edit dialog box 2 Choose Standard Dual or Single from the drop Choe a new configuration value down list in the option field Slander DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 17 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration To edit the DMX Start Channel 1 Scroll down the Configuration list in the right pane and double click on the line with Start Channel in the Name column to bring up the edit dialog box Enter a new configuration value 2 Enter a valid Start Channel for the protocol type you 1g have chosen Standard protocol 1 343 Dual Protocol 1 381 Cancel Single Protocol 1 419 DMX Control Setup Patching the DL 2 Fixture to a Wholehog Console Wholehog console library systems patch the DL 2 fixture as three to five fixture types When using Wholehog software add one motion one global and three graphic fixtures for each complete DL 2 unit in the Fixture Schedule or Add Fixtures window An easy way to organize these items is to assign
125. Should Know About Copyright essseseserersrrrsrrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrerrrene vii Chapter 1 Product Overview This chapter describes the features and specifications of the DL 2 fixture and the Content Management Application software FPOGUUPCS siisciccscasarssnansnanssanssanancsnsenssnatsvarstatstetetetiendatedatadadndatedadaamdenetesedesndesesess 1 Sy CE merrnin te teaidcad sheen seet tone a E EA eo opeeesiest E E O 1 Graphics ENGINE n lt iocauiiacrnsccearacanuie seaunarte E TEE AA E 2 Content Management Application sssssessserrserrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrent 2 POW E ee E A E E E EEE sesecueea eens 3 Related Products and Optional Accessories ssssssssnssunn0nus01unn0uunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 4 Chapter 2 Setup and Configuration Hardware setup includes mounting connecting to power and Ethernet and DMX linking Software setup includes launching the Content Management Application CMA and configuring the fixture for DMX control Hardware Stup ssiistscnsnnaneremeriwenewexsvessees coaseennanecsmnsamasadsunmesennsismensaaenaenaneneasanans 5 Unpacking the Fixture sssssssrsssrrssrrrsrrrerrrerrrerrrsrrrsrrrerrrerrrnrrrerrrerrrerrresrrrern 5 Hardware Components ssssssssssrsssrresrrrrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrrnrrenrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrernrerrrern 6 COnNectHon FOULS sururini nei EE a a iana 6 Palas EEO O arenden E E E a E EN 7 Attaching a Power Cord Gap ssedistccrech ci ates bextanardansceredcssaendyievetees EAEN 7
126. Source for the fixture e Select the Protocol type to determine the DMX channel range this fixture will utilize e Select a Fixture Number to identify this Axon on the Ethernet link required if you will be synchronizing output between fixtures e Assign a valid Start Channel the first channel in the unique range of DMX channels designated by the console for this Axon To view configuration information for a individual server click on All Servers in the left pane of the CMA window and select the to view all the servers on the fixture network Select a server in the left pane to view its configuration information in the right pane HighEnd DL2 Management Client File Configuration Help HIGH END SYSTEMS B Al Servers 4 servers IP Address B Mr T 1 1 10 0 1 220 Art Met Subnet o ci J User Media 1 10 0 1 220 Art Het Universe l O io bO User Objects 10 0 1 220 Disk Free Space B2227 H Stock Media 1 10 0 1 220 Dk Protocal 5 ts 1 10 0 1 220 Fixture ID Refresh Eo Ma Sloot Ohieets 1 10 0 1 220 DMX Source ee DMS 2 Axon I 1 10 0 1 220 Start Channel 001 OOUCFIAECDBA 1 1 10 0 1 220 Data Loss Timeout Ir Reset Long Matt s DL 2 1 1 10 0 1 220 Display Invert On B All Configuration 1 10 0 1 220 Display Level On 1 10 0 1 220 Fixture Defaults Off anna 407 Toe We ENR EST 1ra To select a DMX Source type 1 Scroll down the Configuration list in the right pane and m TEE double click on the line with DMX Sourc
127. User Manual Appendix C Custom User Content There are several considerations to keep in mind when creating custom content to control with the DL 2 graphics engine software Preparing Custom Content For the highest quality rendering and playback on a DL 2 fixture or Axon media server use the following steps 1 Commission or Design High Quality Visually Clean or Never Compressed Video at least 640 x 480 in Photo J peg 98 100 or Animation Non Compressed best format Note Extracting footage from a playable DVD will not give a high quality result since it has been highly compressed 2 Light Optimize the content in a video editing program by boosting Brightness and Color Saturation and save the a master file in Photo J peg 98 100 or Animation Non Compressed best format Note The DL 2 and Axon media servers can also provide light optimizing as a visual effect see Content Optimization on page 82 3 Import Video master into Encoder Compressor 4 Output encoded files to your hard drive 5 Upload your Custom Content to the DL 2 fixture or Axon media server See Uploading Content from Your Local Drive to a Media Server on page 197 Note Ifa file is not DL2 compatible it may load but not appear as output The CMA thumbnail view of content will note incompatible files with an X Encoder Selection Cleaner on Mac and Expert HD or TMPGEncoder on PC for encoding solutions offer good quality and the most reliable DL 2 pla
128. When a DL 2 fixture or Axon media server is connected to a network it sends out Discovery messages These messages are received by other servers on the link as well as the CMA DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 189 CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA software The messages contain information that allows the media servers to communicate with each other and the CMA to communicate with all the units on the network This information includes the IP Address Fixture ID and the media server software version Fixtures derive their IP addresses through a router or automatic IP assignment Fixture Identification The Fixture ID is used in the control protocol to identify specific fixtures for sychronization functions For more information on Sychronization content playback see Chapter 10 Graphic Functions Synchronizing Content on page 105 NOTE To ensure that sychronization works properly each DL 2 fixture or Axon media server should be assigned a unique fixture ID The Management Client Window The CMA application s Management Client Window uses a simplified Windows Explorer style user interface with views of the content and configuration of all DL 2 and Axon servers connected to the Ethernet network You can access options for each view from the drop down menu at the top of the Management Client Window or with a right click in the right pane NOTE You cannot drag folders or files between the left and right panes of
129. X 255 100 Graphic Object 1 Intensity DMX 255 100 Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX 255 100 Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX 179 70 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 79 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Visual Mode Visual Mode options are defined using three parameters The Visual Mode parameter has options for enhancing and adjusting the black level and contrast of a 3 D object Once you choose a visual mode two Modifier parameters adjust the selected mode Note In most cases you won t see a change in the content until you adjust the Modifier parameters for that mode Default DMX Value 0 Safe no processing applied Default DMX values for Modifier 1 and Modifier 2 channels depend on the selected option The following table illustrates the interaction between the Visual Mode Parameter and the two associated Modifier parameters for each option Visual Mode Option No visual mode processing applied to Not Used Not Used rendered output Content Enhances image black level and Adjusts Adjusts Optimization contrast Back Level Contrast Push Fades from original image color to Adjusts Value a e i eee ma e Fades color Color to Fades colors to black white with no through B W to Not Used B W grays White at 100 i Fades image Fire Maps original color intensity levels to a to red yellow Not Used Gradient red to yellow gradient gradient Negative l Subtract red to Exposure I i Expand Contrast Adju
130. X A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Off no effects selection Oo o CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB reduces color values 1 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values D Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta 3 Mod3 yellow RGB Add All Pixels 4 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add 2 All Pixels 5 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add non black pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR 7 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to BGR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 1 if color value lt DMX value invert color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 2 if color value gt DMX invert color 10 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize if color value lt DMX set color to 0 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue NA Solarize 4 if color value gt DMX set color to 0 42 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue DotP and Resample 13 Mod1 Mod2 and Mod3 control resampling Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue All or Nothing Color value greater than Mod value color 255 else color 0 15 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solid Color RGB 16 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Invert Mod1 red to inverted red Mod2 green to 17 inverted green Mod3 blue to inverted blue RGB Invert amp Swap to GB
131. aAa EA AERA aa E 202 DMX SUMMALY srisiasninrnsnisninnnnan nunnai iia N a A i A M a A 202 Upgrading SOFEWARC soera eae a aaa aao aaa ahaa airaa isa kesar Ea EaR 202 Verifying Software VersionS sssssssrsssrresrresrrrsrererrrerrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrerrrene 202 Upgrading the CMA SOW ale anrai iaaa a a o aE 203 Upgrading Server SoftWare henii a nA E E T E OOE A 203 Viewing and Editing Server Configuration s sssssss2ss22u2222222202uuuuuununnnnnnnn 204 Viewing Fixture Configuration Values sssssssrssrrrsrrrsrrresrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrerrrene 205 Editing Configuration Va lUES ssrsseien ecri a a a A 205 ConniguratiomMmEXaMpIe eri adores r E E T E O 206 COnMGULATION O DUOMS arrasin an E E E E EE 207 DL 2 CONNOUratOn OPON S errenta Aaa A nett EEEE OA E E E ETAR 207 AXON ConNguratiom OPTIONS serisinerioiin ia aaar a a a ues 210 Chapter 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting This chapter includes information on replacing parts cleaning the fixture and some basic troubleshooting procedures Pan and Tilt Locking seciiwi eset naaa a aaa Aaaa aa aaa aeeai EARS 211 Maintaining the Filtering System ssssnsssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 212 Filter Warnings rererua Gvecmncrerwatees thie beGunhven natn eaneswedui tet eh cube eh iel Gan sted td 212 Cleaning and Replacing FIters oroesi os connie biatenulas iubor bent TERRE EES 212 Cleaning the Base Housing Filter ccccccce cece eeceeeee sees eeeee
132. activity 5 A _ e __ __ Projector White on Projector lamp is on Off Projector lamp is off Bro Pow lamp is either cooling down or in a indeterminate state Status Green 45 sec On 1 4 sec Off Running normal motion control code a Board communication activity for example during a software upload Sony Power Red Steady Fisture s Motion Control system is receiving power DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 221 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Board LED States LEDs located on DL 2 fixture boards indicate how the unit is functioning The following Table lists LED States and problems they may indicate uot baer Orange ae SS Eo E iris Sensor opan Dt Red Geen OF Eats Slow Flashing Green Running system code normal operation Head i Card Running boot code expecting or updating Red Green or OFF No firmware or power toy Festa eo e es Hovsing LD2 Car Red Maybe Tense WK Te Normal Operation General Troubleshooting Suggestions The following table shows general troubleshooting suggestions Problem Coo y o o Won t power on e Check the fuse page 216 e Verify fixture is plugged in to an appropriately rated power source power ratings are shown on page 292 e Check power cord wiring page page 292 During certain movements If you have loosened or tightened anything in the pan and tilt assemblies the fixture motion slows the stepper motors may be out of alignment Reca
133. age You can adjust the size of the lens and move it over different areas of the image Modifier 1 Controls the horizontal position of the lens centerpoint from O left edge to 255 100 right edge of output Modifier 2 Controls the vertical position of the lens centerpoint from O top edge to 255 100 bottom edge of output Modifier 3 Controls the size of the lens from O0 smallest to 255 100 largest Tip Zooming in with this lens option creates an additional effect 164 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Mattes Cl Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 144 The Global Effect option lets you select from a variety of provided patterns to superimpose over the composite image Modifier parameters select the pattern and effects for a matte The images below show two examples of the Mattes option In the image on the left the Modifier 2 value selected the matte pattern Modifier 1 sets black as transparent The Modifier 3 value corresponds with a lookup to an internal gradient map to determine the matte color In the example on the right the same Matte is selected by Modifier 2 This time the Modifier 1 value selects white as transparent and uses a graphic object as a texture A Modifier 3 DMX value of 0 designates the Matte texture as Graphic Object 1 s media file content minus any applied effects Modifier 1 DMX 11 Modifier 1 DMX 5
134. agenta 3 Mod3 yellow RGB Add All Pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add 2 All Pixels 5 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add non black pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR 7 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to BGR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 1 if color value lt DMX value invert color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 2 if color value gt DMX invert color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 10 Solarize if color value lt DMX set color to 0 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 4 if color value gt DMX set color to 0 12 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue DotP and Resample 13 Mod1 Mod2 and Mod3 control resampling Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue All or Nothing Color value greater than Mod 15 value color 255 else color 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solid Color RGB Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Invert Modi red to inverted red Mod2 green to 17 18 inverted green Mods blue to inverted blue RGB Invert amp Swap to GBR Modi red to inverted green Mod2 green to inverted blue Mod3 blue to inverted red Edge Detect ColorMod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 D4 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold RGB Invert amp Swap
135. al Mode adjusted with 2 Modifier parameters see Pan and Scan on page 94 Picture in Picture M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 35 This options creates a window in the image containing a scaled down version of the same image and then lets you position it anywhere on the output plane Modifier 1 Controls the horizontal position of the subpicture s centerpoint from O left edge to 255 100 right edge of output Modifier 2 Controls the vertical position of the subpicture s centerpoint from O top edge to 255 100 bottom edge of output Modifier 3 Controls the size of the picture from O smallest to 255 100 largest DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 167 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Pixelate M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 54 This options divides the image into rectangles using the center pixel color of each box as it s color You can control the number of boxes and adjust the vertical and horizontal dimensions Modifier 1 Controls the number of divisions Fewer larger boxes will also result in reduced color variations Modifier 2 Reduces the box size horizontally to centerpoint from O no reduction to 255 100 full reduction At that point the image will then be composed of series of horizontal bands Modifier 3 Reduces the box size vertically to centerpoint from O no reduction to 255 100 full reduction At that p
136. al shift Mod2 vertical shift Mod3 Scale ShakeNBake Mod1 horizontal shake Mod2 vertical shake Mod3 Scale Slats Vertical Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade Slats Horizontal Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset DL2 Digital Light User Manual 251 O OD O O O1 O1 O1 QI O1 Ql O1 Ol QI gt gt A A gt oo NO CO N O S gt oo Ne O 00 o1 gt Z gt APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Sinewave Circular with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Circular with Z axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with X axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Horizontal with Z axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with X axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Y axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Glow Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Glow Color Cycle Mod1 red cycle speed Mod2 green cycle speed Mod3 blue cycle speed Reserved defaults to Effect 0 Downward Vertical Streaks Mod1 start position Mod2 streak angle Mod3 fade Gaussian Blur Mod1
137. alue controls cycle speed 4 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue All or nothing Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue If color value gt mod value 15 color 255 else color 0 Solid color RGB Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Invert Mod1 red to inverted red Mod2 green to inverted green Mod3 blue to inverted blue RGB Invert amp Swap to GBR Mod1 red to inverted green Mod2 green to inverted blue Mod blue to inverted red RGB Invert amp Swap to BRG Mod1 red to inverted blue Mod2 green to inverted red Mod3 blue to inverted green Edge Detect Color Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold Z gt N O s s 00 DL2 Digital Light User Manual 237 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold Texture Ripple Horizontal Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Vertical Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Chromakey Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Medium Select key color using 27 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 g
138. and care and thought in how it is used rigged and positioned will maximize the product s life and your investment Failure to follow these guidelines and carry out regular maintenance will void the warranty Packaged Media Notice Any use of this product other than consumer personal use in any manner that complies with the MPEG 2 Standard for encoding video information for packaged media is expressly prohibited without a license under applicable patents in the MPEG 2 patent portfolio which license is available from MPEG LA L L C 250 Steele Street Suite 300 Denver Colorado 80206 Warranty Information Limited Warranty Unless otherwise stated your product excluding the lamp is covered by a one year parts and labor limited warranty The lamp warranty for Christie projectors is 120 days or 500 hours whatever comes first It is the owner s responsibility to furnish receipts or invoices for verification of purchase date and dealer or distributor If purchase date cannot be provided date of manufacture will be used to determine warranty period vi DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Returning an Item Under Warranty for Repair It is necessary to obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA number from your dealer or point of purchase BEFORE any units are returned for repair The manufacturer will make the final determination as to whether or not the unit is covered by warranty Any Product unit or parts returned to High End Systems
139. ange Tiling On Scaler of 128 1 to 1 Note Tiling on Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2 Mod1 x axis tiling scaler Mod2 y axis tiling scaler Mod3 not used Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 green to alpha Mods blue to alpha Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2 inverted green to alpha Mod3 inverted blue to alpha Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from original to source texture Image Scale and Rotate Mod1 scales image Mod2 rotation angle Mod3 rotation speed Film Roll Mod1 horizontal roll speed Mod2 vertical roll soeed Mod3 Image scale Pixelate Mod1 Amount of pixelation Mod2 horizontal scaler Mod3 vertical scaler Faux LED Mod1 LED size Mod2 spacing Mod 3 color peaking Faux Tile Mod1 Tile size Mod2 spacing Mod 3 color peaking Fuzzifier Mod1 Horizontal distance Mod2 vertical distance Mod3 fuzz decay Drop Shadow Mod1 horizontal shadow size Mod2 vertical shadow size Mod3 shadow Opacity Zoom Blur Mod1 horizontal position center Mod2 vertical position center Mod3 zoom Chroma Shift Mod1 horizontal shift Mod2 vertical shift Mod3 Scale ShakeNBake Mod1 horizontal shake Mod2 vertical shake Mod3 Scale Slats Vertical Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade Slats Horizontal Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade Sinewave
140. anual to highlight messages CAUTI ON This symbol appears adjacent to Caution messages Not heeding these messages could result in personal injury and or damage to equipment WARNING This symbol appears adjacent to high AN voltage warning messages Not heeding these messages could result in serious personal injury C4 This symbol indicates the minimum focus distance a from a combustible object 3 This symbol cautions against mounting the fixture on a flammable surface surfaces may reach very high temperatures Allow the 4 This symbol indicates that while operating equipment diiin fixture to cool before handling Fog Machine Warning Like all high quality video projection units the DL 2 fixture must be kept protected from excessive amounts of glycol fog mineral oil and smoke The DL 2 fixture incorporates two stage air filtering to reduce these risks to a minimum however the user must follow these guidelines to ensure continued operation of the fixture e Air filters both fixture and projector should be checked and cleaned on a regular basis When used in a closed or fixed environment where fog or haze is used we recommend at least a weekly check e Do not situate DL 2 fixtures in areas of high fog density such as directly in front of a fog machine or mineral oil hazer e Minimize the exposure of DL 2 fixtures to both glycol fog and mineral oil The DL 2 fixture is a highly complex and sensitive electro optical device
141. apping effects with be the same or nearly the same when the fine tuning is complete You can save time by selecting the Modifier on all the fixtures you are using for the collage and making each adjustment on all the fixtures together e Projector Pan Tilt and Zoom also affect alignment e Don t make small changes until the alignment is roughed in e When alignment doesn t seem to be working record and store you current settings then go back to the default values and begin again e The longitude angle is the angle between fixtures from the vertical axis of the sphere and should be defined in your lighting plot The plot should also give you a good idea of the latitude angle The final values and those theoretical values should be close 136 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect Creating Custom Content for the Collage Generator Effect There are two main steps to process HD footage into Axon and DL2 compliant media for use with the collage generator First acquire or commission High resolution media footage or stills In most cases scaling and cropping of the media is a simple process However certain types of media such as footage of people or round objects like planets may require more sophisticated cropping and scaling to optimize display in certain aspect ratios Then save your media at Photo jpeg 95 or a non compressed format these can be very large files to use as a
142. arameter from the slowest O to the fastest 255 100 The graphics engine currently Note A Global Effect Mode parameter option lets you define a Mask color see Global Effect Mode 1 and Effect Mode 2 on page 108 and Mask Color on page 147 114 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Mask Size The Mask Size parameter defines mask size for all mask shapes Default DMX Value 255 100 no masking effect When this parameter is set at a value of 255 100 the mask is sized to leave the image 100 visible When Mask Size is set at 0 the mask totally covers the composite image Tip Crossfading the Mask Size parameter can create unique fades to and from video black Mask Select DMX value 0 Mask Size DMX value 255 100 Mask Select value of 0 Mask Select DMX value 1 Mask Size DMX value 128 50 Mask Size DMX value 126 50 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 115 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Mask Edge Fade The Mask Edge Fade parameter diffuses the edge of your chosen mask Default DMX Value 0 no edge fade applied to mask Adjust the amount of edge fade from 1 no edge fade to 255 maximum edge fade When a Mask Select parameter value of Note A Global Effect Mode parameter option lets you define a Mask Edge Fade color on page 147 Original Image Mask applied without Edge Fade Mask with Edge Fade applied 116 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPT
143. are grouped into general categories each with a separate tab For more information on individual parameters and their DMX value ranges see Appendix A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol on page 229 DMX_Protocol_Motion Screen E E The Motion tab displays parameters associated P Motion Camera with fixture movement projector control and 5 s Pan 41409 Zoom 32767 integrated camera functionality Us S Tilt 0 Focus 33023 p J z Gate 255 Infrared 0 or more information on specific Motion and BEE Focus 127 Shutter o Camera parameters see z Zoom 127 WhiteBal O e Chapter 14 Fixture Motion Functions a MSpeed a Orient 0 e Chapter 15 Live Video Input and Control x E Macro 0 Effects a Control OF Red Gain 5 BlueGain 0 DMX_Protocol _Global Screen ie ES Intensity 255 _ The Global tab display the current values for 8 2 FxiMode 1 11 0 02 0 3 0 parameters that affect the composite image y E Fx2Mode 01 0 02 0 3 0 For more information on specific Global W 5 Mask Sel 0 Size 255Fade 0 parameters see Chapter 11 Global Functions amp Edge Fade T OR OB OL 0 KeyTopX OY OX OY o0 KeyBttmX OY OX OY O Key RatioX 128 Y 128 S lew Mode 0 View Pos X 32768 Y 32768 Z 30260 Cntri Mode O Cntri Val 0 Ast Test Info DMX_Protocol _Obj Screens pr ees 2 E Opacity 255 Ob 7 Obj 1 Obj 2 and Obj 3 tabs display Be TER Mres parameters values affecting a single object s 3 E F Inframe 0 OutFrame 65535
144. are going to be mapping your collage to a sphere you will need to roughly adjust the output before you set up the collage See Spherical Mapping Setup Guide on page 134 Setup the collage effect 1 Select the same content on four media servers NOTE Any parameter adjustment to a graphic object must be set on ALL graphic objects that are a part of the collage For example if you are configuring Graphic Object 1 on four media servers to project as a collage and want to apply a color effect that effect must be manipulated on Graphic Object 1 of all four media servers 2 On all the media servers you are configuring set a Global Effect Mode channel to a DMX value of 141 to select the Enhanced Collage Generator option TIP For the most reliable performance use the same Global Effect Mode parameter on all the Graphic objects to set up the collage effect This also leaves the other Global Effect Mode parameter available for adding a second effect like spherical mapping to the composite image 3 On all the media servers you are configuring set Modifier 1 DMX value 1 to activate the array options The selection grid will not appear until the first modifier is set above 0 4 On all the media servers you are configuring set Modifier 3 DMX value 255 100 to display the selection grid 5 On all the media servers you are configuring increase Modifier 1 to a value between 1 and 63 to select a collage array configuration 6 On each i
145. around the Y axis with 16 bit precision You can index the rotation or set a continuous rotation creating a horizontal flip at variable speeds This parameter lets you view an object from a different angle by turning the object You can also view an object from a different angle by changing the viewpoint in space for the composite image see Global Viewpoint Mode on page 120 Default DMX Value 32768 50 No Y Rotation of Value Function Range 1 24 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise image rotation around Y axis fast to slow 25 Continuous rotation stop 26 49 Rotates the image counterclockwise around Y axis in steps to 720 degrees 50 0 rotation around Y axis 51 74 Rotates the image clockwise around Y axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 75 Continuous rotation stop 76 100 Continuous variable speed clockwise image rotation around Y axis slow to fast Tip Using this parameter you can turn one object through another Original Object 1 and Object 2 Y axis rotation applied to Object 2 70 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Z Rotation The Z Rotation parameter rotates or indexes the selected Graphic Object around the Z axis with 16 bit precision You can index the rotation or set a continuous rotation creating a circular Spin at variable speeds Default DMX Value 32768 50 No Z Rotation of Value Function Range 1 24 Continuous variable speed c
146. assembly Cleaning the Internal Projector Filter Internal projector air filters prevent dust from accumulating on surface of Projection Lens and Projection Mirror If the projector Air Filter becomes Filter clogged with dust particles it will reduce the cooling Removal fans effectiveness and may result in an internal heat Tool build up that can shorten projector life Projector Clean the projector air filter using the following steps Filters 1 Disconnect the fixture from power f s 2 Rotate and lock the fixture head in the or 90 tilt m position 4 pA 3 Unlatch and remove the rear bezel hS ZS 4 Loosen two quarter turn screws to remove the bottom cover and locate the filter removal tool mounted on the chassis of 7 3 _ Loosen screws to grasp and lift the two air filters from the internal projector remove tool 6 Clean air filter with compresses air a brush or wash out dust and particles with mild soap and water 7 If the filter damaged replace it only with the part listed in Related Products and Optional Accessories on page 4 filter with gasket t om 8 Replace completely dry filters in slot The filters are keyed for positioning Make sure that both filters are fully inserted 214 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Replacing the Lamp WARNING AN Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to 130 C 266 F
147. ast content uploading of large files After setting up an Ethernet network and linking all DL 2 fixtures and your computer insert the CD that shipped with your fixture to automatically install the CMA on your harddrive For more information on CMA operation see Chapter 16 Content Management Application CMA on page 187 Note If the CMA doesn t automatically launch navigate to the CMA msi file in your windows browser and double click to launch When you launch the CMA it automatically finds and identifies all DL 2 fixtures and Axon media servers connected to the fixture link Note To avoid problems with fixture communication over the Ethernet link disable all firewall programs on your computer when using the CMA 14 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 2 setup and Configuration Verifying and Upgrading Fixture and CMA Software Fixture and CMA software are continuously being updated to increase performance and add new features The software loaded on you fixture may not be the most up to date The latest fixture and CMA software are always available at the High End Systems website CMA software version is noted upon installation and can be accessed after that under the File menu The CMA All Servers view lets you view the fixture software version on all DL 2 and Axon media servers linked to it via Ethernet HighEnd 01 Management Client Ble Servers Help Test HIGH END SYSTEMS if 5 Biya s 4
148. at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Adjusts color saturation from no adjustment at a DMX value 0 to full saturation at a value of 255 100 i ge LA Original Content Visual Mode nda DMX value 2 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 2 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100 a E Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 2 Visual Mode Modifier DMX value 190 75 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100 98 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects ShakeNBake Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 22 This option randomly vibrates the image You can control the horizontal and vertical frequency Modifier 1 Adjusts random horizontal shake frequency from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum Modifier 2 Adjusts random vertical shake frequency from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum Texture Mixing Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 12 Texture Mixing lets you crossfade from textures media file content of one Graphic Object to the texture of another Graphic Object Any effects applied to the Source file do not display Modifier 1 Selects the Source file for the texture you want to pull A DMX value 1 selects Graphic Object 1 s media file content A DMX value 2 selects Graphic Object 2 s media file content A DMX value 3 selects Graphic Object 3 s media file content Modifier 2 Adjusts Graphic Object opacity of the source texture from a DMX value of 0
149. ation Speed Rotation Speed 68 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Rotation Parameters X Rotation The X Rotation parameter rotates the selected Graphic Object around the x axis with 16 bit precision You can index the rotation or set a continuous rotation creating a vertical flip at variable speeds This parameter lets you view an object from a different angle by turning the object You can also view an object from a different angle by changing the viewpoint in space for the composite image see Global Viewpoint Mode on page 120 Default DMX Value 32768 50 No X Rotation of Value Function Range 1 24 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise image rotation around X axis fast to slow 25 Continuous rotation stop 26 49 Rotates the image counterclockwise around X axis in steps to 720 degrees 50 0 rotation around X axis 51 74 Rotates the image clockwise around X axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 75 Continuous rotation stop 76 100 Continuous variable speed clockwise image rotation around X axis slow to fast Tip Using this parameter you can turn one object through another Se ANY Original Object 1 and Object 2 X axis Rotation Applied to Object 2 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 69 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Y Rotation The Y Rotation parameter rotates or indexes the selected Graphic Object
150. ault DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint scroll left increasing in speed as you approach 0 Values above the midpoint scroll right increasing in speed to 255 100 Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint scroll down increasing in speed as you approach 0 Values above the midpoint scroll up increasing in speed to 255 100 Modifier 3 Scales the image from 0 no adjustment to maximum tiling at 255 NOTE This option is also available as a Visual Mode adjusted with 2 Modifier parameters see Film Roll on page 88 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 159 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Framing Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 133 This option contains three modes that modify the appearance or the operation of the Global I mage Edge Fade parameters to frame the global composite image Modifier 2 and Modifier 3 adjustments vary depending which of the framing modes is selected with Modifier 1 NOTE Ifthe Global Image Edge Fade DMX values are set to Zero the Framing output will be unseen in modes 0 and 1 The images below show examples of the first two framing modes In the image on the left Modifier 1 selects the internal profile framing option with Modifier 2 selecting the frame pattern In the example on the right Modifier 1 selects the Graphic Object texture framing option with Modifier 2 selecting the fram
151. back The object transparency opacity Visual Effects including colormixing and geometric effects Synchronization Image Rotation Scale and Position Global Functions Global controls are applied to composite image created by multiple 3 D images For the combined image you can Adjust the composite image intensity level Apply visual effects including colormixing and geometric effects Select a mask shape size it and apply edge fades and color to the mask Apply and color mix an image edge fade Control keystone correction Establish the point in 3 D space from which image will be viewed Making Graphics ffect Choices Because you have control of many parameters there are sometimes several ways to accomplish the same look For Example to make an object appear larger you can scale it along the x y and z axis or you can apply a global control to zoom in on the z axis from a viewpoint that makes the object seem to increase in size Which solution you choose depends to a large extent on the transition to other effects you want to achieve 58 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter 7 Graphic Functions Defining Content Each Graphic Object s content is composed of a 3 D object overlaid with a media file This chapter outlines how to select an image s object and media file components as well as define the video segment and its playback Selecting Content How Content is Organized Every Axon and DL 2
152. bandwidth Mod3 Transparency Raindrop effect Mod1 controls size speed Mod2 seeds the random number generator and Mod3 46 controls raindrop rate Scale RGB Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green Mod3 scale blue Maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and 47 Mod sets overall color range Tiling On Scaler of 128 1 to 1 Note Tiling on Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2 Mod1 x axis tiling scaler Mod2 y axis tiling scaler Mod3 not used Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 green to alpha Mods blue to alpha Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2 inverted green to alpha Mod3 inverted blue to alpha Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from original to source texture Image Scale and Rotate Mod1 scales image Mod2 rotation angle Mod3 rotation speed Film Roll Mod1 horizontal roll speed Mod2 vertical roll soeed Mod3 Image scale Pixelate Mod1 Amount of pixelation Mod2 horizontal scaler Mod3 vertical scaler Faux LED Mod1 LED size Mod2 spacing Mod 3 color peaking Faux Tile Mod1 Tile size Mod2 spacing Mod 3 color peaking Fuzzifier Mod1 Horizontal distance Mod2 vertical distance Mod3 fuzz decay Drop Shadow Mod1 horizontal shadow size Mod2 vertical shadow size Mod3 shadow Opacity Zoom Blur Mod1 horizontal position center Mod2 vertical position center Mod3 zoom Chroma Shift Mod1 horizont
153. below the center move clockwise to the minimum vertical angle at a value of 0 Viewpoint Position Z Zoom The Viewpoint Position Z Zoom parameter is the distance from the view target Zooming toward the target you can move through it and view it from the back side creating an mirror image view of the composite object Default DMX Value 30260 center This default value is slightly less than midway through the range to maintain some depth to the view of a composite image DMX values above center move toward the maximum distance from origin in back of view target a DMX value of 65535 DMX values below center move toward the maximum distance from origin in front of view target at a value of zero DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 121 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions 122 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter Ie Global Functions Collage Generator Effect Using the Collage Generator effect option lets you configure multiple media server outputs to display a single image in arrays up to 8 x 8 Collage Generator technology allows you to create virtually seamless panoramic media projections controlled from your DMX console You can display either stock or custom content You can create a Collage effect using DL 2 fixtures or Axon media servers outputting to DL 1 fixtures or other digital projectors When using third party projectors you will need to position output manually a a a z a a E E E a
154. c engine software to control content selection playback and 3 D Object and Global manipulation Axon Protocol Options Axon media servers and DL 2 fixtures both provide individual and composite graphical control for up to three 3 D Objects You can control the footprint of the fixture on a DMX link by choosing to implement only the number of 3 D objects you need Select the protocol level in the fixture s onboard menu system for DL 2 fixtures or through the CMA for both DL 2 fixtures and Axon media servers see Viewing Fixture Configuration Values on page 205 Appendix A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol on page 229 has a detailed listing of all the parameters for Axon media servers and they are discussed in more detail in the following chapters Protocol Selection DMX Channel Range Axon DL2 Standard Protocol Image Optimizing Controls Images can now be optimized for each cue It is no longer necessary to pre optimize images with a separate software system on a separate computer when preparing for a show Using Visual modes see Visual Mode Options on page 82 you can adjust both Black Level and Contrast for each cue and for each image DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 55 CHAPTER 6 Graphics Engine Overview Graphics Control Hierarchy There is a hierarchy to the DMX control parameters In general object control parameters render individual graphic images Global control parameters act upon the composite image creat
155. center Mod2 y lens center Mod3 lens size Magnifying Lens 2 Mod1 x lens center Mod2 lens center Mod3 lens size Cartoon Edge Mod1 Edge Color Mod2 Contrast Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity Color DeConverge Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left Horizontal Mirror Mod1 mirror center Mod2 and Mods not used RGB Swap to BGR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to RBG Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GRB 43 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 280 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Modi Color Scheme selection Mod2 Zero intensity point in color scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme Mod2 Intensity bandwidth Mod3 Transparency level Raindrop effect Mod1 controls size speed Mod2 seeds the random number generator and Mod3 46 controls raindrop rate Scale RGB Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green Mod3 scale blue Maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and 47 Mod sets overall color range Tiling On Scaler of 128 1 to 1 Note Tiling on Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2 Mod1 x axis tiling scaler Mod2 y axis tiling scaler Mod3 not used Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 green to alpha Mods blue to alpha Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2
156. center pixel in each cell defines the solid color for that tile You can control the number and spacing of tile choose between a black and white grid and adjust color peaking Modifier 1 Controls the tile size The default DMX value of 0 displays a 100 x 100 grid of tiles Increasing the DMX value decreases the grid divisions to a minimum of 10 x 10 at a value of 255 100 NOTE A small number of larger tiles will also result in reduced color variation This option is also available as a Visual Mode adjusted with 2 Modifier parameters see Faux Tile on page 87 Modifier 2 Adjusts the grid spacing and color around each tile A DMX value of 0 the mini mum black line between tiles The spacing increases to a maximum at a DMX value of 127 49 At a value of 128 50 the space between tiles reverts to the minimum spacing and turns white Increasing the value further increases the white spacing to a maximum at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Adjusts the color peaking to simulate lighting at the tile edges A DMX value of 0 no adjustment and flat color across the tile As you increase the DMX value the peaking increases to a maximum at 255 100 Film Roll M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 53 This option scrolls the media file texture horizontally or vertically independent from the 3 D object it overlays and allows you to control the scrolling speed and image scaling Modifier 1 The def
157. cherheit beeintr chtigen und unter Umst nden gegen die diesbez glichen Sicherheitsnormen versto en Avvertenza Sulla Modifica Del Prodotto prodotti di High End Systems sono stati progettati e fabbricati per soddisfare i requisiti delle normative di sicurezza statunitensi ed internazionali Qualsiasi modifica al prodotto potrebbe pregiudicare la sicurezza e rendere il prodotto non conforme agli standard di sicurezza pertinenti Advertencia De Modificaci n Del Producto Los productos de High End Systems est n dise ados y fabricados para cumplir los requisitos de las reglamentaciones de seguridad de los Estados Unidos e internacionales Las modificaciones al producto podr an afectar la seguridad y dejar al producto fuera de conformidad con las normas de seguridad relevantes FCC Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense
158. cniiedvicdesnendeaadsesdeecdddesnesenseensansetaasenesendans 121 Viewpoint Position Z ZOOM ssssssssnnnsnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 121 Chapter 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect Using the Collage Generator effect option lets you configure multiple media server outputs to display a single image in arrays up to 8 x 8 Panorama Collage ConfigurationS ssssssssssss2us20uu22uu220uu2u0uunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 124 Computing Collage Specifications seeiricsrri oe aane E E O E 124 EXAMP E en En AAEE ESE AAEE E ENNE ELKEL 124 Central Panorama Collage SpecificationS sesssssresrrrsrrrsrrenrrrnrrrrerresrrrsrne 125 Horizontal Panorama Collage Specifications sssrsssresrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrene 126 Vertical Panoramas Collage Specifications sessserrssrresrrrsrrrsrrrerrrerrrerrrene 128 Configuring the Collage Generator ssssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 131 AG USCC the Collage Aray srureneaaia tinted Ei seat na NEEE AAE DEEA ATERRAT 131 Collage Setu EX aii Ole hsi ar E AOAIE 133 Mapping a Collage to a Spherical Surface ssssssssnssunununununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 134 Spherical Mapping Setup Guide ssssssssssrrserrrsrrrsrrrsrresrrrnerrrerrrrrrresrrrsrrererere 134 Berore YOW BEGI reniissipornie e e E N N arn 134 Mapping Two Outputs to a Sphere sssssssssesrssnrrsrrrsrrrsrresrrrsrrrerrrerrrerrrrsre 134 spherical Mapping TIPS sintcccccecwns
159. cond way to view Status messages is by navigating to the Info Status screen This screen displays current error or status messages If there are multiple error warning messages displayed use the up down arrows to scroll through the list in the top pane When an item is highlighted in the top pane the bottom pane details information associated with that error Supported E rror Warning Messages Issue Large Format Message Message Deta Noies This message will end when the fixture has reached the recom mended operational temperature Info_Status tab only Home the fixture This message does not through the menu appear in large format Motion Shut Down system Test_Home_ The Motion Systems is in shut Motion All_ Home down mode To return to normal screen the CMA operation power cycle or see page 205 or perform a HOME ALL from the DMX console see page 180 Check the Ribbon cable connections at the camera and the head card the Blue The system is unable to side should be facing communicate with the Camera out Use the camera s zoom buttons to check that the camera has power PROJ STATUS COOLING The projector must cool down before it can re strike the lamp Projector Temperature Status Motion Shut Down Status Camera Communication Error CAMERA COMM ERROR 220 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting issue Large Format Message Message Detail Notes Fi
160. creation rate from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate 168 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions ShakeNBake M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 61 This option randomly vibrates the image You can control the horizontal and vertical frequency Modifier 1 Adjusts random horizontal shake from the shortest refresh rate at a value 0 to to a maximum at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Adjusts random vertical shake from the shortest refresh rate at a value 0 toa maximum at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Adjusts how much the image is allowed to move from a minimum at a DMX value of 0 to a maximum at a DMX value of 255 100 Tip To get the maximum effect set a high value for Modifier 3 and low values for Modifiers 1 and 2 NOTE This option is also available as a Visual Mode adjusted with 2 Modifier parameters see ShakeNBake on page 99 Sinewave Circular M Object Effect JGlobal Effect Sinewave Circular w X axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 64 Sinewave Circular w Y axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 65 Sinewave Circular w Z axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 66 These options create a circular sinewave pattern and then vary the boundaries of the underlying object along the designated axis without affecting the media file that is applied as a texture Modifier
161. ct power to the fixture If the fixture has been operating allow the fixture to cool before handling 2 Loosen the 2 Phillips head screws on the top cover of the connector side of the box 3 Tilt the connector panel away from the box 4 Remove the fuse from the fuse holder 5 Replace the fuse with a 5A slow blow fuse only 6 Replace the side and top panels Cleaning or Replacing the Front Window Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to 130 C 266 F Allow the fixture to cool before handling WARNINGS Disconnect power before servicing OU To access the front an sie Phillips screws Phillips head screws window and washers 1 Remove the four phillips head screws two on each side of the front bezel 2 Slide the bezel from the front of the fixture 216 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 3 Disconnect power to infrared illuminator 9 10 Inside the bezel locate the two Phillips head screws and washers securing the front window in place Remove the screws making sure not to misplace the washers Clean the front window using a mild glass cleaner containing no ammonia and a soft lint free cotton cloth If the window needs replacement use the part specified in Related Products and Optional Accessories on page 4 Carefully replace the Phillips screws and washers making sure not to break the glass CAUTION Us
162. ctX x format x files may be stored in either text form or binary form e An object can have one layer one surface and one file texture e An object s UV texture coordinates should be in the range 0 0 1 0 to insure proper presentation UV coordinates outside this range will wrap to this range but the results are not predictable e All polygons should be triangles when creating objects it can be easier to work with polygons that have more than three sides However an object should only contain triangles three sided polygons when ultimately saved for use with the graphics engine e An object can contain multiple disconnected subobjects as long as item 4 is followed An example would be an object composed of an array of disconnected spheres or cubes Managing Custom Content The Content Management Application running on your own computer as a client to DL 2 media servers via Ethernet manages any User Content you create All Stock and User content can be viewed and refreshed but the CMA client gives you additional control over other aspects of your custom content Sections under Managing User Content on page 194 in Chapter 16 describe the User content management functions including instructions on how to e Rename files and folders e Delete files and folders e Control DMX value assignment to files and folders e Move files and folders between your local drive and a DL 2 fixture server e Move files between networked DL 2 fixtur
163. cting All Configuration displays the combined 192 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA configuration values for all the servers on the network For more information on server configuration see Viewing and Editing Server Configuration on page 204 F Mac OS X Viewing Server Configuration To access Server Configuration information for an individual server select the Configuration option under the individual server Viewing Content When viewing Content the right pane contains the following information in a table format HighEnd DL Management Client File Media Files Help 7 s HIGH END SYSTEMS Eh Al Servers 4 servers Name Type MK Sie Date Dp wo 000 Amorphous Long Trailer my2 m m2v 1 38 929KB 2 2 2005 7 59 A C User Content E 001 Blue 70s my2 maw ma 2 13 033 KB 2 2 2005 8 00 Amorphous Digi gobos 40 002 Bright Psych mv2 m2v my 3 24 316 KB 2 2 2005 8 01 Apollo Glass H 003 Max Psych mv m2v me 4 6 060 RE 2 72 2005 6 02 seas E 004 Ripple Melt 3 mv2 m2v my 5 8 146KB 2 2 2005 8 02 a_luna_blue 43 E 00S Square Hypno mye maw mia 6 1 6293KB 2 2 2005 8 02 O Beacon 44 NOTE Clicking on a column heading sorts the table according to the values in that column Viewing Folders Each Stock or User Media folder contains a group of media files e Name of the Media File collection This value is editable for User content See Naming a
164. ction of the Tilt motor Deal Swap ilt Swaps Pan and Tilt directions Sap Defaut Data Loss Lon Closes iris after a 5 minute DMX data loss Uiii Closes iris after a 5 second DMX data loss Display Default intensity a unes you select Off adjustment ee Preview Displays current ERE cael content M OF Tums off display afera period orme Display On Inverts menu display and navigalon L 24 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Main Sub Tabs Fields Set Fixture External Identifies the SVideo format used for video input SVideo SECAM_K PONI SECAM L 1 Projector Factory Projector External Chooses the input the Projector will accept fo gens selected from DMX Disables changing projector input via DMX Projector Manually turns Projector Lamp on Manually turns Projector Lamp off Startup connected to power n Turns the projector lamp on with DMX input default Projector Navigation buttons control Projector Menu System Navigation buttons control Fixture Menu System ULE bites e eal by the console On Overrides the DMX values sent by the console Override Set value manually from 0 255 Projector Defaults Selecting button restores Factory Projector Defaults On Projector Rotates the image 180 degrees Defaut On Projector Inverts the image for projection from behind a Rear screen Settings do not match factory defaults File Displays content file locations and allows a content preview see pa
165. ctor menu is selected for display you may need to manually adjust the zoom and or focus parameters to view the display clearly The Zoom Override and Focus Override options override the DMX values sent by the console and allow you to control Zoom and focus manually with a DMX decimal value between 0 255 Projector Ceiling rotates the image 180 degrees so you can adjust for whether the fixture is hung in the air or sitting on the floor Projector Rear projects a mirror invert of the image Projector Menu for rear screen projection applications Command Projector Control Menu can be set to On to display LANGUAGE ENGLISH the projector s menu system In this state the OFF directional front panel buttons multi directional switch OFF and the buttons on either side of it control the projector menu rather than the LCD menu To revert back to the Menu display press one of the six NPUT1 RGB SCREEN NORMAL INPUT2 POWER OFF MANAGEMENT options on the Projector tab to their factory default LOGO settings For more information refer to the Projector ON START User Manual that shipped with your DL 2 fixture FANSPEED NORMAL side menu buttons When the Projector Control Menu is set to Off the projector control menu is not displayed Turning Projector Defaults On will reset all the File Screen DHA TopMac i The File screen displays information about Feedback Wid l HES Atmosph the currently selected content file Use this LY HEE
166. cular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Chromakey Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Medium Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Global Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color Effect 1 using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Scan Line Modi selects scan line as texture Mod2 fades from original image to converted image Mod3 not used reserved Transparent wipes Mod1 width of transparent area Mod2 center of transparent area Mod3 transparency mode Pixel Twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center Mod3 direction and amount of twist Picture in Picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture center Mod3 subpicture size Magnifying lens Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center Mod3 lens size Magnifying lens 2 Mod1 x lens center Mod2 lens center Mod3 lens size Cartoon Edge Mod1 Edge Color Mod2 Contrast Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity Color DeConverge Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left Horizontal Mirror Mod1 mirror center Mod2 and Mod3 not used DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol RGB Swap to BGR 41 M
167. d 93 68 EEC Equipment referred to in this declaration of conformity was first manufactured in compliance with the following standards in 2005 Safety EN 60598 1 1997 EN 60598 2 17 1990 Al1 A3 1998 A13 1999 EMC EN 55022 Conducted Emissions ClassA Radiated Emissions Class A ANSI C63 4 Class A FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class A VCCI V 1 2001 04 Class A EN 55024 EN 61000 4 2 A 8kV EN 61000 4 3 Al 3V m EN 61000 4 4 1kV 0 5kV EN 61000 4 5 2kV 1kV EN 61000 4 6 3 Vrms EN 61000 4 11 gt 95 0 5p 30 25p gt 95 250p EN 61000 3 2 Class A EN 61000 3 3 USA Friday June 15 2007 Kenneth Stuart Hansen Compliance Engineer iv DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Product Modification Warning High End Systems products are designed and manufactured to meet the requirements of United States and International safety regulations Modifications to the product could affect safety and render the product non compliant to relevant safety standards Mise En Garde Contre La Modification Du Produit Les produits High End Systems sont con us et fabriqu s conform ment aux exigences des r glements internationaux de s curit Toute modification du produit peut entrainer sa non conformit aux normes de s curit en vigueur Produktmodifikationswarnung Design und Herstellung von High End Systems entsprechen den Anforderungen der U S Amerikanischen und internationalen Sicherheitsvorschriften Abanderungen dieses Produktes k nnen dessen Si
168. d Jevauth ETE EEKE TEREE ie AENA AEN 136 Creating Custom Content for the Collage Generator Effect ssseecsssesees 137 Collages Using Live S Video I NpUt ssssssusnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 137 Chapter 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Effects can be applied to the Media File content texture mapped onto a 3 D object Multiple Color and Geometric options are available in Effect Mode parameters for both individual Graphic object and Global control Effect Mode Color Options cisiiisiitacccscatciicnsaicsssaicasacassssaaa decade cenecennesescedeereess 140 AOF NOIN O 2escaresete int tee ceaaiden ech nad a a a aa 140 BaCk Around Color smarri aa A E A EGS 140 BackgroundColor CY GIG iia Pe AARAA ENANA 140 ERNrOMaAKEY eee weer Peon E meee ae E E a a O eee 141 Chromakey Coarse secieshececekeneuses D ea ENA ANE E A EE ON 141 Chromakey FINE eiria a E O a a anus 141 Chromakey Medin sa Sas asie side aie riete ott ens a E E aati dtatale gel 141 Modifier Parameters cc caurarcearascenpictmcmimianGesie aeuah in T a E TADAS 141 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CirOMaKey WAWEISC 226 SocsmaeS en cxuaceter must a a coe A AERE 142 Chromakey Coarse INVErSE dieresia nE ee tacts dee EAKA UETAN 142 Chromakey Fine INY SE rnea a a A a 142 Chromakey Medium Inverse ssssssssrsssrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrresrrrernrerrresrrerrreern 142 Modifier Parameter Sersan E E tee enaweas 142 CNY sirina heee aa oe ERE T a te 143 CMY Ad
169. d1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 Not used Corrects output for vertical concave cylinder Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 Not used Corrects output for vertical inside corner Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 adjusts horizontal centerpoint Corrects output for vertical outside corner Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 adjusts horizontal centerpoint Curved Surface Outside Sphere Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 adjusts horizontal centerpoint Curved Surface Inside Sphere Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical centerpoint Mod3 adjusts horizontal centerpoint Enhanced Collage Mod1 grid style selection Mod2 grid portion displayed Mod3 edge blend Spherical mapping Outside Mod1 logitude angle Mod2 latitude angle Mod3 center latitude Spherical mapping Inside Mod1 logitude angle Mod2 latitude angle Mod3 center latitude Mattes Mod1 Mode Mod2 Matte Select Mod3 texture source DL2 Digital Light User Manual 235 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Reserved Defaults to effect 0 145 254 Pan and Scale Mod1 horizontal position 255 NA Mod2 vertical position Mod3 Zoom These Modifier parameters adjust the option 24 3 an eae selected in Channel 23 for DL 2 fixtures or 0 255 0 100 OMe Channel 2 for Axon Media Servers Global Effect 1 See Global Effect Mode 1 and E
170. d1 adjusts color contrast Mod2 adjusts color shift Invert B amp W Keep Color Mod1 black comparison level Mod2 white comparison level Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file zat Crossfade from original to source texture Image Scale and Rotate Mod1 image scale Mod2 rotation angle Film Roll Mod1 horizontal roll speed Mod2 Vertical roll soeed Pixelate Mod1 amount of pixelation Mod 2 not 15 used 145 124 Visual Mode Faux LED Mod1 LED size Mod2 spacing Faux Tile Mod1 Tile size Mod2 spacing Fuzzifier Mod1 x axis distance Mod2 y axis distance Drop Shadow Mod1 horizontal shadow size Mod2 vertical shadow size Zoom Blur Mod1 horizontal position center Mod2 vertical position center Chroma Shift Mod1 horizontal shift Mod2 vertical shift ShakeNBake Mod1 horizontal shake Mod2 vertical shift Reserved Defaults to Reserved Defaultsto0 254 ee ee and Scan Mod1 horizontal position Mod2 vertical position i Adjusts option selected in Channel 145 for DL 2 146 125 Visual Mode fixtures or Channel 124 for Axon Media Servers 9 255 0 100 Modifier 1 The type of adjustment and the default value depends on the particular visual mode option NA NA Options on page 82 Visual Mode For more about Modifier parameter functionality 147 126 Modifier 2 see Visual Mode on page 80 and Visual Mode 9 299 0 100 274 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDI
171. devsvess savude vanevasenagau aan ANEREN 55 I mage Optimizing ControlS cccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeeeeauans 55 Graphics Control Hierarchy siciiissiiedencicncteccdaasiancdadeutucwesadenduewsutadweseusuanteuseuaen 56 Graphics Engine Function FIOW asc oaks caw eeann TE EEEE 57 Graphics ENGiIne FUNCHON S sisi si sie seniswwacisidasenauaniuewesasasianenevessaiencarestaeseassulsaneedens 58 ODJECE Gra OIC FUNGCCONS vassere ieran T beeen sna ieee E E E E 58 GODAL FUNCIONS Aae E EAE a E EES EAA 58 Making Graphics Effect Choices sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 58 Chapter 7 Graphic Functions Defining Content Each Graphic Object s content is composed of a 3 D object overlaid with a media file This chapter outlines how to select an image s object and media file components as well as define the video segment and its playback Selecting CONTCNE tiicetetniversndernassssadvaddeaddnceancedsdesusneasesauseucesesstanceewssaasasaeeunea 59 HOW Content IS Organized orreen aeee a a A N ATEOA 59 Selecting CONTENE rieni e a a A O E E ehaui 59 Content Selection Parameters ssssssnsssnnuuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnmnnn 60 ODJECE rere ere te mm e E E A A mR eae nt er 60 Media POI Siaa ea cast uaas salt leten A A a A a aE 61 Media Folder DeScCriDHONS sspircosevvbe rr an E E a Ea Oiek 61 MESFET a T A O EEEN 62 xii DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Defining a Media File Segment
172. dicates DMX data CMA connection going out Ethernet port to Two USB ports 5 pin DMX512 connect DL 2 fixtures for peripherals Data In and to fixture link and including hard drives Data Out a computer running the CMA o C RECEIVE Q 6 6 Link USB 1 O TRANSMIT ACTIVITY 100 120 V USB 2 50 60Hz 7A 200 rine oor 00000 OUT pa ge S5 D e Caa VGA Input for S Video Output RGBHV input to another DL 2 external source for external fixture S Video In video source CAUTION To avoid damaging the fixture and voiding the warranty do not physically connect to the RGBHV and VGA inputs at the same time DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Pan and Tilt Locking The DL 2 fixture ships with pan and tilt latches locked You can unlock adjust these latches to stabilize the fixture for mounting Tilt Lock Ny Attaching a Power Cord Cap The DL 2 fixture ships with an SJT power cord Use the information in this section to replace the power cord cap for locations with another electrical standard Because of the variety of power cord caps used worldwide High End Systems Inc cannot make specific recommendations for the power cord cap Contact a local authority for the type of power cord cap needed When installing the power cord cap note that the cores in the mains lead are colored according to the following code e green and yellow earth e blu
173. ding or Shrinking it Use it when you want to size the object s thickness A DMX value of 128 50 sets the object at its normal size Values less than 50 shrink the the object thickness until it reaches a point at a value of 0 Values greater then 50 enlarge the object to a maximum thickness at 255 100 Default DMX Value 128 50 Normal Scale Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 2 Z Scale parameter DMX value 223 All Scale parameters DMX values 128 50 Scaled 7 5 times in Z direction 74 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Changing Object Position You can reposition each 3 D object s position in 3 D space by moving it along the X Y and Z axes The following parameters act on an individual object Use these parameters to position 3 D images in relation to each other X Position The X Position parameter moves your object along the x axis with 16 bit precision The midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value range centers the image on the X axis Values below the DMX midpoint move the object left and values above the DMX midpoint move the object right Default DMX Value 32768 50 object centered in frame Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 1 X Position DMX value 32022 All Position DMX values 32768 50 Object 1 X Position DMX value 33561 Y Position The Y Position parameter moves your object along the y axis with 16 bit precision
174. dual Graphic Object ODACIEY acano E ESSEE E EE G 79 Visual MOAGI EAS 80 Visual M de Op ons sisiissesntenetacicccsancdniendawsnasbndsnnanbednenaueedudsemascnsneesaeeanebeaee 82 COOL CO BIN sar EEE ade Soh E E E E EAT 82 COMLENE OPCIMIZALION tai iceysshstine esau a e ree eds 82 CHPOM aro ITC amtucn social ansaatensnedtietsasunte cadena sauce E dete tadeseecae 83 DrD SACO WY S ereinen aE e a EE aggrecan oe cvs magna are aaa arene eens 84 EXPOSUFEG GONUIOL ssh oveisitacincucirceiateetnaced a a vee Tae ticeaac tans eden aaa seats 85 FODE De sett ia hasan eae E ean altace nat aerate ania ieee Reena hte 86 Pau EIE reani Mey Le deeeeadienannuucnuguiin dag vi nde E NS 87 PI ROM eoeta vate nsarctatAtanannatr a E E citamintodud sense N A 88 FIFE GraGlent cccrsaverase ever abun wine cucantdeciau EEEE EEEE ANE neuen meamdanaatade 88 PZ UMS sr oreo whee Suen tals estos cg estan innended es edeeal nena ee ima O atoll EON 89 Gray VAS a icc a Wits ana teens a omc hed su bon th anc nteala dade EO 90 Gay IMAKGl 2 2 nsssataceneeaiauds a wiehGeeeeanusha E nha aie AIEEE 91 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual xiii Invert Black and White Keep Color cccccccceeccecceee eset ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeananeenees 92 Negative ATE esos tots coe teth avons cater ee teen tater baling ve centavos euuhae echau eso ue A 93 Pan ana SCA ena th sian ane a ele arene eerie 94 PcG lel CS staat weatianawa tania ane E Ramat EN 95 POSTO acta atetatuintetas steuneenntand ina
175. e neutral e brown live Installing a Line Cord Cap U K Only In the United Kingdom core colours in the mains lead of this equipment may not correspond with the colored markings identifying the terminals in the fixture s plug In that case install a line cord cap in accordance with the following code e Connect the green and yellow core to the plug terminal marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol or coloured green or green and yellow e Connect the blue core to the terminal marked with the letter N or coloured black e Connect the brown core to the terminal marked with the letter L or coloured red WARNING Class 1 equipment This equipment must be earthed Vatic Fitter Heads Information Danmark Advarsel Beskyttelse mod elektrisk chock Vigtigt IH Lederne med gul groen isolation maa kun tilsluttes en klemme maerket D eller DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 7 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Mounting the Fixture You can mount DL 2 fixtures suspended from a support system such as a truss or freestanding on its base WARNING Equipment suitable for dry locations only Do not expose this equipment to rain or moisture CAUTION Always use a secondary safety cable when mounting this fixture Maintain a minimum focus distance of 1 4 meters from a C14 M combustible object z Do not mount on a flammable surface A Ss Note Due to the wide variety of possible lighti
176. e DMX Value associated with each file and folder makes it easy to use the DMX control protocol to identify a unique media file or 3D object There are up to 240 Media file folders with each capable of containing up to 255 image or movie media files This gives a theoretical total of 61 200 possible locations for Media image or movie files There is one DMX parameter used to identify a 3D object so 255 DMX values are available between the Stock and User Content to identify 3D objects Assigning DMX Values Automatically The CMA can automatically assign a unique DMX value to any file or folder on a media that does not already have a value This automated assignment is based on alphabetically sorting the existing file folder names and assigning each item a unique consecutive integer To automatically assign DMX values to a single file or folder with user content 1 Display the User content folder or file in the right pane of the CMA Window 2 Select AutoSet DMX from either the Media Files folder or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list The CMA will assign a valid DMX value to the file or the folder You can automatically assign DMX values to all folders at once or to all the files within a folder at once You cannot set both files and folder values at the same time To automatically assign DMX values to all the User content folders or all files within a User content folder 1 Display the User content folders or the files for a singl
177. e Factory Content Upgrade DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 35 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System 36 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter 4 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start If you are new to DMX programing this chapter will give you a brief overview on programming Axon and DL 2 media servers followed by a example of using a Wholehog console to patch and display output from an Axon or DL 2 media server DMX Programming Overview DMX5le Links A lighting console typically utilizes a protocol called DMX512 to communicate with automated lighting fixtures and conventional dimmers This protocol consists of 512 unique channels of control per output link universe Typically a lighting fixture or device will use a channel for each parameter s function Each channel consists of 256 values ranging from O to 255 The lighting console is programmed to transmit a corresponding DMX value for the desired function of each parameter All DMX values are stored within in the lighting console and typically are referred to as cues scenes or presets A lighting console locates a device on the link by it s DMX Start Channel 8 bit vs 16 bit DMX Parameters Most parameters of an automated light use one channel of DMX providing 256 values of control 0 255 This is known as 8 bit DMX Although most DL 2 parameters use 8 bit DMX several require a more accurate range of values than can be provided with a single DMX channel By u
178. e Screen display current configuration settings and uses drop down boxes numeric up down selectors and other user interface options to select in editable fields LCD Display Adjustment Buttons The four LCD Display Adjustment buttons next to o Menu the LCD screen control and provide visual adjustments for the menu display j O Menu Select Start 7 o LCD Power LCD Display Power Button Channel The button nearest the green LED is the LCD display ID L Display LED power button Holding it down for two seconds turns 1 the Menu display on or off Use this in situations when you need to turn the Menu display completely off instead of dimming it to video black If you turn the LCD off and then remove power to the Menu Display Adjustment Buttons DL 2 the LCD power will restore the default ON when you reapply power to the fixture Note The LCD screen power button doesn t affect power to the fixture or the internal projector LCD Display Menu Options and Selection The button furthest from the green LED is the menu button Pressing this brings up the different functions contained in the LCD screen itself The screen menu options are e Picture adjusts the sharpness of the screen e Color adjusts the richness of the color e Contrast adjustment e Black Level adjustment e Tint adjustment e Restore returns the screen to the factory defaults The other two buttons are used to adjust the currently selected
179. e controls the actual moving yoke projector and integrated camera The Global fixture type controls the global graphic engine functions such as intensity keystone correction viewpoint etc The Graphic fixture type controls each graphic object functions such as opacity object media etc The DL 2 protocol allows for 1 2 or 3 graphic objects An Axon media server had no motion control but utilizes the same Global and Graphic fixture types In the Fixture Schedule or Add Fixtures window of Wholehog software you would add 1 motion 1 global and 3 graphic fixtures for each complete DL 2 unit or 1 global and 3 graphic fixtures for each complete Axon unit The best way to organize your patching is to assign user numbers for these items Patch the motion first the global second and the graphic fixture types last For example set up user numbers 1 5 that correspond to DL 2 fixture number 1 where user number 1 is the motion 2 is the global and 3 5 the graphic fixture types DMX Output Displays Although all lighting consoles output the same 512 DMX channels per universe the on screen labeling often differs Parameter functions are displayed in either alpha numeric descriptions strobe 1 percentage 0 100 or decimal 0 255 for 8 bit and 0 65535 for 16 bit Consult your lighting console manual for further information DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 41 CHAPTER 4 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start Wholehog Ill Pro
180. e determined one of two ways 1 When using DHCP server like router IP is generated automatically 2 Without router IP is generated randomly by Windows called Auto IP The generation of IP addresses is handled just as IP addresses are handled for Window networks Is there a limit to the Ethernet cable run length from the fixtures to the CMA Ethernet Cat 5 limit is 100 meters For longer distances use a router that takes fiber input to Cat 5 output as for typical Ethernet distribution What is the longest length High End Systems has tested for camera video distribution High End has tested up to 1000 feet of quality Cat 5 without noticing degradation of signal Does DL 2 support the file format MPEG 4 MPEG 4 is not currently supported Convert original graphics and video to MPEG 2 224 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter I8 Restoring the System You can perform a system restore on the Axon or DL 2 Server with your System Restore CD A system restore will replace the following components e Microsoft Windows Embedded Operating System e Application The system restore does not replace the Settings the Stock content or User content Note Because this method does not completely erase the hard drive it also does not return the device to a factory state To guarantee a complete return to a factory state you must perform a full system restore Hardware Requirements Caution Contact High End Systems Support http
181. e folder in the right pane of the Content Management window and deselect all files or folders 2 Select Autoset All DMX from either the Media Folders or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list The CMA will assign a valid DMX value to all selected files or folders Using the same steps you can also Reset DMX for a single file or folder or Reset All DMX for all display files or folders displayed in the right pane to zero Editing User Content DMX Values You can manually assign any valid DMX value to your files or folders by selecting the file or folder in the right pane and then using the pull down menu or the right click popup selecting Edit DMX A dialog box will allow you to input the DMX value If it is a valid value from 0 255 the CMA will change the DMX value displayed for the file or folder Valid DMX Values Certain DMX values are Reserved for special purposes and are not user assignable You can change the assigned DMX value for a User Content item to another valid DMX value A valid DMX value is e From 0 255 e Is not one of the reserved values for that type of content e Is unique from other content of it s type except for zero DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 195 CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA The following table shows valid and reserved values for User Content Content Type DMX Values Default Stock media Media Folders media file collections ve peel equeciolp B O C O o
182. e in the Name column to bring up the edit dialog box E Edit Configuration Choose a new configuration value Choose between DMX512 and ArtNet as the source from Dh 612 the drop down list in the option field crea Cancel 206 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA To select a DMX Protocol type xj 1 Scroll down the Configuration list in the right pane and double click on the line with DMX Protocol in the Name column to bring up the edit dialog box 5 HIGH END SYSTEMS Choose a new configuration walue 2 Choose Standard Dual or Single from the drop down list in the option field Standard Standard Dual Protocol Selection _DMX Channel Range Axon DL2 Cancel Standard Protocol ee Dual Protocol Single Protocol To edit the DMX Start Channel Edit Configuration 1 Scroll down the Configuration list in the right pane and double click on the line with Start Channel in the Name geo Sh Ba column to bring up the edit dialog box Ee 2 Enter a valid Start Channel for the protocol type you Cee UN tle have chosen For more information on selecting a valid 314 start channel see Determining a DMX Start Channel on page 38 Configuration Options Cancel Available configuration values will depend on whether you re viewing an Axon or a DL 2 media server The following table shows the configuration values available for view
183. e internal camera but not from both at the same time DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 183 CHAPTER 15 Live Video Input and Control Live Video Connection Options The DL 2 fixture has video connectors for RGBHV VGA and S Video on its rear panel as shown in the following figure _ TRANSMIT Link O RECEIVE ACTIVITY De 100 120 V USB 2 50 60Hz 7A 200 240 V DATA DATA ETHERNET OUT O Gy QO CAMERA SVIDEO VGA V OUT IN IN 0000 VGA input to the projector RGBHV input option to the projector S Video Camera Output to another DL 2 fixture or device S Video In to the graphics engine CAUTION To avoid damaging the fixture and voiding the warranty do not physically connect to the RGBHV and VGA inputs at the same time Configuring the Video Input Source DL 2 fixtures support multiple SVideo formats including You will need to configure the DL 2 fixture to identify which video input source you have chosen The active input can be configured the following ways e Manually using the DL 2 menu system see information about the Projector Input field on the Set_Projector Screen on page 31 e Remotely through the CMA see Editing Configuration Values on page 205 e Via the DMX console commands see Projector Control on page 181 NOTE The integrated cameras provides an NTSC_M video signal 184 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Live Video In
184. e pattern A Modifier 3 DMX value 10 designates the Frame texture as Graphic Object 2 s media file content minus any applied effects NOTE Global Image Edge Fade DMX values 100 Effect Mode parameter 133 Effect Mode parameter 133 Modifier 1 DMX 0 Modifier 2 DMX 15 Modifier 1 DMX 1 Modifier 2 DMX 251 Modifier 3 Not Used Modifier 3 DMX 10 Framing Shutter Emulation When Modifier 1 is set to a DMX value 2 Modifier parameters 2 and 3 are not used Instead the four Global Image Edge Fade parameters control image to emulate framing shutters In the example to the right each Image Edge Fade parameter has been set to a DMX value 100 NOTE When emulating framing shutters the image being framed does not change This differs from Keystone Correction that modifies the image shape 160 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Modifier 1 This parameter allows you to select from three framing modes Frames the image using an Internal Frame profile to control the Global Fade Edge parameter appearance Frames the image using an Internal Frame profile to control the Global Fade Edge parameter appearance Rendered Graphic Object content is selected at Frame texture using Modifier 3 parameter Image clipping changing operation of the Global Image Edge Fade parameters to Emulate Framing Shutters Modifier 2 When the Modifier 1 DMX value O or 1 this channel selects fro
185. e plastic washers only when replacing the front glass Using metal washers can damage the glass Reconnect power to the infrared illuminator Replace the front bezel Replacing Motor Driver Boards Replace fuses with the specified type and rating only Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to ANA 130 C 266 F Allow the fixture to cool before handling WARNI NGS AN Disconnect power before servicing The DL 2 fixture is designed with two motor driver boards L 2 The board that controls the motors for the tilt focus zoom and iris functions as well as fans is located in the fixture head The board that drives pan motor and fans is located in the base housing All cabling is marked with labels corresponding to locations on board for easy replacement When changing a board align the screw holes and standoffs to ensure correct orientation in the fixture CAUTI ON The fixture will not function correctly if contact screws are missing from driver boards DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 217 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fixture Head Driver Board To replace the fixture head driver board L 2 3 4 Carefully replace the rear bezel making sure to place but do Disconnect power to the fixture and allow it to cool Unlatch the two rear latches and remove the rear bezel Use a 3 mm allen wrench to remove the addressing screws and star washers Position new board a
186. e sind nur zum Einbau in trockenen Lagen bestimmt und m ssen vor Regen und Feuchtigkeit geschutzt werden Servicearbeiten sollten nur von Fachpersonal ausgefuhrt werden Das Gerat enthalt keine wartungsbedurftigen Teile Dieses Ger t geh rt zur Klasse Dieses Ger t mu geerdet werden DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 297 APPENDIX E Safety Information Ap ndice Informaci n Importante De Seguridad Advertencia Para Protecci n Continua Contra Incendios Este equipo debe conectarse a un circuito que tenga una protecci n maxima contra una sobrecargas de 20 A Advertencia Para La Protecci n Continua Contra Electrocuciones 1 Si se recibi este equipo sin el conector de alimentacion monte usted el conector correcto segun ia clave siguente moreno vivo azul neutral verde amarillo tierra 2 Desconecte el suministro de energ a antes de cambiar l mparas o prestar servicio de reparaci n 3 Este equipo esta disenado para usarce en lugares secos no lo exponga a la lluvia o humedad 4 Derive el servicio de reparaci n de este equipo al personal calificado El interior no contiene repuestos que puedan ser reparados por el usuario 5 Equipo de Clase Este equipo debe conectarse a tierra 298 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX E Safety Information Appendice Importanti Informazioni Di Sicurezza Avvertenza Per Prevenire Incendi Questa apparecchiatura e da collegarsi ad un circu
187. ect from a list of Patterns to test graphics engine functionality On tests Zoom mechanical functionality Off stops self test Press Reboot to restart the internal graphics engine Software Version Read only Start Channel 0255 NTSC_M PAL B PAL D PAL G PAL PAL M External SVideo Format PAL _N SECAM D SECAM G SECAM _H SECAM K1 SECAM_L SECAM L1 Tilt Invert On Inverts Tilt positioning Off reverts to default position Unique Number Read only DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 209 Projector Input Self Test Zoom CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA Axon Configuration Options ReneS SS aaNet Universe Standard 149 channel footprint DMX Protocol Dual 111 channels Single 73 channels DMX Source DMX512 or Art Net DMX Start Channel 085 NTSC M PAL B PAL _D PAL G PAL PAL_M External SVideo Format PAL_N SECAM _D SECAM G SECAM H SECAM K SECAM K1 SECAM_L SECAM L1 FoweD Sees Select from a list of Screen Resolution Refresh Rate and Color Poan Sepiay Gomiguralioh Quality combinations for the Graphic Engine output Select from a list of Screen Resolution Refresh Rate and Color eee Cal Pier Aonig UTANGN Quality combinations for the local monitor output Select from 0 90 180 and 270 degrees rotation of the Graphic Display Rotation Engine output Windows XPe Version Read only 210 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter I7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting This chapter includes informati
188. ed blue RGB Invert amp Swap to GBR Modi red to inverted green Mod2 green to 18 inverted blue Mod3 blue to inverted red RGB Invert amp Swap to BRG Modi red to inverted blue Mod2 green to 19 inverted red Mod3 blue to inverted green Edge Detect Color Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 21 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold DL2 Digital Light User Manual 253 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Texture Ripple Horizontal 99 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Vertical 23 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Chromakey Fine Select key color using 26 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Medium Select key color using 97 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Coarse Select key color using 28 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using 29 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color 30 using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color 34 using Modi red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Scan Line Mod1 selects scan line as texture Mod2 fades from original image to converted image Mod3 not used reserved Transparent Wipes Mod1 width o
189. ed by combining multiple objects Motion parameters control the fixture movement and projection as well as live video feed from the internal camera It is especially important to keep this in mind when applying graphical effects At the lowest level Graphic effects are applied to an individual 3 D Graphic Object Any Global effects applied affect each object in the combined Object image Finally motion effects control the projection of the composite image 56 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Graphics Engine Function Flow A 3 D object Object with a texture 1 is selected Content Opacity Graphic Playbak Functions are applied to each object Visual Mode Global Functions are then applied to the composite object image Graphics Engine outputs final image to projector Object 2 Content Opacity Playback Visual Mode Global Effect 1 Global Effect 2 Edge Fade Keystone Correction Global Viewpoint Global Intensity Playback Visual Mode CHAPTER 6 Graphics Engine Overview DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 57 CHAPTER 6 Graphics Engine Overview Graphics Engine Functions Object Graphic Functions For an individual object you can control The media file and 3 D object selection for the layer Media playback including What portion of the movie plays Playback speed Playback mode direction and style of play
190. ed ccc tiensiadanst a a E A ONE 46 Lesson 2 Working with Multiple Graphic Objects sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 47 Aoply Transparency Etects rrasicnonmeremin rnia EA EEEN 47 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual xi Lesson 3 Girt the Fire Breathing Lizard ssssssnssunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 48 Devine Grapnie OBl ect dh strir ta see oe estate eve Rieter eu rateweds 48 Define Graphic ODJECE srscciatsnaditeitences cectintonrined seater kidunet ce aera ecicetewane 48 Define Graphic ODJET a scsi raine oa a T tae eect indie eaten 49 Lesson 4 3 D Objects Rotation Wobbulation and GIOW sssssssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnn 50 Detine Graphic ODJECE L 4 dcinal sonics tedceteeal scents a OO 50 Define Graphie ObjeCt 2 reminiscent ra a nE REENT E EATA EE EEANN 50 Adjust this effect with the Modifer parameters esssssreserrsrrrsrresrrrerrrerrrene 51 Lesson S NVICWDOME sirina a AAE AAEE EENE 52 Denne Graphic ODJECE L sairoonensin n ninina a a E O 52 Devine Graphic OD Cee 2 reer e E E E E hemes 52 Denne Grap ODJECE 3 deriera ii onnen EE a D a AOA 52 Apply a Global Solarize Effect indarrian E A 53 Adjust Global VIEWPOnt MOGE errenneren a aE NA E RARA 53 Chapter 6 Graphics Engine Overview DL 2 fixture s and Axon Media servers both use the same graphic engine software to control content selection playback and 3 D Object and Global manipulation AXON Protocol ODtTIONS cicisiesstiwssessesuicewaveseccussseesu
191. efault Input from S Video In l l 229 232 camera to Camera Out to Before using DMX to change DL 2 inputs you must enable the 221 224 Graphics Engine Projector Input by DMX option in the menu system see Set_Projector Screen on page 31 or through the CMA see Viewing Fixture Configuration Values on page 205 Once the selection is made allow about 10 seconds for the change to take effect Input from Camera to 233 236 Graphics Engine default CAUTI ON Do not physically connect both the VGA and the RGBHV connectors at the same time Doing so can damage the projector and void the warranty DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 181 CHAPTER 14 Fixture Motion Functions Using the Internal Projector s Menu To use the native projector menu system under DMX control 1 Set the Dimmer parameter DMX value to zero 2 Set the Control parameter DMX value to 182 This will access the projector s main menu 3 Next change the DMX value of the Control panel to zero This command is equivalent to releasing the key on the projector s keypad Failure to release the key will result in unpredictable performance Optional If the projector is mounted on the ceiling flip the display by selecting a Control parameter DMX value from 209 212 4 Set the Dimmer parameter DMX value to 255 100 to view the projector menu s on screen display 5 Adjust the Zoom and Focus parameters to bring the display into focus Now the control
192. egment as a percentage of the file length Moving from 0 to 100 of the Out Frame value range selects the end of a media file segment as a percentage of the file length Segment Selection Examples Example 1 In Frame Out Frame You can create a segment anywhere between the beginning and the end of a media file The In Frame does not have to precede the Out Frame To skip a segment in the center of a media file set the In Frame to a point following the Example 2 Out Frame The file will play from the In F Frame to the end and then start at the begin i Out Frame In Frame I ning of the file and play to the Out Frame When you create a segment in this way you may notice a jump as playback skips from the end of the file to the beginning Start DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 63 CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Defining Content Defining Playback After selecting and defining a media file segment to display on a 3 D object you can choose from several Playback Modes and assign a Playback Speed Playback Mode A Playback Mode parameter for each 3 D image allows several playback options Default DMX Value 0 Plays forward in a continuous loop DMX inti pier omadiooan Plays the media segment from In Frame setting to Out Frame y ping setting looping continuously Plays the media segment from In Frame setting to Out Frame Play forward once setting and holds on the last frame 2 i Plays the media segment from In
193. ensity Controls 45 transparent Scheme bandwidth Transparency Raindrop simulates raindrops falling on a liquid Controls size Seeds random Controls surface speed generator raindrop rate EA nasi RGB Scale varies the color values Scale varies the color values Red Green Bue Color to Alpha varies the transparency level of an Red to alpha Green to alpha Blue to alpha image s component color values Color to Alpha Inverted varies the transparency level of the inverse of an image s component color values Inverted Red to Inverted Green Inverted Blue to to alpha alpha Texture Mixing crossfades between the current Crossfade l Selects Source Selects Source image and another graphic object texture Taaie Effect Level Between Textures 59 Image Scale and Rotate Scales and rotates the ceee made Selects Rotation Sets Rotation media file texture applied to a 3 D object g Angle Speed 53 Film Roll scrolls the media file texture horizontally Horizontal roll Vertical roll Scales or vertically speed speed Image Pixelate divides the image into rectangles using Sets amount of Scales 54 ee i i i Scales vertically the center pixel color of each box as its color Pixelation horizontally 55 Faux LED divides the image into a grid of circles to LED size Spacing Color mimic an LED wall peaking kl Faux Tile divides the image into square tiles peaking Fuzzifier creates a multi image blurring effect Horizontal distance
194. er parameter to DMX 4 HES Atmospheric Set the Media File parameter to a DMX value of 17 17 Dust_Explosion Set Effect Mode 1 parameter for GRAPHIC OBJECT 3 to DMX 28 to select the Chromakey Coarse effect This will make the black background transparent Set the X Scale parameter to a real world value of 7 4x DMX 33 Set the Y Scale parameter to a real world value of 6 4x DMX 46 Set the X Position parameter to a value of 20 pixels DMX 33177 Set the Y Position parameter to a value of 8 pixels DMX 33932 Record this look into your lighting console DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 49 CHAPTER 5 Tutorials Lesson 4 3 D Objects Rotation Wobbulation and Glow In this lesson you will learn how to put your chosen content on a 3D object and add rotation glow and wobbulation ie Be sure that the MOTION Dimmer parameter for DL 2 fixtures the GLOBAL Intensity parameter and GRAPHIC OBJECT 1 Opacity parameter are all set to 100 DMX 255 Define Graphic Object 2 5 Set the Effect Mode 1 to DMX 73 Glow Set the Effect 1 Modifier 1 parameter to 93 Set the Media File parameter to DMX 3 This will Change the Object parameter to DMX 23 Outside With GRAPHIC OBJ ECT 1 selected set the Media Folder parameter to DMX 1 HES Core call up a black jpg Cube DMX 236 Set the Effect 1 Modifier 2 parameter to 25 DMX 63 Note Modifier channels for
195. erpendicular to each other Off is the default setting Timeout Options The Dimmer Iris closes when it stops receiving DMX data for a designated time interval The Data Loss Timeout I ris option sets the DMX data loss time interval as Long 5 minutes or Short 5 seconds Short is the default setting After 10 minutes of no data the fixture will shut down the projector and the motion functions Fans remain on to maintain the temperature control for the internal graphics engine Display Options The Display field lets you adjust the black level of the Menu display with the following options e On is the factory default e Preview displays the most recent media change of any Graphic function when opacity gt 0 The DL 2 Menu screen displays content in both partial and full screen The Preview function can be enabled from the DL 2 menu the CMA as well as remotely via DMX When Preview is enabled a partial full color video is shown on the LCD display along with the folder file and DMX information If there is no change of content on any Graphic Function it will automatically switch to full screen mode within 12 seconds The Preview function always shows the latest selected content without any modification of effects Preview mode displays movies and still images only S video and internal camera input will not be displayed in the Preview mode The Preview function uses substancial memory and should be turned off when rendering
196. es 290 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Appendix D DL 2 Specifications Fixture mechanical electrical optical and component specifications are listed Mechanical Fixture Dimensions 595mm x 598mm x 911mm 23 4in x 23 6in x 35 9in Weight 53 5 kg 118 Ibs Road Case Dimensions 699mm x 724mm x 1080mm 27 5in x 28 5in x 42 5in Weight Fixture Roadcase 107 5kg 237Ibs 509 mm 20 1 in 746 mm 29 4 in SOA ri 23 4 in 236 mm f Oo0o0O00 amp OO f QQQ D 9 3 In 517 mm ae 20 4 in DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 291 APPENDIX D DL 2 Specifications Electrical Specifications WARNING AN Class 1 equipment This equipment must be earthed I nput ratings 100 120V 7 0A maximum 50 60Hz 200 240V 3 5A 50 60Hz Power factor 0 94 Fuse Power supply output fuse 5A 250V slow blow only Lamp 300W UHP Light Output 5500 ANSI lumens Rated Lamp Life 1500 hours Projector Specifications Model Christie Digital LX 55 Aspect ratio 4 3 native Brightness uniformity 90 Contrast ratio 1000 1 full on full off Display technology 1 3 LCD w MLA 3 panels Panel resolution 1024 x 768 dots Zoom Lens Throw Ratio 1 8 2 4 1 Camera Module Specification Construction Super HAD CCD sensor technology Lens 18x Optical Zoom Horizontal view angle 48 2 8 Auto focus Range 29mm 800mm Picture Elements 380K pixels 768 H x 582 V Minimum working distance 29mm WIDE end 800m
197. es on page 205 or the fixture s menu system see Set_ Fixture Screen on page 30 WARNING AN Removing power directly without the shutdown sequence built into the two recommended procedures can severely reduce fixture reliability Placing Fixture in Road Case Before shipping the DL 2 fixture lock its pan and tilt position so the fixture does not move during transit NENA o 2 L l To lock the fixture 1 Orient the projector head pan position as Tilt 2 Shown for packing in the road case and secure Lock with the pan lock located on the yoke base ee A Note This is the only pan position that locks 2 Move the tilt lock peg to the upper left locked position 3 Gently move the projector head and yoke to verify that both pan and tilt positions are locked iaz b e in place A DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 19 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration 4 Place the DL 2 fixture in its 1 Place Top over the fixture first provided road case for shipping 20 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter 3 The DL 2 Menu System You can use the DL 2 fixture s Menu System to configure the fixture review diagnostic feedback and view content information The DL 2 fixture use a 5 LCD screen to display the onboard menu system Navigation and select buttons let you move to different tab levels and options displayed on the Menu screen Note You can also access most Menu options thr
198. esce 290 Managing Custom Content ssssssss22222222222u22222u2202u20uunuuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 290 Appendix D DL 2 Specifications Fixture mechanical electrical optical and component specifications are listed MechaniCal sssssssssusescsssetsniasetesstearcenssenneecavadeasiesanssecuee esas tuawaeiusuueneaweasusaceaueEs 291 Electrical SPeECifiCAtiONS iiicenivencedeetevasaddeesieddsduassanceunsbansuas unas eeseutecueeeneae elas 292 Projector Specifications s s rarer A AAAA 292 Camera Module Specification ccccccessecescceeeenessseeeeeeneoeeeesaneneeeesesaaeeeeeeeauass 292 Environmental SpecificationS ssssssssnssuunus2u202unuuuunnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 292 Cable and Connector SpecificationS sssssss22222 222 2202u220u22202u220u2u00unnnnnnn 293 Video Connectors aereoa aE ENEE aS EENE 293 P rip eral Netw rk Connectorsi Veustetiaiwic chute rrin aa aa a cede oetae kh 293 DMX and RS 483 Projector LINK crosiera a a oaa 293 Appendix E Safety I nformation Appendice E Importantes Informations Sur La S curit cccce cece ee ee eee es 296 Anhang E Wichtige Hinweise Fur Ihre Sicherheit ccccceeeeeeeeee ee eee eae eee enas 297 Ap ndice E Informaci n Importante De Seguridad cccccceesee scenes eeeeeees 298 Appendice E Importanti Informazioni Di Sicurezza oo cece cece eee eens 299 Vigtig SIKKEFMEASINIORMANON cc ne isa ica aaa en EREE eoataciea Eaa Ea 299 DL 2 Digital Light
199. et the longitude angle Make viewpoint adjustments 10 On the Graphic Effect Mode channel set to Spherical Control 1 DMX 253 use Modifier 1 to move the center of the grid to the center of the output marked by the double circles around the crossed lines This adjusts vertical offset to accommodate the projector s position The default value assumes a viewpoint straight on to the equator Modifier 2 adjusts the sphere s offset to compensate for projector head tilt NOTE After completing a rough adjustment you will use these two modifier channels for the fine tuning DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 135 CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect 11 Use Modifier 3 to adjust the vertical size of the output stretching and compressing it to adjust for the size of the sphere keeping the vertical size of the grid filling the output without clipping the image Correct for the flat to round surface distortions 12 On the Graphic Effect Mode channel set to Spherical Control 2 DMX 254 use the associated Modifier 3 to compress the grid edges adjusting the bend in horizontal grid lines This adjustment should not be used to fill the projector output horizontally Instead it Should be used in conjunction with the Spherical Mapping Global Effect Modifier 1 to control the longitude angle of the projected image Global Effect Modifier 1 should be maintained close to the theoretical longitude angle 13 Use Modif
200. eter 255 a DMX value of 1 3 for the Global Control parameter provides an alternate font color to enhance statistics readability 64 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Defining Content Playback Speed The Playback Speed parameter controls the speed of the selected media file s Playback Mode The Playback Speed for a media file is used whenever the Playback Mode Parameter s DMX value is assigned to any Play Forward option Default DMX Value 128 Playback at normal speed A DMX value of 0 or 128 50 plays back media files at the original recorded speed DMX values from 1 to 127 plays the media file back at an increasing speed from slowest to the original recorded speed Values from 129 255 set playback speed from faster than normal to fastest speed DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 65 CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Defining Content 66 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter 8 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale You can independently control each Graphic Object s rotation direction and speed along with it s position and scale in x y and z axis directions The parameters described in this chapter are set for each Graphic Object you define Parameters for composite image rotation position and global scale are described in Chapter 11 Global Functions Note The suggested default DMX values given for each parameter are recommended to build libraries that provide the ea
201. eter to 13 pixels DMX 32493 and the X Position parameter to 30 pixels DMX 33372 52 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Apply a Global Solarize Effect 16 Select your GLOBAL fixture and change the 17 Adjust Global Viewpoint Mode 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 CHAPTER 5 Tutorials Effect Mode 1 parameter to DMX 10 solarize 2 and observe how the global effect changes all three of the graphic objects at one time Record this look into your console To select the Perspective View with Spherical Coordinates centered on Graphic Object 2 set the Global Viewpoint Mode parameter to sphr lyr 2 DMX 2 Change the Viewpoint Position X parameter to 316 and see how this changes the viewpoint position of all three graphic objects at one time Change the value of the Viewpoint Mode parameter to ortho lyr 2 DMX 10 for an Orthogonal View using Cartesian Coordinates Set Viewpoint Position X parameter to 39 DMX 36337 Set Viewpoint Position Y parameter to 101 DMX 41947 Set Viewpoint Position Z parameter to 116 DMX 43354 Record this into your console and play back the cues you have created to observe how viewpoint changes the perspective on the graphic objects DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 53 CHAPTER 5 Tutorials 54 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter 6 Graphics Engine Overview DL 2 fixture s and Axon Media servers both use the same graphi
202. f transparent area Mod2 center of transparent area Mod3 transparency mode Pixel Twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center Mod3 direction and amount of twist Picture in Picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture center Mod3 subpicture size Magnifying Lens Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y 36 lens center Mod3 lens size Magnifying Lens 2 Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center Mod3 lens size Cartoon Edge Mod1 Edge Color Mod2 Contrast Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity Color DeConverge Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left Horizontal Mirror Mod1 mirror center Mod2 and Mods not used RGB Swap to BGR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to RBG 42 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GRB 43 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 254 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Modi Color Scheme selection Mod2 Zero intensity point in color scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme Mod2 Intensity bandwidth Mod3 Transparency level Raindrop effect Mod1 controls size speed Mod2 seeds the random number generator and Mod3 46 controls raindrop rate Scale RGB Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green Mod3 scale blue Maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and 47 Mod sets overall color r
203. fect Mode parameter DMX value 48 Tiling varies the number of times a media file is applied as a texture to an object This effect works best on objects that have an undisrupted surface area Modifier 1 Adjusts the size and number of tiles along the x axis A value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint size a single image to 0 maximum image magnification Values above the midpoint increase number of images displayed to 255 100 maximum Modifier 2 Adjusts the size and number of tiles along the x axis A value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint size a single image to 0 maximum image magni fication Values above the midpoint increase number of images displayed to 255 100 maximum Modifier 3 Not Used NOTE The Tiling effect implemented on Effect 1 overrides tiling on Effect 2 Transparent Wipes M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 33 Transparent wipes let you open one graphic to reveal another graphic behind it You can select Rectangle wipes from from six options and the centerline 1 42 center out horizontally of the effect Modifier 1 Adjusts the area of Rectangle wipes from the wipe from the smallest at a 43 84 edges out horizontally value of O to the largest at a value i j Wipes from center out of 255 100 85 126 vertically Modifier 2 Selects the center of a wipe effect s separation Wipes from edges out Modifier 3 Selects the wipe 127 170
204. ffect Mode 2 on page 108 and specific effect options listed 0 255 0 100 alphabetically in Chapter 13 Global Effect 1 The type of adjustment and the default value Modifier 2 depends on the particular effect 0 255 0 100 NA NA For more about Modifier parameter functionality 26 5 Modifier 3 236 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Off no effects selection CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB Reduces color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY adds to all pixels Increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY adds to non black pixels Increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow RGB Add all pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add 2 all pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add non black pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to BRG Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 1 If color value lt DMX value invert color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 2 If color value gt DMX invert color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue _h Global Solarize 3 If color value lt DMX set color to 0 Effect 2 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 4 If color value gt DMX set color to 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 gt blue 2 DotP and Resample Mod1 Mod2 and Mod3 13 control resampling Color Cycle DMX v
205. fier 1 0 Modifier 2 128 Modifier 3 64 4 In the Global Control channel select the on screen statistics for the spherical mapping option DMX value 252 Use the Global Control Modifier to select text color for easier viewing 5 Select the 4 x 3 Flat Plane option in the 3 D Object channel DMX 1 6 Select the HES Set Up and Test option in the Media Folder channel DMX 39 and Test Grid jpg in the File Folder DMX 9 At this point you should be viewing the two projected grids with Statistics displayed If you do not see an output re check that all Modifier parameters are set to their default values TIP Before you begin other adjustment physically view the grid from along the centerline of the fixture The centerline of the grid should align with the center of the sphere You can easily adjust any variation using the Pan channel The object is to align the vertical lines of the guide with the vertical axis of the sphere Adjust output positioning on the sphere 7 Use Global Effect Modifier 2 adjust the latitude angle You can view the Latitude top and Latitude bottom statistics to see the degrees of spread or from the equator 8 Use Global Effect Modifiers 3 to move the output up or down to the part of the sphere you want to cover The Latitude top and Latitude bottom statistics show you the center of adjustment in degrees or from the equator 9 Adjust the Global Effect Modifier 1 to s
206. filter e The internal projector has two filters Check the following warnings and cautions before servicing the filters WARNINGS Disconnect power before servicing Replace fuses with the specified type and rating only z Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to 130 C t 266 F Allow the fixture to cool before handling 212 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting CAUTION AN Do not operate a projector with Air Filter removed Dust may accumulate on LCD Panel and Projection Mirror degrading projection quality Do not put small parts into Air Intake Vents It may result in malfunction of a projector Cleaning the Base Housing Filter This filter is located between the handles on the fan side of the box You can pull it off the fixture and clean it with soap and water Allow it to dry thoroughly before replacing Replacing the Fixture Filter A hepa filter and a prefilter are located inside the fixture head and should be replaced when ever they become discolored from particulates or when the Menu displays FILTER Service ERROR or FILTER Service WARN Access the fixture filters 1 Lock the fixture head in the 70 tilt position 2 Unlatch and remove the rear bezel assembly 3 Loosen the two quarter turn screws on the top Tilt loc Top cover Loosen Quarter turn screws to remove top cover Pre filter Filter bracket Filter
207. function Note Display Black Level can also be controlled by the DL 2 menu system see Set Tab on page 30 or remotely through the configuration options in the CMA see Editing Configuration Values on page 205 22 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Navigating the Menu Select any tab by pressing the corresponding button to the side of the display The tab label will be bold when selected Use the left and right arrow keys on the navigation buttons to move to a different screen Press the Tab Select button corresponding to the screen you want and press the lt Enter gt button to select CJ Use the multidirection button to move left right up down to a field The currently selected field will be i highlighted J Press the lt Enter gt button to go into edit mode the EPE EEE ME selected field and a list box will open to show all the _ options for that field Tab Escape ene Select Use the Up Down keys to scroll through the items in Buttons the list highlighting the current item Pressing the Navigation lt Enter gt button again stores the selection and buttons closes the list To edit a field press the lt Enter gt button to pop open the drop down list where up down selects the item Pressing lt Enter gt again commits the change Pressing the lt Escape gt button instead of lt Enter gt leaves the original setting and closes the list To return to a high tab level press the
208. g Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed 15 10 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue All or Nothing Color value greater than Mod value color 255 else color 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solid Color RGB 16 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Invert Modi red to inverted red Mod2 green to 17 inverted green Mod3 blue to inverted blue RGB Invert amp Swap to GBR Modi red to inverted green Mod2 green to 18 inverted blue Mod3 blue to inverted red RGB Invert amp Swap to BRG Modi red to inverted blue Mod2 green to 19 inverted red Mod3 blue to inverted green Edge Detect Color Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 D4 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold 266 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Texture Ripple Horizontal 99 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Vertical 23 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular EJ Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Chromakey Fine Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Medium Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Coarse Select key color using 28 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using 29
209. g period of time However it isn t true Both musical compositions and records require licensing and payment What about High End Systems material included with the DL 2 fixture Do I have to clear that No High End Systems has worked to provide clearance for the content that is provided with the DL 2 fixture Any materials you received directly from HES with the purchase of a new DL 2 fixture have already been properly licensed for your use in shows and presentations That does not however license you to sell this content separately from DL 2 fixture Also please be sure that any new content you obtain from outside sources is properly cleared for public presentation This sounds really difficult and don t know how to do it What do I do to properly license copyrighted material You need to consult with a Content Clearing House or with a properly licensed Intellectual Property Attorney Content clearinghouses are typically less expensive to work with and have well established industry relations that can result in cost savings High End Systems uses and highly recommends Suzy Vaughan Associates Suzy Vaughan Associates has 20 years of experience in clearing clips talent and music for use in any number of venues Their clients include Barbara Streisand Michael Jackson and The Emmys among other shows You can obtain more information about Suzy Vaughan Associates services by calling 818 988 5599 or emailing info suzyvaughan com Their websi
210. gainst module aligning the center top standoff Place contact screw s in the appropriate position Note When installing a replacement driver board ona module Gasket always place a star washer between an address screw and the pad on the logic board to ensure good electrical contact Ip Mi Ji not force the gasket over the lamp cover located on the back of the projector Ensure that the fixture is on a solid surface Select Calibrate Motors through the Test Home menu screen and leave the fixture undisturbed for 10 minutes while calibration occurs Replacing Fixture Base Driver Board To replace motor driver board located in the fixture base housing L Disconnect power to the fixture If the fixture has been operating allow the fixture to cool before handling Loosen the two phillips head screws on menu display panel side of the Box cover Loosen screws on menu display panel and gently open away from the fixture leaving the harness cabling attached The driver board for pan functions and fans is located directly behind the display 5 After detaching all cabling pull board out and replace CAUTI ON The fixture will not function correctly if contact screws are missing from driver boards Reattach cables 7 Replace the side panel and top cover Make sure you align the assembly properly when inserting damage to the fixture can result from improper alignment
211. ge s color components cycle through RGB black and white When no Red Green or Blue is added image fades from full white to normal image to black When RGB CMY is added the image fades from the RGB value to the image with color added Modifier 1 ncreases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Color DeConverge M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 39 This effect option separates the different color components of an image and offsets them from the original image position Modifier 1 Moves the image s red component up from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum distance from original position Modifier 2 Moves the image s green component down and right from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 3 Moves the image s blue component down and left from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Colorize Gray Scale M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 44 This option maps a selected pixel intensity to a selected color scheme A variety of color schemes simulate effects like thermography This is especially effective effect when applied to input from the internal camera
212. ge 35 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 25 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Main Sub Tabs Fields Info Temp Box Reset Displays fixture base housing s current minimum and maximum temperature Pressing Reset reverts all settings to the current temperature Head Reset Displays current minimum and maximum temperature of fixture head Pressing Reset reverts all settings to the current fixture head temperature Version Software Version Displays currently installed versions Firmware Version Windows XPe Pan Encoder Version Tilt Encoder Version Displays Internal ID IP Address Displays fixture s IP address Displays a currently assigned Fixture Name Lamp Monitors lamp fixture and filter hours of operation Hours Selecting Reset reverts hours to 0 Fixture Hours Status Motion Shutdown Displays system activity and errors For more Projector Status information see Chapter 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Lamp Status Projector Air Filter Motion All Resets all mechanical functions to default positions Motion Resets Pan and Tilt functions to default positions Pan Tilt Motion Iris Zoom Focus Resets mechanical functions for Iris Zoom and Focus to default positions Self Test Self Test Pan Tilt Self Test Iris N a oom Off mechanical functionality Selecting On starts a test sequence for Pan and Tilt mechanical functionality Selecting On starts a test sequence for Iris mechanical functionality Self
213. gramming Notes Play Speed You can adjust the Play Speed using the encoder wheel on the Beam parameter of the Graphic fixture type Additionally you can press enable and select Media Speed Default On to revert to the default speed setting DMX 128 Then if you touch the encoder again the previous play speed will be recalled Mask Strobe A unique function of the Wholehog 3 library system allows the creation of a special encoder type Flying Pig Systems has created a parameter called mask strobe in the Global fixture type When this is adjusted it will automatically change the DMX value of the mask select channel to the appropriate value and adjust the DMX channel for the strobe speed This will override the Mask Edge parameter as per the DL2 DMX Protocol Play Modes Opacity Using the Graphic fixture type press the Mode button to view the play mode options By default all modes trigger normally If available per the DL2 DMX protocol you can select Media Trigger Opacity to change to the Play Modes that trigger when Opacity is greater than zero To restore to normal triggering select Media Trigger Normal CMY The Global and Graphic fixture types both contain CMY controls for the Effect Mode modifier channels The default for Effect Mode 1 is set to CMY1 as well For some effect options the CMY parameters will not adjust color but will adjust the effect per the DL 2 DMX protocol You can find a description of C
214. graphic object shadow size size opacity Zoom Blur Zooms into a position on the image with a mult image blurring effect Chroma Shift Shifts the red blue and green Horizontal Vertical Scale component colors shift shift DL 2 Digital Light User Manual oo Horizontal Vertical position Zoom in position center center and out Ea D 59 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects DMX Effect Mode Value Name Definition a Introduces a random vibration cd a Scale effect shake shake Fade from Slats Vertical renders the image in offset vertical Number _ Vertical Normal to slats of Slats Displacement Slats Fade from Slats Horizontal renders the image in offset Number Horizontal Normale horizontal slats of Slats Displacement Slats Sinewave Circular with y axis wobbulation 66 Sinewave Circular with zaxis wobbulaton Amplitude Frequency Phase 68 Sinewave Horizontal wiih y axis wobbulaton Amplitude Frequency Phase 69 Sinewave Horizontal wih zaxis wobbulation Amplitude Frequenoy Phase 73 Glow apples gow eteco 3Dobeet Red Green ue 74 Glow Color Cycle Red cycle Green cycle Blue cycle speed speed speed l Fade f Downward Vertical Streaks pulls the image Vertical Start Streak atonal i down Position Angle Streak Sample Number of Filter Gaussian Curve 81 Gaussian Blur Distance Passes Shape l Sample Number of Filter Scale Sharpen Sharpen enhances image detail Distance Passes
215. ground Color selects background color Red Green Bue 132 Background Color Cycle sequences the Red Speed Green Speed Blue Speed background color Fading creates Edge Fade profiles Selects Adjusts Selects 133 Mode Profile Source Collage Generator allows a fixture to display 134 a portion of the output to create multi fixture panorama displays Curved Surface Vertical Convex Cylinder corrects Adjusts Sets Vertical 135 er l Not Used shape projecting on curved surface Correction Center Curved Surface Vertical Concave Cylinder Adjusts Sets Vertical 136 ne Not Used corrects shape projecting on curved surface Correction Center 137 Curved Surface Vertical Inside Corner corrects Adjusts Sets Vertical Sets Horizontal shape projecting on curved surface Correction Center Center 138 Curved Surface Vertical Outside Corner corrects Adjusts Sets Vertical Sets Horizontal shape projecting on curved surface Correction Center Center 139 Curved Surface Outside Sphere corrects shape Adjusts Sets Vertical Sets Horizontal projecting on a sphere s outside surface Correction Center Center 140 Curved Surface Inside Sphere corrects shape Adjusts Sets Vertical Sets Horizontal projecting on a sphere s inside surface Correction Center Center 144 Enhanced Collage Provides higher resolution for Selects Array Selects array Adjusts Edge large Collage arrays larger than 4 x 4 Type cell to display blending 142 Spherical Mapping Outside map
216. hannels 1 419 16 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 2 setup and Configuration Setup Configuration Using the CMA The Content Management Application running on your computer and linked to DL 2 fixtures via Ethernet lets you remotely configure the DL 2 fixtures For more information on the CMA see Chapter 16 Content Management Application CMA on page 187 To view configuration information for a individual server click on All Servers in the left pane of the CMA window and select the to view all the servers on the fixture network Select a server in the left pane to view its configuration information in the right pane HighEnd DL2 Management Client File Configuration Help a HIGH END SYSTEMS Et b All Servers 4 servers IP Address a g MrT 10 0 1 220 Art Net Subnet H 4 User Media 10 0 1 220 Art Net Universe h E User Objects 10 0 1 220 Disk Free Space H H D Stock Media 10 0 1 220 DM Protocol 1 1 1 1 1 10 0 1 220 Fisture ID Refresh 5 Stock Objects 1 10 0 1 220 DMS Source SS DMa Axon 1 1 10 0 1 220 Start Channel 001 O00CHAECOEA 1 1 10 0 1 220 Data Loss Timeout hi Reset Long Matt s DL 2 1 1 10 0 1 220 Display Invert On Been B All Configuration 1 10 0 1 220 Display Level On 1 10 0 1 220 Fixture Defaults Off 1 10 0 1 220 Fixture Hours 151 To select a DMX Source type Edit Congar 1 Scroll down the Configuration list in the right pane and UIGH END
217. he image at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 3 You can use the Modifier 3 parameter to adjust the image s horizontal center when you re projecting onto a sphere an inside or an outside corner A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Adjusting toward 0 moves the horizontal center toward the left edge of the image Values above the midrange move the horizontal center right toward the edge of the image at a DMX value of 255 100 NOTE Modifier 3 is not used when projecting onto an inside or outside cylinder DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 155 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Downward Vertical Streaks M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 80 This option lets you convert a portion of the image into vertical streaks You can also rotate the angle of the streak and fade from the original image to the image with the streak option applied Modifier 1 At a DMX value of 0 there is no effect Increasing the DMX value sets the length of the streak portion of the image from the bottom up to 255 100 to the full image converted to streaks Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint move the edge of the streaked portion of the image clockwise as you approach 0 90 Values above the midpoint move the edge of the streaked portion of the image counterclockwise as you approach 90 at a value of 255 100 Modifier 3 When Modifier 1 has a
218. he link When two devices on the same DMX universe have overlapping channel ranges one or both devices will be disabled or behave erratically Axon media servers and DL 2 fixtures both provide individual and composite graphical control Protocol DMX Channel Range for up to three 3 D Objects You can control the Selection Axon DL2 footprint of the fixture on a DMX link by Standard Protocol choosing to implement only the number of 3 D objects your application requires Select the Dual Protocol protocol level in the fixture s onboard menu Single Protocol system for DL 2 fixtures or through the CMA for either DL 2 fixtures or Axon media servers see Viewing Fixture Configuration Values on page 205 The tables that follow list the parameters included in each level of protocol for both the DL 2 fixture and the Axon media server 38 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 4 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start DL 2 Protocol Levels an 58 96 134 3 D Object File 60 98 136 Mediale 6 Focus 28 Global Effect 2 Modi er1 63 101 139 O trane Global Effect 2 Modifier 2 66 104 142 Play speed 33 Mask Edge e 108 144 Edge Fade Top 69 107 145 Visualmode e0 me 156 ais rota 86 124 162 52 54 co 83 ewpoint Position Z pei Ea 127 465 poen 04 Scale X 53 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 39 CHAPTER 4 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start Axon Protoc
219. high fog density such as directly in front of a fog machine or mineral oil hazer e Minimize the exposure of DL 2 to both glycol fog and mineral oil Filter Warnings The DL 2 menu system displays a series of filter status and warnings to alert you when a filter needs to be cleaned or replaced These appear in a large format that can be viewed from a distance The Info_ Status menu screen will include a detailed message concerning the large format Error Warning filter message The following messages will give you information regarding the status of the DL 2 filter system e Filter Missing Error A filter not present or is not installed properly Check and insert missing filter e Filter Service Warning The filter system is not operating optimally and needs to be serviced soon e Filter Service Error The filter system needs immediate servicing Replace Filter For these and other Error Warning messages see Status Message Menu Display on page 219 Cleaning and Replacing Filters The DL 2 system utilizes multiple filters to protect the internal media server and projector e A filter is located on the side of the fixture base housing attached with velcro for easy removal and cleaning Check this filter often for dust or debris that can be caused when using the DL 2 in environments with confetti or pyrotechnics This filter is washable but must be completely dry before re installing e The Fixture head contains both a hepa filter and a pre
220. hroma Shift Mod1 horizontal shift Mod2 vertical shift Mod3 Scale ShakeNBake Mod1 horizontal shake Mod2 vertical shake Mod3 Scale Slats Vertical Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade Slats Horizontal Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade AN aN aN QI O1 QI Sz Ol Ol QI gt amp A A 00 N O O1 gt oo NO O 00 N O O1 D gt O1 Z gt Ol O1 oO O 6 2 63 Reserved Defaults to effect mode 0 64 79 DL2 Digital Light User Manual 239 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Downward Vertical Streaks Mod1 start position Mod2 streak angle Mod3 fade Gaussian Blur Modi sample distance Mod2 81 filter pass number Mod3 curve shape Sharpen Mod1 sample distance Mod2 filter 82 pass number Mod3 sharpen scale Reserved Defaults to effect mode 0 83 127 Mask color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Edge fade color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Mask color and Edge fade color Mod1 red 130 Mod2 green Mod3 blue Background Color Mod1 red Mod2 green 131 Mod3 blue Background Color Cycle Mod1 red speed 132 Mod2 green speed Mod3 blue speed Framing Mod1 Mode Mod2 Profile 133 Mod3 Source Collage Mod1 grid style selection Mod2 grid portion displayed Mod3 edge blend adjustment Corrects output for vertical convex cylinder Mod1 correction Mod2 adjusts vertical
221. ied Effects Graphic Object 3 texture including its first three applied Effects 10 11 0 255 Color selected as a look up value from an internal gradient Graphic Object 3 texture including its first applied Effect 166 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Pan and Scan M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 255 This option Zooms into a still image and then by changing position you can pan across the image horizontally and vertically It only functions on image sizes greater than 1024 x 1024 in at least one direction Modifier 1 Adjusts the horizontal pan position from O left edge to 255 100 right edge of the image The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Modifier 2 Adjusts the vertical pan position from 0 bottom edge to 255 100 top edge of the image The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Modifier 3 The default DMX value is 0 no zoom Increasing the value increases the zoom into the image to a maximum at a value of 255 100 The total Zoom range is proportional to the image size Tip Although you can apply this effect in several different modes global graphic and visual the modifier channel adjustments will only function if there is enough room left on the image to move In most cases the first application of this effect option will be the only one to have an effect NOTE This option fs also available as a Visu
222. ier 1 and Modifier 2 to adjust the amount of bend up or down in the horizontal lines of the grid Modifier 1 controls amount of correction Modifier 2 controls where the center of correction occurs 14 If the spherical mapping effect is being used in conjunction with the Collage Generator effect select the Enhanced Collage Generator option DMX 141 in the other Global Effect channel now Set the appropriate grid size and grid elements selected with the internal collage alignment grid enabled Go back through steps 1 through 11 Remember that pan and tilt adjustments are also available when using the DL 2 fixture Now you have a rough adjustment of the spherical mapping effect From this point finely adjust all the parameters until you bring the output to the desired shape When fine tuning Spherical Mapping adjustments remember the following e The Graphic Object effect 253 Modifiers 1 and 2 have a major influence on the shape of the vertical lines e The Spherical Mapping Global Effect modifiers can be used to provide fine control of the shape of the vertical lines but should be within several degrees of the expected latitude and longitude values e The Graphic Object effect 253 Modifiers 1 and 2 are used to finely adjust the vertical bend in horizontal lines Spherical Mapping Tips e If the fixtures are arranged symmetrically around the sphere the adjustment made to the various control Modifiers of Global and Graphic Spherical M
223. ific effect options listed alphabetically in Chapter 13 DL2 Digital Light User Manual 269 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Graphic 2 Rotation Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 0 24 object rotation around X axis fast to slow 16382 Continuous rotation stop 16383 2 X axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around X 16384 26 49 Rotation axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 32768 50 vertical flip 0 rotation around X axis 32768 oo 16 bit Rotates the object clockwise around X axis in Ka 5174 74 adjustment steps to 720 degrees absolute Ka 51 74 Continuous rotation stop 49152 52 75 Continuous variable speed clockwise object erd JEA 76 100 rotation around X axis slow to fast 65535 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 24 object rotation around Y axis fast to slow Ha Continuous rotation stop 16383 25 Y axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around Y ae 26 49 49 Rotation axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute over 26 49 32768 50 horizontal flip 0 rotation around Y axis 32768 50 16 bit Rotates the object clockwise around Y axis in 32769 51 74 adjustment steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151 Continuous rotation stop rotation Continuous rotation stop 49152 52 75 Continuous variable speed clockwise object oe ae 76 100 rotation around Y axis slow to fast 65535 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 0 24 object rotation around Z axis fast to slo
224. ifier 1 Adjusts color polarization level The higher the value the more color detail will be removed Modifier 2 Adjust the image contrast from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum contrast Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 6 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 6 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100 ae f A Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 6 Visual Mode Modifier DMX value 190 75 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100 96 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Push to Red Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 3 This option reduces colors in the selected image to all Red values Modifier 1 Fades from original color at a DMX value O to a range of red tones at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Adjusts color saturation from no adjustment at a DMX value 0 to full saturation at a value of 255 100 Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 3 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 3 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 3 Visual Mode Modifier DMX value 190 75 Visual Mode Modifier2 DMX value 255 100 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 97 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Push to Sepia Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 2 This option converts all color in the image to sepia tones Modifier 1 Fades from original color at a DMX value 0 to a range of sepia shades
225. imple lessons get you started programming DL 2 and Axon media servers with a Wholehog 3 or other DMX console The DL 2 fixture should be patched on your console as three to five fixture types The MOTION fixture type controls the actual moving yoke projector and Digital Eye camera The GLOBAL fixture type controls the global graphic engine functions such as intensity keystone correction viewpoint etc The GRAPHIC fixture type controls each graphic object s functions such as Opacity object media etc The DL 2 and Axon protocol allows for 1 2 or 3 graphic objects Axon Media servers do not use the MOTION fixture type and require 1 GLOBAL and 1 3 GRAPHIC fixture types NOTE The MOTION fixture Dimmer GLOBAL fixture Intensity and GRAPHIC fixture Opacity parameters all have to be greater than zero before the image you create becomes visible In the first three Lessons the 3 D object component of the Graphic Objects is left at the default DMX value of 1 flat plane Note that all DMX values given in the examples are in decimal units If you have trouble producing the effects in these tutorials and you are not working with a Wholehog 3 console library the default settings may be incorrect All recommended default values are listed in DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Fixture Set up DL 2e Media Servers If you are using a DL 2 fixture you will first need to set up the head and the projector If you are using the Axon Media Server thi
226. ing DMX Values to User Content ccccccccce ee eeeeee eee e sees eeseeneeeeeeeeeenaaas 195 Assigning DMX Values Automatically cccccceeccccecee eee eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesusunanees 195 Editing User Content DMX Values cc cccccce cece cece eee eee seen eeeeseeeaeeeeteneeeaaas 195 vald BMX VIES Ierice srr terobati EE E ORTEN 195 Moving User Content Files and Folders ccc cccece cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseneeneeeeees 196 Downloading Content from a Media Server to Your Local Drive 665 197 Uploading Content from Your Local Drive to a Media Server ccccceeeee eens 197 Moving Files Between Fixtures cccccccccceeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeneeeeeeggaees 198 Archiving User Content siccciccicccincdicinssin we vane cnucendenanssavedenereusscedeeweucedecedecaress 199 Using Local Archives to Prepare Content Offline ccc cece ce cece ee eeeeeee eee eeeeees 199 Creating a LOCal AFCHIVG prunieri ans ianea EN T EEEE ecru he 199 For GMA Running WindOWS XP ssis oraaa Ea aa A TE NE E a 199 ForGMA RUAAING MacOS TOA sirieni aa o A 200 Creating Content Backup Archive sssssersserrrerrrsrrrsrrensrrrerrrerrrerrresrrrsrrrsrrrne 200 Deploying a Content Archive cccccccccee cece eee E E E E E AE a A 200 Cloning Us r Content iccssecseeccsuieciisevieciiiedvasisiedesecesevesscasecendtecesedsenceenssensves 201 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual X X Deleting Content s sisien ea aaa
227. ing and or editing NOTE Read Only options are for information display only and cannot be edited If you select or type in an option that is invalid the OK button will be grayed out and not selectable DL 2 Configuration Options masw o e T DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 207 CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA Configuration Item Configuration Value Options Closes iris when system stops receiving DMX data Data Loss Timeout Iris Long 5 minute delay Short 5 second delay Disk Free Space Read only On manually inverts display Off reverts to default display orientation Auto automatically inverts display when fixture is turned more than 90 degrees vertically Display Invert Off turns off display Touching any button turns it back on Dim lowers the brightness level Bright full brightness level Preview displays currently selected content Display Level Standard 170 channel footprint DMX Protocol Dual 132 channels Single 94 channels DMX Source DMX512 or Art Net On selects manual focus Enable Focus Override Off resets to DMX control On selects manual zoom Enable Zoom Override Off resets to DMX control Fixture Defaults On restores fixture defaults Off displays whenever defaults has been changed Fixture Hours Reset Pressing Reset restores fixture hours to 0 Allows fixture name of up to 26 characters Press Home to start automatic mechanical reset for Iris Zoom and Home Iris Zoo
228. ing details e Whether the content is a User Media file folder a Stock Media file folder or a 3D Object e The associated Folder Name for media files e The Folder DMX value for media files e The File Name for media or object files e The File DMX value for media or object files To view the DMX summary table 1 Select All Servers from the left pane of the Management Client Window 2 Select a Server in the right pane 3 Select DMX Summary from the drop down menu or the right click popup list 4 Press the Create Table button on the screen to build the summary table Upgrading Software Upgrade Management allows the user to upgrade the media server application Mac OS 10 4 or the XP Embedded operating system and firmware on the system Verifying Software Versions Running the latest version of both the CMA Client software and the media server software will ensure that you will get the best performance from the fixtures on your network To verify the CMA version select About from the Help drop down menu The media server software version is displayed for each server on the network in the All Servers view 202 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA NOTE Although running different versions of software on servers is not prohibited it is highly recommended that all servers on the network be running the same software version HighEnd DL Management Client File Servers Help Test HIGH END
229. ing the DL 2 Fixture to a Wholehog Console c ccc eceeee eee cece eeeeeeeeeees 18 VIEWING OUMU Aineina rasan ateeiaiates ea eetecasadent a series 18 SHUTTING Down the FIX Cure sennoina a aaneen Aaa RRINE 19 Recommended Shutdown Options ssssssesrresrresrresrrrerrrerrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrerne 19 PlacINOFIXtUre IM ROAA CASE arreda a a r emeaaeuacctons 19 Chapter 3 The DL 2 Menu System You can use the DL 2 fixture s Menu System to configure the fixture review diagnostic feedback and view content information Menu Panel Components ssssssss2u225 22222222u2220uu2200uu220u2000uunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 21 LCD Display Adjustment BUTTONS resrtareniae a N N A E NAA 22 ECD Display POWEr BUON eriseeria EEE E 22 LCD Display Menu Options and Selection sssssrssrrsrserererrrrrrrrrrrerrrerrrsrrrsrre 22 Navigating the MON Ul isicseccsnsstieciaccncccriwtuistiuinteterieiindesstunncncnteansaewtaenateeteaeeasuc 23 DL 2 Men Options siiiuiiaccdavauanswacneawawawannannmwadlecciiieccuuauisuiiiie scan aia AEEA aiai 24 Menu Scr en Descriptions siriocicsserernccctaviccdesezansceaesenciadbedscadasieauedacstusuecesaeeass 27 DMX TAD ossei EEE EAEE ede demure AETA 27 DMX COMOL TEO Aai eraan A E O EE 27 DMX Protocol aD srrrisrni eae A E ENA A S E aus tnteaaret 28 DMX Protocol MOLION Seen samoco na AE E A 28 DMX Protocol Glopal SChEGMN arimani ror E E E E AN 28 DMX Protocol OD SCLESIS sinsenicieenimaininnarenternipamswnise
230. ingle image to scales to an increasing number of multiple images similar to tiling Modifier 2 Sets the texture rotation angle A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values above the midpoint rotate clockwise 255 100 maximum rotation Values below the midpoint rotate counterclockwise to O maximum rotation Modifier 3 Sets the rotation speed from a DMX value of 0 static to 255 100 maximum rotation speed Tip Try combining image rotate and object rotate for a multiple effect DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 163 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Magnifying Lens M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 36 This option applies spherical overlay that magnifies a portion of the texture to create a virtual convex lens effect over a portion of the image You can adjust the size of the lens and move it over different areas of the image Modifier 1 Controls the horizontal position of the lens centerpoint from O left edge to 255 100 right edge of output Modifier 2 Controls the vertical position of the lens centerpoint from O top edge to 255 100 bottom edge of output Modifier 3 Controls the size of the lens from O smallest to 255 100 largest Magnifying Lens 2 M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 37 This option applies spherical overlay that magnifies a portion of the texture to create a doubled virtual convex lens over a portion of the im
231. ions e Refresh the screen e Clone Content replicates the server s user content to one or more other servers on the network see page 201 e Delete Content removes all the user content from the server e Create Content Archive lets you back up all the server s user content to a compressed file See page 200 e Deploy Content Archive restores user content to the server from the backup see page 200 e Upgrade Software allows you to upgrade fixture software For more information on upgrade options see Upgrading Software on page 202 Client Window Content Organization The media server on each fixture has a Mac OS file system that holds the movies y All Servers 1 server MyAxonServer 1 User Media J User Objects gt Stock Media Stock Objects Configuration All Configuration images and 3 D objects that make up the content that the server uses These files folders and their DMX values are collectively known as the Content on the media server The Client Management Window organizes and identifies content by source preloaded Stock content or custom User content and type Media files or 3D Object files Windows OS Se All Servers 4 servers os FS User Content User Objects Stock Content AES Stock Objects H one 1 H three 3 brian 5 a All Configuration NOTE Tree structure differs slightly on the two platform versions
232. is unaffected by other graphic effects apply it as the last effect option selected for an image NOTE This option is also available as a Visual Mode adjusted with 2 Modifier parameters see Drop Shadow on page 84 Edge Detect Black and White M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 21 This option displays only the edges of image components Edges appear white everything else is black Modifier 1 Adjusts horizontal edge search size from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 2 Adjusts vertical edge search size from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 3 Adjusts comparison edge threshold from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 157 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Edge Detect Color M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 20 This option displays only the edges of image components with their color values Modifier 1 Adjusts horizontal edge search size from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 2 Adjusts vertical edge search size from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 3 Adjusts comparison edge threshold from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Faux LED M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 55 This options divides the image into a grid of circles to mimic an LE
233. ito con una protezione da sovraccarico massima di 20 ampere Avvertenza Per Prevenire Le Scosse Elettriche 1 Da non montare sopra una superficie infiammabile 2 Mantenere l apparecchio a un minimo di 1 0 metri 3 28 piedi di distanza dai materiali combustibili Sostituire i fusibili usando soltanto quelli del tipo e della taratura adatta 4 Mantenere una distanza minima di 1 0 metri 3 28 piedi dagli oggetti accesi Questa apparecchiatura e da collegarsi ad un circuito con una protezione da sovraccarico massima di 20 ampere Vigtig Sikkerhedsinformation Advarsel Beskyttelse mod elektrisk chock VIGTIGT LEDEREN MED GUL GROEN ISOLATION MAA KUN TILSLUTTES KLEMME MAERKET DO ELLER L DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 299 APPENDIX E Safety Information 300 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual
234. ization e Mounting system provides multiple orientation options DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 1 Product Overview Related Products and Optional Accessories The following table lists related products and accessories available for the DL 2 fixture For more information contact your High End Systems dealer distributor See Contacting High End Systems on page ii 4 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter e Setup and Configuration Hardware setup includes mounting connecting to power and Ethernet and DMX linking Software setup includes launching the Content Management Application CMA and configuring the fixture for DMX control Hardware Setup The following steps make up the hardware setup for DL 2 fixtures 1 Unpack DL 2 Media Server N Install power cord cap if necessary for your location W Mount the fixture upright or suspended from a standard truss A Connect to an Ethernet network linked to a computer or an Axon media server running CMA software and any other DL 2 or Axon units you wish to control via the CMA 5 Connect the fixture to a DMX controller via DMX cabling or an Art Net box on the Ethernet network 6 Connect the fixture to power Unpacking the Fixture Your DL 2 fixture ships in a road case specifically designed to protect the product during transport When unpacking inspect both the outside of the fixture and the projector for physical damage to components
235. l another graphic positioned behind it wipe wipe options Pixel Twist swirls a portion of the texture Caer Vener Direction and amount of twist 3 Picture in picture duplicates the texture and X subpicture X subpicture Subpicture size overlays it on the original center center 36 Magny ing oe appie apnenca ovenay inal X lens center Y lens center Lens size magnifies a portion of the texture 37 Magnifying pale 2 app 16S SPNErgALOvVENay ihal X lens center Y lens center Lens size magnifies a portion of the texture Cartoon Edge creates variable outline around Enhances Edge detection 38 Reduces Color ee picture elements Contrast sensitivity 39 28 29 30 31 2 3 oo 34 5 Color DeConverge separates image color Moves Green Moves Blue g p g Moves Red components and offsets them from original position component up d component component own and right down and left Horizontal Mirror creates a mirror effect Not Used Not Used RGB Swap to BGR redefines component color Red to Blue Blue to Red RGB Swap to RBG redefines component color Ra Green to Blue Blue to Green RGB Swap to GRB redefines component color Red to Green Green to Red DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 109 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Effect Mode Ee DMX a 44 Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Selects Color Selects zero Controls Scheme intensity point fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity Selects Color Defines Int
236. le protocol simplifies DL 2 control to a Channel single graphic object and uses 94 channels a Fixture ID DMX Source defines the source of DMX data and has two options e DMX512 Data is transmitted over standard DMX cables e Art Net Data is transmitted over Ethernet cables using the Art Net protocol Set the number of DMX Universes and DL 2 Ethernet Subnetworks containing this fixture from 0 16 Scroll through the numbers 1 512 in the Start Channel field to set a valid start channel for the protocol you have chosen e Standard protocol 1 343 e Dual Protocol 1 381 e Single Protocol 1 419 For more on choosing valid DL 2 start channels see Determining a DMX Start Channel on page 38 You can assign each fixture a unique Fixture ID number from 1 255 This allows the fixture to be identified on the DL 2 ethernet fixture link for tasks like synchronizing playback between DL 2 fixtures and uploading custom content with the Content Management Application CMA You can manually set this number in the menu or through the CMA see Fixture Identification on page 190 For more on DL 2 Ethernet fixture links see Setting up an Ethernet Fixture Link on page 11 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 27 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System DMX_Protocol Tab This tab displays the current DMX value being received from a console for each parameter after any conversion such as internal self test or protocol conversion The DMX parameters
237. lected size displays in the upper right corner of the grid pattern A DMX value of 0 No collage DMX Values of 64 255 are reserved and default to No collage DMX Array DMX Array DMX Array DMX Array DMX Array DMX Array Value W x H Value W x H Value W x H Value W x H Value W x H Value W x H 5x4 33 6x5 a 7x5 54 8x4 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 131 CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect The Modifier 2 channel selects which cell of the grid a particular DL2 will display DMX values 0 up to 63 are used to step through grid pattern you selected with the Modifier 1 channel As you dial through Modifier 2 you will see each cell in the grid highlight in a as it is selected DMX values of 64 255 default to the upper left corner of the grid Array Size 8 x 5 Selected cell The Modifier 3 channel lets you manually or automatically control the blended edges of the adjacent projections You can also display grid overlays that show your Modifier 1 and Modifier 2 channel selections 0 127 Adjusts blending 128 160 Displays rectangular area with no blending 161 191 Displays rectangular area with no blending covering full projector output 132 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect Collage Setup Example Here s a typical scenario for setting up a 2 x 2 central panorama collage effect NOTE If you
238. librate pan and tilt motors missteps or loses position by selecting Calibrate Motors button in the Test_Home menu screen Powers on but no image e Is the mechanical iris closed If so check the setting for the Dimmer parameter see Dimmer on page 179 e Did you recently change inputs About 10 seconds are required for an input change to take effect However you might have selected an invalid input using projector controls Try setting the projector back its defaults see Reset Screen on page 35 Or use DMX to exit the projector menu system see Projector Control on page 181 e Make sure a video input is physically attached to the input you selected and that the video feed is active 222 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Problem SSSCSCSCSCSCSC SS aH Image is blurry out of focus e Check the Fixture filters see page 213 or colors are unnatural Is the DL 2 mounted less than 1 4 meters to an object If so move the DL 2 farther away to enable it to focus properly e Make sure the DL 2 is not operating near fog machines hazers or mineral oil hazers see Fog Machine Warning on page 8 e Clean the front window see Cleaning or Replacing the Front Window on page 216 e Check the lamp see the projector manual shipped with the DL 2 e If you re using the projector s on screen programming system you can override zoom and focus using the menu system see Projector Con
239. llage Generator Effect on page 123 154 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Use these adjustments in conjunction with Keystone parameters and Ratio parameters to refine the output shape on any of these surfaces Curved Vertical Convex Cylinder opening toward projector Curved Vertical Concave Cylinder opening away from projector After you have selected the surface the Modifier parameters operate as described below TIP Modifier channels for Effect Mode 1 are labeled as CMY in the Wholehog 3 system so you can also make use of the color picker HSI and other Wholehog 3 functions Use the CMY parameter controls to adjust the three Effect Mode 1 Modifier parameters for both the Global and Graphic fixture types The default for Effect Mode 1 is set to CMY1 as well Effect Mode 2 Modifier channels are labeled Mod 1 Mod 2 and Mod 3 Modifier 1 Modifier 1 lets you adjust the amount of correc tion vertically A value of 0 no adjustment The correction increases as you increase value to maximum at 255 100 SSEERREs Modifier 2 In situations where you are projecting from any angle other than perpendicular to the surface you can use the Modifier 2 to adjust the vertical center of the image A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Adjusting toward 0 moves the vertical center down to the bottom of the image Values above the midrange move the vertical center up to the top of t
240. loaded DL 2 media folder HES Atmospheric 3 Set the Media File Parameter to DMX 23 This selects a water movie 23 Moonlite_Waves Add the DL 2 logo as Graphic Object 2 4 Select GRAPHIC OBJ ECT 2 fixture and change the Opacity parameter to 100 DMX 255 Graphic Object 1 o 5 Set the Media Folder parameter to 1 and set the Media File parameter to DMX 01 This selects the preloaded DL 2 logo as content Define Graphic Object 3 1 Select GRAPHIC OBJECT 3 fixture and set the Opacity to DMX 255 100 2 Change the Media Folder parameter to DMX 7 A Luna Blue collection 3 Change the Media File parameter to DMX 2 2 Blurs_Streaks_34 HIGH END SYSTEMS Create Crossfade Cues 4 Select GRAPHIC OBJECT 2 and 3 fixtures and set the Opacity parameter on both to DMX 0 The only content that is now showing is GRAPHIC OBJECT 1 5 Record this look to your console as cue 1 6 Set the of GRAPHIC OBJECT 3 Opacity parameter to DMX 255 100 and record this into your lighting console as cue 2 7 Now set the Opacity parameter of GRAPHIC OBJECT 3 Graphic Object 3 to DMX 0 and the Opacity of GRAPHIC OBJECT 2 to DMX 255 100 Record this as cue 3 8 Now clear out all information in your console s programmer and play through the cues you just recorded You will see GRAPHIC OBJECT 1 crossfade to GRAPHIC OBJECT 3 and then crossfade to GRAPHIC OBJECT 2 46 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CH
241. lter Missing Error FILTER MISSING ERROR Filter not present Insert Filter See Cleaning and Service Filter Error Filter needs Servicing Replace Replacing Filters on Serie FlerEror puen sence ennon Fe eR Replacin See Cleaning and Filter Service Warning FILTER SERVICE WARN Eiter needs Servicing Replace Replacing Filters on Filter SOON eee l The Lamp has exceeded it s Projector Lamp Life LAMP LIFE ERROR rated life and must be replaced Error NON See Replacing the Lamp on page 215 Projector Lamp Life The Lamp is nearing the end of i LAMP LIFE WARN 7 Warning it s rated life Replace soon Check the Comm cable connections at serial port on the Projector The system is unable to back of projector and Communication Error Poco near communicate to the Projector at the fixture head card Make sure lamp is struck Projector temperature has Projector Temperature PROJ TEMP ERROR exceeded operational range and Fail Error has Aia eA g Cool fixture and then restrike the lamp Projector Temperature Projector is over recommended l PROJ TEMP WARN Warning operating temperature USB port The PC failed to initialize USB Communication Erdi USB INIT ERROR communication with the box Contact High End card Systems Customer USB failed to pass the hardware Support USB port Security Error USB SECURE ERROR security test System State LEDs Five labeled LEDs on the display panel indicate the following system
242. lue invert color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 2 If color value gt DMX invert color NA Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 3 If color value lt DMX set color to 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 4 If color value gt DMX set color to 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod gt blue DotP and Resample Mod1 Mod2 and Mod3 13 control resampling Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue All or nothing Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue If color som gt mod value color 255 else color Solid color RGB aod Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Invert Mod1 red to inverted red Mod2 green to inverted green Mods blue to inverted blue RGB Invert amp Swap to GBR Mod1 red to inverted green Mod2 green to inverted blue Mod3 blue to inverted red 232 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol RGB Invert amp Swap to BRG Mod1 red to inverted blue Mod2 green to inverted red Mods blue to inverted green Edge Detect Color Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold Texture Ripple Horizontal Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Vertical Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Cir
243. lues on page 205 Test_Self Test Screen You can check the mechanical functionality of Pan Tilt Iris Zoom and Focus assemblies on the fixture head Select On to start the test sequence The Video Test option opens the mechanical iris and provides test patterns to check the projection functionality This lets you verify that the graphics engine is operating without having to use a DMX controller E Self Test Pan Tilt of i __ 2 Self Test Zoom Dff a _ Self Test Focus Off Video Test Test Pattern 1 Off y DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 33 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Info Tab The Info tab displays current fixture information such as hardware and software versions sensor status total fixture and lamp hours DMX errors and Status values You can also reset Lamp and Fixture hours For more detailed information see Supported Info_Hours The Hours tab displays the Lamp and Fixture 3 e hours of operation since the last reset Lamp Hours 476 ee Selecting the Reset button resets the amp Fixture Hours 704 _ Reset associated hours to zero Lamp hours should amp be reset to zero whenever a lamp is replaced zi Fixture Hours information is often used to z track fixture hours for a show or a rental period The number field displays the number a of hours the fixture has been operating since g the last reset Pre
244. m TELE end Environmental Specifications Maximum ambient temperature Ta 35 C 95 F 292 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX D DL 2 Specifications Cable and Connector Specifications Video Connectors e RGBHV BNC x 5 e VGA DB15 e S Video mini DIN Peripheral Network Connectors e 2 USB ports DMX and RS 485 Projector Link Cables Belden 9841 or equivalent meets specifications for EIA RS 485 applications with the following characteristics e Two 4 conductor twisted pairs plus a shield e Maximum capacitance between conductors 30 pF ft e Maximum capacitance between conductor and shield 55 pF ft e Maximum resistance 20 Ohm 100 ft e Nominal impedance 100 140 Ohm Grounding lug inside XLR shell Common cable shield positive positive Conmeen negative data true data true cable shield data negative negative complement data complement data ald positive complement positive data true data ie complement Male XLR Connector Female XLR Connector This data line is not used by the fixture but allows data to pass through the fixture Connectors Two 5 pin male and female XLR connectors e Pin 1 Ground e Pin 2 Data e Pin 3 Data e Pin 4 Secondary data e Pin 5 Secondary data Terminator 5 pin male XLR connector with a 120 Ohm terminating resistor fitted between pins 2 and 3 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 293 APPENDIX D DL 2 Specifications 294
245. m Focus Focus function Press Home to start automatic mechanical reset for all motion Home Motion functions Press Home to start automatic mechanical reset for Pan and Tilt Home Pan Tilt ania Lamp Hours Reset Pressing Reset restores Lamp hours to 0 208 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA On Inverts pan positioning Off reverts to default position l On swaps pan and tilt positioning PANIE SWap Off reverts to default positioning On access the Projector menu Projector Control Menu Off reverts to DL 2 menu Projector Defaults Selecting this option automatically restores projector defaults External accepts input from an external video source Internal accepts input from the graphics engine Projector Input Selection Yes allows projector input to be switched via DMX by DMX No disables projector input switching via DMX Always Onturns lamp on when the fixture is plugged in Projector Startup Mode Manual turns lamp on only if the Lamp is set to On DMX turns lamp on if DMX is present Projector Zoom Value Upgrade Content Press Upgrade to upgrade stock content Restore Settings Press Restore to revert to factory fixture settings Self Test Focus On tests focus mechanical functionality Off stops self test Self Test Iris On tests Iris mechanical functionality Off stops self test Self Test Pan Tilt On tests Pan and Tilt mechanical functionality Off stops self test Self Test Video Pattern Sel
246. m profiles that vary in gradient density or pattern When Modifier 1 DMX value 2 this Modifier is not used Modifier 3 When Modifier 1 DMX Value 1 this parameter determines how to use the rendered Graphic Object content as a texture for the frame The image below shows an examples of Ba tn Onn Wes Graphic Object 1 texture without applied Effects 0 1 20 Graphic Object 3 texture without applied Effects DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 161 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Fuzzifier M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 57 This option offsets multiple images of the media file texture to blur the image and lets you to control image scaling at the same time Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 0 no adjustment Increasing DMX values blur the image horizontally to a maximum at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 0 no adjustment Increasing DMX values blur the image vertically to a maximum at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Adjusts the decay level of the blurred edge from 0 no adjustment to maximum full decay at 255 NOTE This option is also available as a Visual Mode adjusted with 2 Modifier parameters see Fuzzifier on page 89 Gaussian Blur M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 81 More precise than Fuzzifier option this option creates a true blur effect utilizing a gaussian curve Modifiers
247. media server has a file system that holds the a Windows OS movies images and 3 D objects that make up the content that the All Servers 4 servers server uses These files folders and their associated DMX values i a are collectively known as the Content on the media server User Content The Content Management Application CMA organizes and identifies C User Objects content by source preloaded Stock content or custom User content i stock Lontent and type Media files or 3 D Object files For more information on i a Ubjects one using the CMA to view and manage content see Content three 3 Management Application CMA on page 187 brian 5 D All Configuration Selecting Content Three Parameters control Content selection To define an image you have to set DMX values greater than O for the 3 D Object Media Folder and Media File parameters The selected media file will be mapped onto the selected 3 D object Axon media servers To output an image from a media server 1 Open the mechanical iris on the projector by setting it s Dimmer parameter to full 100 2 Set the Global Intensity parameter to full 100 3 Set the Object opacity to full 100 4 Adjust the Object Media Folder and Media File parameters to greater than zero When programming with Wholehog software the Media Folder and Object parameters default to 1 so choosing any Media File DMX value from 1 35 will display a media loop from the HE
248. media servers on the fixture link in a sortable table Click in the column heading to sort by that column s values A symbol appears in the sort by column heading Editing Configuration Values The Configuration table viewed in the right pane of the CMA window contains the following information for one or all servers e The server ID from 1 255 The IP Address e The configuration item name e The current option setting A right click on a item will popup a list including Refresh Edit or Reset You can also double click an item to bring up the edit dialog box The Edit dialog box lets you choose between available options for that item HighEnd DL2 Management Client miel ES File Configuration Help HIGH END SYSTEMS All Servers 4 servers IP Address Mame ___ Vatu _ __al B mT 10 0 1 220 Art Net Subnet User Media 10 0 1 220 Art Net Universe 10 0 1 220 Disk Free Space d 5 O User Objects 1 B Stock Media iA sa mee a Secale D ks ture eres ap any ee 1 10 0 1 220 DMX Source DMX512 Eg Axon 1 1 10 0 1 220 Start Channel 001 H OOOCFIAECDBA 1 1 10 0 1 220 Data Loss Timeout Ir Preset Long B Matt s DL 2 1 1 1001 22N Nisnlau Invert Mn DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 205 CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA Configuration Example Before programming a DL 2 fixture or the Axon media server from a DMX512 console you need to e Identify the DMX
249. motely using the Content Management Application Setup Configuration Using the Menu System All setup parameters are located on the DL2 x 3 fixture s menu DMX Screen For detailed Source information on using the DL 2 Menu System z2 9 ystem DMX512 see Chapter 3 The DL 2 Menu System on page gt 11 3 Protocol Start 2 Standard DMX Source defines the source of DMX data 4 Chan nel and has two options Fixture ID DMX512 Data is transmitted over standard DMX cables Rst Test Info Art Net Data is transmitted over 1 i Ethernet cables using the Art Net protocol Set the number of DMX Universes and DL 2 Ethernet Subnetworks containing this fixture from 0 16 Choose from three DMX Protocol types Standard protocol requires 170 channels and enables all DL 2 parameters for direct DMX control Dual protocol reduces the fixture footprint to 132 channels by implementing only two graphic objects Single protocol simplifies DL 2 control to a single graphic object and uses 94 channels Select a valid Start Channel in the Start Channel field by using the up and down arrows on the multidirectional button to step through the numbers 1 512 For more information on choosing valid DL 2 DMX Start Channels see Determining a DMX Start Channel on page 38 Standard protocol valid start channel 1 343 Dual protocol valid start channel 1 381 Single protocol valid start c
250. ms have been compressed and optimized for reliable and smooth playback from Axon and DL 2 media servers Each file and folder has an associated DMX value These values are fixed for Stock Content but must be assigned for all user created content See the Assigning DMX Values to User Content on page 195 for more information HighEnd DL Management Chent File Media Files Help HIGH END SYSTEMS ae All Servers 1 server ED Susan 21 000 Amorphous Long Trailer mv2 m ma 1 38 929 KB 10 5 2004 3 01 04 PM a gt User Content 2 001 Blue 7O0s rnve2 m2v rity 2 13 033 KB 10 5 2004 3 00 34 PM gt o E 002 Bright Psych my2 m2v mov 3 296KB 10 5 2004 3 00 22 PM ais or iit E 003 Max Psych mnv2 m2v mv 4 6 060 KB 10 5 2004 3 00 00 PM pera 004 Ripple Melt 3 mv2 m2v my 5 B146KB 10 5 2004 2 59 54 PM poi pollo Glass 2 FEV NNF Canara Hinna mu ms reve E 1 CAKE 10RNNA 2 5QAC Dhd 3D Object Files Object files are the 3 D object component files used to build a graphic image DL 2 and Axon protocol supports a combined total of 255 object files displayed in Stock Objects and User Objects folders As with Stock Media files the Stock Objects have a fixed DMX value and cannot be edited A User created object file must be assigned a unique DMX value between 150 255 Viewing Server Configuration Data Selecting an individual server from the list in the left pane displays all the configuration values for that server in the right pane Sele
251. n Mod3 blue Effect Solarize if color value lt DMX set color to 0 11 Mode 1 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 4 if color value gt DMX set color to 0 12 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue DotP and Resample 13 Mod1 Mod2 and Mods control resampling Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue All or Nothing Color value greater than Mod value color 255 else color 0 15 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solid Color RGB Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Invert Mod1 red to inverted red Mod2 green to inverted green Mod3 blue to inverted blue RGB Invert amp Swap to GBR Modi red to inverted green Mod2 green to inverted blue Mod3 blue to inverted red RGB Invert amp Swap to BRG Modi red to inverted blue Mod2 green to inverted red Mod3 blue to inverted green Edge Detect Color Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold 262 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Texture Ripple Horizontal 29 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Vertical 23 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Chromakey Fine Select key colo
252. n create strong highlights Modifier 1 ncreases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Red color values below the threshold are converted to cyan Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Blue color values below the threshold are converted to magenta Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Green color values below the threshold are converted to yellow Solid Color RGB M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 16 Solid Color RGB removes the media file texture and allows you to color mix the 3 D object to one solid color Modifier 1 ncreases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation 152 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Geometric Effect Options Cartoon Edge M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 38 Outlines the edges of image components to create a cartoon effect Modifier 1 Adjusts Color reduction from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum Modifier 2 Adjusts contrast enhancement from 0 no adjustmen
253. nd DMX value 65535 IR Illuminator The DL 2 fixture is equipped with an illuminator that can output infrared IR light The IR Illuminator parameter controls both the IR illuminator output and the camera s infrared sensing option DMX values O 63 turn the illuminator off and set the camera to sense the visible light spectrum From DMX values 64 127 the illuminator remains off but the camera s Auto IR function is ON detecting ambient infrared light in the environment The rest of the DMX range turns the Auto adjustment off and adjusts the amount of IR illuminator output from FULL DMX value 128 to OFF DMX value 255 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 185 CHAPTER 15 Live Video Input and Control Camera Shutter The DL 2 fixture s internal camera can create slow motion and choppy frame effects using the camera shutter options The Camera Shutter parameter controls the camera shutter providing six steps of frame rate control from 1 to 30 frames second DMX values 0 63 set Full Auto Exposure and is the suggested default option White Balance Mode The White Balance Mode parameter adjusts for variation in what is perceived as White in different light conditions The Auto White Balance mode computes the white balance value output using color information from the entire image It outputs the proper value using the color temperature on a range of values from 3000 to 7500K and is the suggested default setting Other
254. nd Deleting User Content Files and Folders on page 194 e DMX is the currently assigned DMX value for the folder This value can be auto assigned and edited for User content See Editing User Content DMX Values on page 195 e File Count of files in this collection e Date the folder was last modified Viewing Files Selecting the actual media folder reveals its contents e Name of the file This value is editable for User content See Naming and Deleting User Content Files and Folders on page 194 e Type indicates the file format extension e DMX is the currently assigned DMX value for the folder This value can be auto assigned and edited for User content See Assigning DMX Values to User Content on page 195 e Size of file in kilobytes e Date the file was last modified DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 193 CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA You can access several options for displaying files in the right pane through the drop down menu or by right clicking in the right pane when files are being displayed HighEnd DL Management Client File Media Files Help hens b Ey Details Refresh Thumbnails 5 rnall Thumbnails Medium Thumbnails Large All Servers 1 0 Susan 2 H User Content 4 User Objects EME Stock Content i AS Amorphous _Digi_ om oo2 O03 004 005 SD_Arcticlghtmy SO Batviews mv SD Beemshmv2 SD Bubbles myv2 5D Cloud00 mw 006 O08 014 5
255. nd pans across a still image Horizontal position Vertical position and Scan 7 Horizontal Vertical fuzz 18 Fuzzitier Creates a multi image blurring effect distance 19 Drop Creates a scalable drop shadow Horizontal Vertical shadow Shadow behind the graphic object shadow size size DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 81 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Visual Mode Options Color to B W Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 7 Begins with a white screen and fades to the original image in black and white All color is converted Modifier 1 Transitions the image from full white at a DMX value of 0 to black and white at a value of 128 50 Increasing values above 50 reveals more of the image in black and white to complete at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Not Used Content Optimization Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 1 Stock content provided by High End Systems on your DL 2 fixture has been optimized for lighting applications This option lets you make the same adjustments for User content or camera input Content Optimization adjusts the image Black level and Contrast to optimize the projected image for your performance environment You can use it to easily modify the black level and contrast for a specific application The Exposure Control option provides an alternative algorithm for accomplishing this optimization Modifier 1 Adjusts black level from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 full black Modifier
256. ndividual server set Modifier 2 DMX value between 1 63 to select the grid cell that media server will project 7 Use Position Keystone and Ratio parameters to align the projections of the individual media servers in such a way that there is some overlap between the separate portions of the image This overlap is needed for blending adjustment 8 Set Modifier 3 to a DMX value between 192 and 203 to define a hard edge for alignment Readjust Position Keystone and Ratio parameters to bring collage elements into good alignment 9 Increase the Modifier 3 DMX value 203 207 to blend the overlap between the outputs Readjust Position Keystone and Ratio parameters to bring collage elements to fine tune alignment 10 On all the media servers you are configuring set the Global Effect Mode Modifier 3 parameter to a DMX value to the default range of 0 127 with edge blending or between 128 159 without edge blending to put the media server output into their cropped collaged state The choice between the two values will depend on your preference for aligning the images DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 133 CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect Execute the panorama collage 1 Create a setup cue that identifies the content media file and folder sets the Play Mode parameter to Pause and Rewind to In Frame DMX 5 and the Opacity to 0 for the same graphic object on all units you are configuring for the panorama 2 Fo
257. nect the male XLR connector of a DMX Data cable to the controller s DMX Data Out connector 10 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration 2 Connect the Data cable s female XLR connector to the Data In connector of the first or next fixture on the DMX link 3 Continue linking the remaining fixtures connecting a cable from the Data Out connector of each fixture to the Data In connector of the next fixture on the link 4 Connect a male terminator to the Data Out connector of the last fixture in the link see Powering On the Fixture on page 12 For information on obtaining a terminator see Related Products and Optional Accessories on page 4 You can construct a terminator according to the specifications listed in Cable and Connector Specifications on page 293 Setting up an Ethernet Fixture Link DL 2 fixtures utilize an Ethernet network to synchronize playback and access the CMA software for remote content management and fixture configuration If you are using a DMX console and other automated lighting products compatible with Art Net this network can also serve as the link for DMX control Linking Configurations The following diagrams show configuration options for linking DL 2 fixtures to each other via Ethernet for accessing the Content Management Application running on your computer and to the DMX512 link for DMX desk control DMX Universe 2 WholeHog 3 Console ee Ses DMX 512 Data Cabling
258. nente Contre Les I ncendies Cet appareil de connection au circuit comporte une protection contre les surcharges de 20 A Mise En Garde Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Chocs Electriques L Si cet quipement est livr sans prise de cable veuillez connecter la prise de cable correcte selon le code suivant e marron phase e bleu neutre e vert jaune terre 2 D brancher le courant avant de changer les lampes ou d effectuer des r parations 3 Cet quipement doit tre uniquement utilis dans des endroits secs Ne pas l exposer la pluie ou l humidit 4 l int rieur de l quipement il n y a pas de pi ces remplacables par l utilisateur Confiez l entretien un personnel qualifi 5 Equipement de Classe I Cet quipement doit tre mis la terre 296 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX E Safety Information Anhang Wichtige Hinweise F r Ihre Sicherheit Warnung Zum Schutz Vor Brandgefahr Dieses Ger t darf nur an eine Zweigleitung mit einem Uberlastungsschutz von h chstens 20 A angeschlossen werden Warnung Zum Schutz Gegen Gef hrliche K rperstr me L Wenn dieses Ger t ohne einen Netzkabelstecker erhalten wurde ist der entsprechende Netzkabelstecker entsprechend dem folgenden Code anzubringen e Braun Unter Spannung stehend e Blau Neutral e Grun Gelb Erde Vor dem Austauschen von Lampen oder vor Wartungsarbeiten stets den Netzstecker ziehen Diese Ger t
259. nerator Effect Array Maximum Recommended DL 2 W x H Image Resolution W x H Units 5x8 832 W x 866 H 976 W x 795 H 912 W x 844H 976 W x 976 H Note You can find othe configurations and more information on sizing and compressing media to use with the Collage Generator at the High End Systems website www highend com 130 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect Configuring the Collage Generator There are two Collage Generator options in either Global Effect Mode parameter The original Collage Generator option selected with a Global Effect DMX value 134 should only be used with legacy shows The Enhanced Collage Generator provides cleaner images and better edge blending The Enhanced Collage Generator option eliminates heavy aliasing of objects and fuzzy images on larger grids You can select the Enhanced Collage Generator option in the Global Effect Mode with a DMX value 141 The images below illustrate the difference in the projected image of a cell from an 8 x 5 grid The image on the left shows the projector using the original Collage Generator option and the image on the right shows the improved resolution obtained with the Enhanced Collage Generator option Adjusting the Collage Array The three Global Effects Mode Modifier parameters operate as follows The Modifier 1 parameter selects which type of collage array to use from DMX Values 1 63 The se
260. ng designs High End Systems cannot make specific mounting recommendations Consider the following procedure as a suggested guideline only Fog Machine Warning Like all high quality video projection units the DL 2 fixture must be kept protected from excessive amounts of glycol fog mineral oil and smoke DL 2 incorporates a two stage air filtering system with additional washable prefilters in the head and base housing to reduce these risks to a minimum However you must follow these guidelines to ensure continued operation of the fixture e Air filters both fixture and projector should be checked and cleaned on a regular basis When used in a closed or fixed environment where fog or haze is used we recommend at least a weekly check e Do not situate DL 2 in areas of high fog density such as directly in front of a fog machine or mineral oil hazer e Minimize the exposure of DL 2 to both glycol fog and mineral oil DL 2 is a highly complex and sensitive electro optical device and care and thought in how it is used rigged and positioned will maximize the product s life and your investment Note Failure to follow these guidelines and carry out regular maintenance will void the warranty 8 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Mounting the Fixture Upright CAUTION Do not mount the fixture upright without the four rubber feet attached To mount the fixture upright place the fixture on a st
261. ng requires careful positioning of the DL 2 units or Axon controlled projectors you are using Units should be mounted at equal angles from each other and the Same distance from the sphere Mounting units at the same height will minimize the tilt angle adjustments you will need to make Mapping Two Outputs to a Sphere The following example describing mapping two outputs on a sphere with each covering half of the surface For best results make each adjustment to both outputs as you follow the example After you ve completed the following steps you can more easily transfer the DMX values to the outputs for other cells of the collage 134 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect Select a Global Effect and two Graphic Effects to control Spherical Mapping 1 Set Global Effect 1 or Global Effect 2 channel to a DMX value 142 to select the Spherical Mapping option Set the three associated Global Effect Modifiers to their default values Modifier 1 0 Modifier 2 0 Modifier 3 128 2 Select the Spherical Mapping Control 1 option DMX 253 in any available Graphic Effect Mode channel Set the three associated Effect Modifiers to their default DMX values Modifier 1 128 Modifier 2 128 Modifier 3 64 3 Select the Spherical Mapping Control 2 option DMX value 254 on any available Graphic Effect Mode channel Set all associated Effect Modifiers to their default DMX values Modi
262. ng the Internal Projector S Menu a sssssssssssssrrssresrrrrerrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrererere 182 Chapter 15 Live Video Input and Control The DL 2 graphics engine can receive video from an external source or its own integrated digital video camera equipped with an infared illuminator to provide a direct digital video feed option LiVe VIDEO SOUPCES sanesna iene 183 internal Camela eende e EEA ARAN 183 Otner VIdEO SOUPEES Aa a e ea ETA 183 Live Video Connection OptionS sssssssss222222 522 2 22222220u220uu220uuuuununnnnnnnnnnnnn 184 Configuring the Video I nput SOUrcCe ssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 184 Sending the Camera Feed to Camera Out ssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 185 Controlling the Internal Camera Nput s sssnsssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 185 Camera Zooni aee ann tet te nsps gcse memenenenn es met ecb boumis aa e EE 185 Came ra FOCUS Sick u ate tune S es tenne cedar wat nee Ves a a ine cacuhe a T EAN 185 ea BUC ieatla ys oe guns mer air tee nea nna rr Terie ie ancti aay Serer vere rir ener ys ten nee re ne ent eC 185 Cameras NUTO sesiet ne anes inane tite teenie aaah aeteheiPiatiase 186 xviii DL 2 Digital Light User Manual White Balance MOGs teieers carne c await card aelshiadnasendaautaunea caael eae batensann ened 186 OHIENTALION cscs AAA A E EA eho TET AE walt nile ES tessa 186 EEE WE a E A E A E A E A e AE E EAEE A E A E A 186 Chapter 16 Content
263. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 108 Global Control iiscnsisncnscerencnas ccanenbute vane iiuew ous htstien cats iuesceewansncmnncnuasareuieesaaeauTis 112 Sshutdowhvand RESSE OPHONS susccneseiseesainntctecudeeaiternaraceeastecsaneeanennte ea 112 FOUF In ORE CONEFOIODUG Ming casas otis A E Magan a nein tama ely at secomadutos 112 On Screen Fraime Statisties ora eissi dice nebwe ne E daaevedonee ential eeaeee 113 Masking Control cer a E a 114 Mask Shape Select and Strobing ssssssssrsssrsssrrsrrresrresrrrsrrrerrrsrrrerrrerrrerrrene 114 Mask Shapes areir aaa T TE TA TE NT 114 SEroDINO Mask SHAPES nere E AEE E E REE A 114 Mics EE A E E E ET E T T EAE E A EE TE ee SS 115 Mask EQQG ade arae ere eE E E a a LAENA 116 OOM Edde Fade inin T TR AE E E A E E raa 117 Keystone Correction Parameters sssssssssssus20uuu200uu220u2u0uunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 118 KRAOS aa a a A a a Mas a aa aa aeaa aa aaa aaa aa aaa 119 Xiv DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Global Viewpoint MOG iciscsvcsvccvemancdceiaecseici vate iad rece ed case ae eens cane ascicimeieaiaaaias 120 Perspective View Spherical COOrdinateS sssssssrssererrrerererrrrrerrrerrrsrrresrre 120 Perspective View Cartesian Coordinates ssssssrresrrerrrrrerrrerrrerrrerrrrerrrern 120 Orthogonal View Cartesian Coordinates ss sssrsssrresrrenrrrerrrrsrresrrrsrrrsrrene 120 Viewpoint POSITION X S seesmisi anaana n Aaaa Aranna 121 Viewpoint Positi n Y sesiiisiiscesecndseiie
264. nt Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 16 Modifier 1 4 Modifier 2 76 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 16 Modifier 1 204 Modifier 2 16 86 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Faux Tile Visual Mode parameter DMX value 17 This options creates divides the image into a grid of tiles with simulated lighting at the edges The color of the center pixel in each cell defines the solid color for that tile You can the number and spacing of tile choose between a black and white grid and adjust color peaking Modifier 1 Controls the number of tile The default DMX value of O a 10 x 10 grid of tiles Increasing the DMX value increases grid divisions to a maximum of 100 x 100 tiles at a value of 255 100 Note A small number of larger tiles will also result in reduced color variation Modifier 2 Adjusts the grid thickness around each tile DMX values below the midpoint of the range increase the spacing between tiles on a black background from O to a maximum space between tiles at a DMX value of 127 Values above the midpoint increase the spacing between tiles on a white background to a maximum space between tiles at a DMX value of 255 100 Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 17 Modifier 1 255 100 Modifier 2 0 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 17 Modifier 1 255 100 Modifier 2 138 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 87 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Func
265. o black 92 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Negative Art Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 9 This option provides a negative of the image and then lets you adjust the amount of color and the red and green color components Modifier 1 Adjusts the color level from full at a DMX value of 0 to the lowest level at a DMX value of 255 Modifier 2 You must set a DMX value of 128 to see no black level adjustment Red is subtracted from the image at DMX values of 128 to 0 Green is subtracted from the image at DMX values of 129 255 Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 9 Modifier 1 DMX value 0 Modifier 2 DMX value 0 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 9 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 9 Modifier 1 DMX value 0 Modifier 1 DMX value 255 100 Modifier 2 DMX value 128 50 Modifier 2 DMX value 128 50 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 93 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Pan and Scan Effect Mode parameter DMX value 255 This option Zooms into a still image and then by changing position you can pan across the image horizontally and vertically It only functions on image sizes greater than 1024 x 1024 in at least one direction Modifier 1 Adjusts the horizontal pan position from O left edge to 255 100 right edge of the image The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Modifier 2 Adjusts the vertical pan position f
266. o 0 and is ignored unless Spherical Mapping is selected as a Global Effect option Spherical mapping control 2 Mod 1 vertical bend correction Mod2 vertical bend correction center Mod3 horizontal size adjustment Defaults to 0 and is ignored unless Spherical Mapping is selected as a Global Effect option Pan and Scan Mod1 horizontal position Mod2 vertical position Mod3 Zoom These Modifier parameters adjust the option Effect Mode 1 selected in Channel 148 for DL 2 fixtures or 0 255 0 100 Modifier 1 Channel 127 for Axon Media Servers The type of adjustment and the default value depends on the particular effect Effect Mode 1 7 Modifier 2 NOTE Setting the Graphic Effect Mode DMX 0 255 0 100 O O1 N Z gt 00 00 N N N O gt N O N ine N Ol oO 255 253 or 254 activates specific spherical mapping control options for Modifier parameters For more about Modifier parameter functionality see Effect Effect Mode 1 1 Mode and Effect 2 Mode on page 100 and 255 0 100 Modifier 3 specific effect options listed alphabetically in Chapter 13 278 DL2 Digital Light User Manual DL 2 an Off no effects selection o CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB reduces color values 1 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values D Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 m
267. o the appropriate User content folder on the media server DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 197 CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA To upload content 1 Display the file or folder destination in the right pane of the CMA window 2 Browse to the file or folder you want to upload on your hard drive and click on it to select 3 Drag and drop it into the appropriate User content folder OR 4 Select Copy from the Edit drop down menu or the right click popup list 5 Select Paste from the Media Files or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list As files are uploaded to fixtures the User interface displays progress information and notifies the user of any naming conflicts when files are renamed A newly uploaded file or folder will have a default DMX value of zero If a naming conflict occurs you will be prompted before overwriting the file Mac OS X File transfer SMB limitation is 4GB file size per transfer What this means is more than 4GB of data may be transferred but no file can be greater than 4GB in size Moving Files Between Fixtures The CMA can transfer both individual files or entire folders between fixtures The DMX values assigned to the files are transferred along with the files themselves You can also Simultaneously transfer files from one fixture to a group of fixtures 198 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA Archiving User Content
268. od 15 value color 255 else color 0 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solid Color RGB Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Invert Modi red to inverted red Mod2 green to 17 18 inverted green Mods blue to inverted blue RGB Invert amp Swap to GBR Modi red to inverted green Mod2 green to inverted blue Mod3 blue to inverted red Edge Detect Color Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold Edge Detect B W Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 D4 vertical search size Mod3 comparison threshold RGB Invert amp Swap to BRG Modi red to inverted blue Mod2 green to 19 inverted red Mod3 blue to inverted green APPENDIX A d Axon DMX Protocol DL2 Digital Light User Manual 0 4 NA 249 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Texture Ripple Horizontal 99 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Vertical 23 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Chromakey Fine Select key color using 26 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Medium Select key color using 97 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Coarse Select key color using 28 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using 29 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color 30 u
269. od1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to RBG 42 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GRB 43 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Mod1 Color Scheme selection Mod2 Zero intensity point in color scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme Mod2 Intensity bandwidth Mod3 Transparency level Raindrop effect Mod1 size speed Mod2 position and Mod3 raindrop rate RGB Scale Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green Mod3 scale blue Maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and Mod3 sets overall color range Reserved Defaults to effect 0 Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 green to alpha Mod blue to alpha Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2 inverted green to alpha Mod3 inverted blue to alpha Global Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Effect 1 Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from original to source texture i Image Scale and Rotate Mod1 scales image 52 Mod2 rotation angle Mod3 rotation speed Film Roll Mod1 horizontal roll speed 53 Mod2 vertical roll speed Mod3 Image scale Pixelate Mod1 Amount of pixelation 54 Mod2 horizontal scaler Mod3 vertical scaler Faux LED Mod1 LED size Mod2 spacing 55 Mod 3 color peaking Faux Tile Mod1 Tile size Mod2 spacing 56 Mod 3 color peaking Fuzzifier Mod1 Horizontal distance Mod2 57 vertical dis
270. ode 2 green cycle speed Mod3 blue cycle speed Reserved defaults to Effect 0 75 79 Downward Vertical Streaks Mod1 start positon gq Mod2 streak angle Mod3 fade Gaussian Blur Mod1 sample distance Mod2 filter pass number Mod3 curve shape Sharpen Mod1 sample distance Mod2 filter pass number Mod3 sharpen scale Reserved Defaults to effect mode 0 Spherical mapping control 1 Mod 1 projector y offset Mod2 sphere y offset Mod3 vertical size Defaults to 0 and is ignored unless Spherical Mapping is selected as a Global Effect option Spherical mapping control 2 Mod 1 vertical bend correction Mod2 vertical bend correction center Mod3 horizontal size adjustment Defaults to 0 and is ignored unless Spherical Mapping is selected as a Global Effect option Pan and Scan Mod1 horizontal position Mod2 vertical position Mod3 Zoom These Modifier parameters adjust the option Effect Mode 2 selected in Channel 114 for DL 2 fixtures or ci Modifier 1 Channel 93 for Axon Media Servers PESSE ea The type of adjustment and the default value depends on the particular effect Effect Mode 2 Modifier 2 NOTE Setting the Graphic Effect Mode DMX 0 255 0 100 253 or 254 activates specific spherical mapping control options for Modifier parameters For more about Modifier parameter functionality see Effect Effect Mode 2 1 Mode and Effect 2 Mode on page 100 and 0 255 0 100 Modifier 3 spec
271. oint the image will then be composed of series of vertical bands NOTE This option is also available as a Visual Mode adjusted with 2 Modifier parameters see ShakeNBake on page 99 Pixel Twist M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 34 This option introduces a twisted area to the image and allows to you size it and move it in the image Modifier 1 Controls the horizontal position of the twisted area s centerpoint from O left edge to 255 100 right edge of output Modifier 2 Controls the vertical position of the twisted area s centerpoint from O top edge to 255 100 bottom edge of output Modifier 3 Controls the direction and amount of twist At the midpoint of the range there is no change in the image The twist area and size moves counterclockwise from 128 50 smallest area to 0 largest twist area moving counterclockwise The twist area and size moves clockwise from 128 50 smallest area to 255 100 largest twist area moving clockwise Raindrop M Object Effect Global Effect Effects Mode parameter DMX value 46 This option simulates raindrops falling on a liquid surface Modifier 1 Controls the drop size from 0 no drop to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Sets the random number generator seed number This lets you create a repeatable random sequence that will synchronize correctly when using the collage generator option see page 153 Modifier 3 Adjusts the raindrop
272. ol Levels 6 Global Effect 8 Global Effect 2 Modifier 2 9 Global Effect 2 Modifier3 48 86 124 Visual mode 51 89 127 Effect Mode 1 52 90 128 Effect 1 Modifier 1 58 96 134 Effect 2 Modifier 3 e0 98 136 Viewpoint Position X Z sxis rotation 29 ape 704 142 Scale 33 68 106 06 144 44 Bi a PRE ven 73 Z Position 40 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 4 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start Lighting Console Tips Lighting consoles differ in many aspects and it is important to understand how your console operates with Axon and DL 2 media servers Fixture Libraries Many sophisticated lighting consoles utilize pre made fixture libraries A fixture library consists of profiles for various types of lighting fixtures and devices Each profile corresponds to the fixture s DMX protocol and allows for ease of programming Depending upon the manufacturer of your lighting console some parameters might have different labels for parameter names and functions than are listed within this manual Consult your lighting console manual for further information Patching DL 2 Fixtures and Axon Media Servers The DL 2 fixture consists of three different fixture types in the Wholehog 3 library systems This allows for ease of programming as well as the ability to adjust quickly for any of the various DMX protocol options The Motion fixture typ
273. olor Component Conversion Effect 7 Red GreenGreen Blue Blue Red 8 Red A BlueGreen RedBlue A Green 17 Red CyanGreen MagentaBlue Yellow 18 Red MagentaGreen YellowBlue Cyan 19 Red A YellowGreen CyanBlue Magenta 41 Red Ac BlueGreen GreenBlue Ac Red 42 Red RedGreen BlueBlue Green 43 Red A GreenGreen A RedBlue A Blue DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 139 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Effect Mode Color Options All or Nothing M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 15 This option reduces all color values to full saturation or no color based on comparison to a set threshold This effect creates an image with fully saturated color Modifier 1 Compares the red component of a pixel to the threshold value and converts it to full color if it is greater than the threshold and to black if it is below the threshold Modifier 2 Compares the green component of a pixel to the threshold value and converts it to full color if it is greater than the threshold and to black if it is below the threshold Modifier 3 Compares the blue component of a pixel to the threshold value and converts it to full color if it is greater than the threshold and to black if it is below the threshold Background Color Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 131 There is a background behind every composite image You cannot rotate scale or position the background
274. olor Scheme selection Mod2 Zero intensity point in color scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme Mod2 Intensity bandwidth Mod3 Transparency Raindrop effect Mod1 size speed Mod2 position and Mod3 raindrop rate Scale RGB Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green Mods scale blue Maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and Mod sets overall color range Reserved Defaults to effect 0 Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 green to alpha Mod3 blue to alpha Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2 inverted green to alpha Mod3 inverted blue to alpha Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from original to source texture Image Scale and Rotate Mod1 scales image Global Mod2 rotation angle Mod3 rotation speed Effect 2 Film Roll Mod1 horizontal roll speed Mod2 vertical roll speed Mod3 Image scale Pixelate Mod1 Amount of pixelation Mod2 horizontal scaler Mod3 vertical scaler Faux LED Mod1 LED size Mod2 spacing Mod 3 color peaking Faux Tile Mod1 Tile size Mod2 spacing Mod 3 color peaking Fuzzifier Mod1 Horizontal distance Mod2 vertical distance Mod3 fuzz decay Drop Shadow Mod1 horizontal shadow size Mod2 vertical shadow size Mod3 shadow Opacity Zoom Blur Mod1 horizontal position center Mod2 vertical position center Mod3 zoom C
275. olor scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme Mod2 45 44 Intensity bandwidth Mod3 Transparency level Raindrop effect Mod1 controls size speed Mod2 seeds the random number generator and Mod3 46 controls raindrop rate Scale RGB Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green Mod3 scale blue Maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and 47 Mod3 sets overall color range Tiling On Scaler of 128 1 to 1 Note Tiling on Mode 1 overrides tiling on Effect Mode 2 48 Mod1 x axis tiling scaler Mod2 y axis tiling scaler Mod3 not used Color to Alpha Mod1 red to alpha Mod2 49 green to alpha Mod3 blue to alpha 50 Color to Alpha Inverted Mod1 inverted red to alpha Mod2 inverted green to alpha Mod3 inverted blue to alpha Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file Mod2 Source effect level Mod3 Crossfade from 51 original to source texture Image Scale and Rotate Mod1 scales image 52 Effect Mod2 rotation angle Mod3 rotation speed 114 93 Mode 2 Film Roll Mod1 horizontal roll speed 53 ne i Mod2 vertical roll speed Mod3 Image scale 4 Pixelate Mod1 Amount of pixelation 5 Mod2 horizontal scaler Mod3 vertical scaler Faux LED Mod1 LED size Mod2 spacing Mod 3 color peaking Faux Tile Mod1 Tile size Mod2 spacing Mod 3 color peaking Fuzzifier Mod1 Horizontal distance Mod2 vertical distance Mod3 fuzz decay Drop Shadow
276. on 1 3 3 June 2007 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Contacting High End Sustems Sales Department Customer Service World Wide Web High End Systems Inc 2105 Gracy Farms Lane Austin TX 78758 USA voice 512 836 2242 fax 512 837 5290 Toll Free 800 890 8989 High End Systems Inc 2105 Gracy Farms Lane Austin TX 78758 USA voice 800 890 8989 fax 512 834 9195 toll free 800 890 8989 email support highend com http www highend com DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Patents This High End Systems product is protected by patents and pending patent applications Patents owned or licensed by High End Systems include US 4 392 187 US 4 602 321 US 4 688 161 US 4 701 833 US 4 709 311 US 4 779 176 US 4 800 474 US 4 962 687 US 4 972 306 US 4 980 806 US 5 010 459 US 5 031 078 US 5 073 847 US 5 078 039 US 5 186 536 US 5 209 560 US 5 278 742 US 5 282 121 US 5 307 295 US 5 329 431 US 5 331 822 US 5 367 444 US 5 402 326 US 5 414 328 US 5 426 576 US 5 430 629 US 5 432 691 US 5 454 477 US 5 455 748 US 5 502 627 US 5 506 762 US 5 515 254 US 5 537 303 US 5 545 951 US 5 588 021 US 5 590 954 US 5 590 955 US 5 640 061 US 5 647 662 US 5 691 886 US 5 702 082 US 5 728 994 US 5 758 955 US 5 758 956 US 5 769 527 US 5 769 531 US 5 774 273 US 5 788 365 US 5 794 881 US 5 795 058 US 5 798 619 US 5 806 951 US 5 812 596 US 5 823 661 US 5 825 548 US 5 828 485 US 5 829 868 US 5 857 768 US 5
277. on 1 Sync to reverse Object rotation 46 SyncMode Sync to reverse Objectrotation2 8 Sync to reverse Object rotation 3 Ez Sync to Sync to Graphic movie time and rotation 1 movie time and rotation 1 Syneto Graphie movie tme and rotation 1 to Sync to Graphic movie time and rotation 2 movie time and rotation 2 11 Sync to Ce movie time and rotation 3 Sync to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 1 Sync to Sync to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 2 movie time Sync to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 2 reverse rotation 2 14 Sync to Graphic movie time reverse rotation 3 Reserved Defaults to mode 0 no selection 16 255 No Selection Selection No Selection 0 Sync to Fixture ID Number 1 a 47 Sync To ie to Fixture ID Number 2 2 Sync to Fixture Number 254 Sync to Fixture ID Number 255 255 Graphic 1 Effects Off No visual mode processing applied to output Content Optimization Mod1 black level Mod2 contrast Sepia tones Mod1 fades from original color to sepia colors Mod2 controls saturation Red tones Mod1 fades from original color to red tones Mod2 controls saturation Gray maker Mod1 compresses colors to shades 48 Visual Mode of gray Mod2 adjusts contrast Gray maker2 Always gray Modi brightness Mod2 contrast Posterizer Mod1 reduces color detail Mod2 adjusts contrast Color to Black amp White Mod1 fades color RGB 0 to B W 50 to white 100 Mod2 not used Fi
278. on on replacing parts cleaning the fixture and some basic troubleshooting procedures The following toolset should be all you need for the maintenance procedures in this chapter e M3 allen wrench e M4 allen wrench e 2 Phillips screwdriver e Gloves e Protective eyewear e Mild glass cleaner containing no ammonia and a soft lint free cotton cloth WARNING AN This fixture must be serviced by qualified personnel The information listed in this chapter is intended to assist qualified personnel only Pan and Tilt Locking The DL 2 fixture is equipped with mechanical pan and tilt locking latches to stabilize the fixture for shipping or servicing There is a single pan lock position and three tilt lock positions DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 211 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Maintaining the Filtering System Like all high quality video projection units the DL 2 fixture must be kept protected from excessive amounts of glycol fog mineral oil and smoke DL 2 fixtures incorporate multiple air filters to reduce these risks to a minimum however the user must follow these guidelines to ensure continued operation of the fixture e Air filters both fixture and projector should be checked and cleaned on a regular basis When used in a closed or fixed environment where fog or haze is used we recommend at least a weekly check e Do not situate DL 2 in areas of
279. on server a Unique Fixture ID from 1 to 255 using the CMA see Viewing and Editing Server Configuration on page 204 or through the onboard Menu System DL 2 fixtures Playback Timing Synchronizing playback sets all applicable fixtures to a master clock so that all fixtures have a definite synchronized starting point when playing back their sequences or loops The master fixture determines the sequence length for all the other fixtures in the link regardless of the number of programmed scenes or the sequence length of the individual fixtures synchronizing to the master When the master fixture reaches the end of the selected media file segment all fixtures will restart at In Frame point of their media file segment regardless of whether the playback has come to the selected Out Frame and all the clocks will be reset to zero For example if a synchronizing fixture s media segment has a shorter sequence length than the master fixture s media file segment it continuously repeats its sequence until the master fixture resets all the clocks If a synchronizing fixture s media segment has a longer sequence length it restarts at the In Frame point before completing its entire sequence DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 105 CHAPTER 10 Graphic Functions Synchronizing Content Synchronization Parameters Sync To You use the Sync To parameter to identify the Media Server you want a Graphic Object output to Synchronize with You can synch
280. ops promotora 9 HES Tewes Videoleoptewwes O OO OOOO 28 HES Logos High End Systems won and DL2 logos S a DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Defining Content DMX aaa Media Folder Name Content Description NASA_Images Space images from the Hubble telescope Blue_Pony Assorted video loops Media File The Media File parameter lets you identify which Stock or User media file to apply map as a texture on the selected 3 D object You can supplement the large library of Stock video loops and still images with Custom files This parameter selects media files from within the folder defined by the Media Folder parameter For a reference of media files available as stock content with your media server go to the link for the Stock Content Guide for Axon or DL 2 products on http www highend com support digital lighting You can also view thumbnail images of media files in the CMA see Viewing Files on page 193 Default DMX Value 0 No file selected Tip You can preview a visual display of the media files loaded on a media server in the Content Management Application s thumbnails view see Viewing Content on page 193 or in the File Tab of a DL 2 fixture menu display 62 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 7 Graphic Functions Defining Content Defining a Media File Segment You can define any portion of a video media file to play using the In Frame and Out Frame parameters By
281. orizontal diamonds 1 diamonds 1 152 Oval Iris Oval Iris closing from inside out from inside out 156 32 11 Mask Size Adjusts mask size from fully closed to open 0 255 0 100 100 Mask Edge Hard edge to faded edge when Mask Select 0 33 12 Fad 127 Strobe rate control from Fastest to slowest 0 255 0 100 wo when Mask Select parameter value 128 255 Global I mage Edge Fade Image Edge 6 the image s top edge diffusion from hard i Fade Top edge 0 to maximum fade 255 a ea Image Edge a ve image s right edge diffusion from hard Fade Right edge 0 to maximum fade 255 iced Pl Image Edge e the i U s bottom edge diffusion from Fade Bottom hard edge 0 to maximum fade 255 sce Rca Image Edge _ Adjusts the image s left edge diffusion from hard i Fade Left edge 0 to maximum fade 255 Pele we DL2 Digital Light User Manual 243 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Global Keystone Correction Move top left corner x value to center 0 255 0 100 0 0 Move top left corner y value to center 0 255 0 100 0 0 20 18 Top Right x Move top right comerx value to cerier 0258 ot00 0 0 41 20 Top RightY Move top ight comer veto coner 0255 0 100 o 42 21 Bottom Right X Move botiom right comer xvalue to centr 0258 0 100 0 0 43 22 Bottom Right Y Move botiom right comer y value to conter 0258 0100 0 0 44 23 Bottom LeftX Move botiom left comer xvalue to center 0 258 0100 0
282. oseon O e Moving User Content Files and Folders User content can be easily moved between fixtures and your local drive as well as between fixtures Which method you use depends on e How much content you want to move e What existing server content you want to preserve e Whether the client machine is currently connected to the Ethernet fixture link e If you want to maintain currently assigned content identification DMX values e Which CMA version you are using Windows or Mac OS There are several methods for moving User content files and media folders between media servers to your local drive e Drag and Drop e Copy and Paste commands e Cloning transfers the User Content files and their DMX value assignments from one media server to one or more server s on the fixture network e Creating a Content Archive e Deploying a Content Archive 196 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA Use the following table to determine the best method for your situation Transfer Type Fixture Network From Server From Client Between File Transfer Method to Client Machine to Networked Machine Server s Server s Yes if format is Drag and Drop Yes valid for des Does NOT preserve tination folder DMX Values Clone Yes Preserves DMX values and Archive Content on destination drive Saves assigned DMX values Creating a Content Archive Yes No No when creating archive from content on a fixture
283. oth the Global and Graphic fixture types The default for Effect Mode 1 is set to CMY1 as well Effect Mode 2 Modifier channels are labeled Mod 1 Mod 2 and Mod 3 DMX Effect Mode a o seon O a 4 T RaBadd alpes Ra ieee gt RaBadaz apies Ra aen Bn 8 RGB add to ali nonblack pieis Rea reen Bs 8 RaBswaptoBRa ResioBue Green to Red Bein Green o Sotarize 1 oor value lt DNX value imot oor Rea Green Bue 10 Solarize2 coor value gt DMX imon oor Rea Green Bue 71 Solaze 3 elor value lt DMX setoorio0 Rea Green Bue 12 Solarz a olor value gt DMX setcoorteO Rea Green Bue et e E a a te E 76 RGB Sold eolor ma en o e 100 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects DMX Effect Mode Value Name Definition RGB Invert Red to Cyan aE S Blue to Yellow Magenta Blue to 18 RGB Invert and Swap to GBR Red to Magenta Green to Yellow Cyan Red to Green RGB Invert and Swap to BRG Siow Son Bue to Magenta Horizontal Vertical Comparison Horizontal Vertical Comparison Texture Ripple Horizontal Amplitude Texture Ripple Vertical Amplitude Phase EE Texture Ripple Circular Amplitude E wonaiey Fed en 27 Chromakey Medium Re en oe 28 Chromakey Coarse Red Greene 29 Chromekey Fine wverse Red Gen Be ae a E Eii line converts image colors to colors in a selects fades to con single line of the image Selects from 6 wipe options x twist twi
284. ough the CMA see Chapter 16 Content Management Application CMA on page 187 Certain options can also be controlled remotely via a DMX console s Control channel see Control Function Options on page 180 Menu Panel Components System State Tab Select Buttons Menu Display LEDs Ment Tabs Adjustments y m ee X y y M g u y 2 3 a 8 m ay m E A as Source O i a ae DMX512 O g Protocol _ Start 9 eS aa Standard 4 Channel O J Fixture ID J A si 7 iin li 1 EA SYSTEMS i i Escape Enter LED Multidirectional navigation button Active Screen displays the currently selected screen Function will automatically reverse when fixture is inverted The LCD screen displays the menu arranged with a series of Menu Tabs along the left side for accessing configuration screens and options on the currently active screen Clicking on one of the Tab Select buttons selects the tab to the right of it on the screen The large Multi directional button controls movement between fields The Escape button to the left cancels a selection and the Enter button to the right selects and stores a selection DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 21 CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Functionality for each of these three buttons automatically reverses when the fixture is rotated to keep operation consistent You can also manually set this option see Display Options on page 30 The fields in the Activ
285. ounterclockwise image rotation around Z axis fast to slow 25 Continuous rotation stop 26 49 Rotates the image counterclockwise around Z axis in steps to 720 degrees 50 0 rotation around Z axis 51 74 Rotates the image clockwise around Z axis in steps to 720 degrees 75 Continuous rotation stop 76 100 Continuous variable speed clockwise image rotation around Z axis slow to fast This parameter lets you view an object from a different angle by turning the object You can also view an object from a different angle by changing the viewpoint in space for the composite image see Global Viewpoint Mode on page 120 Tip Using this parameter you can turn one object around another Original Object 1 and Object 2 Z axis Rotation Applied to Object 2 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 71 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Scaling the Object You can scale an Graphic Object along the X Y and or Z axis to adjust the object size The Scale parameter adjusts the size of the object s image up to approximately 10x its original size At a DMX value of zero the image shrinks to a dot At the midpoint of the DMX value range the image is normal size When the DMX value is increased from the midpoint the image is enlarged In addition when the DMX value is reduced below the midpoint an inverted image is enlarged Use the X Y and Z Scale parameters together to enlarge or shrink a 3 D object proportionally X Scale
286. ponent opacity or intensity from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 full red and green opacity intensity DotP and Resample M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 13 This option applies an algorithm that pixelates and solarizes the image It also makes the surface of some 3D objects appear reflective Modifiers 1 Modifier 2 and Modifier 3 parameters work together to adjust the algorithm Edge Fade Color C Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 129 This option applies color to a selected Edge Fade parameter see mage Edge Fade on page 117 Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 145 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Glow M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 73 Glow colorizes and creates a glow on the 3 D object separate from the media texture on it You can apply this option to any 3 D object no matter which media file texture is applied to it This parameter provides an option to view a 3 D object without displaying the associated texture Modifier 1 ncreases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maxim
287. ponent to green from 0 no color change to 255 100 green Modifier 2 Transitions green color component to red from O no color change to 255 100 blue Modifier 3 No change to blue color component RGB Swap to RBG M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 42 This option allows you to swap colors All green values become blue and all blue values become green Red values are unaffected Modifier 1 No change to red color component Modifier 2 Transitions green color component to blue from 0 no color change to 255 100 blue Modifier 3 Transitions blue color component to green from 0 no color change to 255 100 red Scan Line M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 32 Maps image color intensities to the colors in a single horizontal line of the selected texture Modifier 1 Selects a line of the media file to scan Modifier 2 Adjusts the mapping transition Modifier 3 Not used DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 151 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Solarize M Object Effect M Global Effect Solarize Effect Mode parameter DMX value 9 Solarize 2 Effect Mode parameter DMX value 10 Solarize 3 Effect Mode parameter DMX value 11 Solarize 4 Effect Mode parameter DMX value 12 Each of the Solarize options remaps colors to a narrow value range and inverts the color below a set threshold using different algorithms Solarize options ca
288. put and Control Sending the Camera Feed to Camera Out The factory default assigns the video feed from the internal camera to the graphics engine However the DL2 fixture can be configured to route the camera video feed to the Camera Out connector by setting the Control Parameter to a DMX value between 229 232 NOTE The internal camera video feed can be routed to either the graphic engine or the camera out connector it can not be applied to both at the same time This setting will be retained until you change it or restore the factory defaults For more information on configuring and previewing the internal camera feed see Integrating Live Video and other Media with DL 2 at http www highend com products digital lighting dil_ 2 asp Controlling the Internal Camera Input Several parameters allow you to control and apply effects to the Internal camera input Camera Zoom The Camera Zoom parameter uses two DMX channels to provide 16 bit control of the camera s zoom function This includes an 18x optical and 12x digital zoom for a total of 216x combined zoom range You can adjust the Camera Zoom parameter from In DMX value 0 to Out DMX value 65535 Camera Focus The Camera Focus parameter uses two DMX channels to provide 16 bit control of the camera s focus function Auto focus for the camera is active when DMX values 0 511 The camera focus can also be manually adjusted from In Far End DMX value 512 to Out Near E
289. qual to zero viewpoint shown at left Perspective View Cartesian Coordinates This Viewpoint mode parameter creates a 3 D space with a perspective view Viewpoints are located in terms of rectangular X Y and Z positions describing a location in this space Orthogonal View Cartesian Coordinates This Viewpoint mode creates a 3 D space without perspective Viewpoint are located in terms of rectangular X Y and Z positions describing a location in this space In this case the composite image is always flat 120 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Viewpoint Position X The Viewpoint Position X parameter determines the x component of the viewpoint position to the target you have specified in the Viewpoint Mode parameter The horizontal angle is the angle around the vertical y axis Heading is another name for this angle Default DMX Value 32768 center DMX values above center of the range move counterclockwise to the maximum horizontal angle at a value of 65535 100 DMX values below the center move clockwise to the minimum horizontal angle at a value of 0 Viewpoint Position Y The Viewpoint Position Y parameter sets the vertical angle above below the horizontal plane Pitch is another name for this component of the viewpoint position Default DMX Value 32768 center DMX values above the center of the range move counterclockwise to the maximum vertical angle at a value of 65535 100 DMX values
290. r NOTE If you are running Windows OS and the CMA doesn t automatically install navigate to the CMA msi file in your windows browser and double click to install the CMA Once the CMA is installed double clicking on the application icon will launch it and display the Client management window 188 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA Launching the CMA on Axon Axon media servers can launch the CMA locally When you start Axon the local monitor will display a desktop that gives you access to the CMA NOTE An active display device must be attached to both DVI ports before booting up the system When only one port is connected it defaults to display the graphics engine output and will not display the CMA screen Press the Launch CMA button on the local desktop The application automatically finds and identifies the Local Drives including any connected USB drives the CD DVD drive as well as other Axon and DL 2 media servers connected to the same Ethernet network NOTE The Axon Server supports an onboard DVD drive you can use for copying content into an Axon Server as well as burning User content onto DVD CD Auto Discove i d aw Se All Servers 2 servers a 001676826210E 1 HHD User Media a User Objects GE Stock Media Stock Objects B Axon 7 Local EHE Local Dives HC Seratch e CD DVD He HA D User Media O User Objects 1 Stock Media m
291. r 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation RGB Invert M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 17 This option inverts color values to transition the image from an RGB to a CMY color model Modifier 1 Transitions the red component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to cyan ata value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Transitions the green component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to magenta at a value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Transitions the blue component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to yellow at a value of 255 100 148 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Invert and Swap to BRG M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 19 This option swaps the color values from RGB to an inverted BRG color model Modifier 1 Transitions the red component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to yellow ata value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Transitions the green component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to cyan ata value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Transitions the blue component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to magenta ata value of 255 100 RGB Invert and Swap to GBR M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 18 This option swaps the color values from RGB to an inverted GBR color model Modifier 1 Transitions the red component from no adjustment at a value of 0
292. r DMX value 62 Effect Mode parameter DMX value 63 Modifier 1 204 Modifier 2 40 Modifier 1 204 Modifier 2 40 Vlodifier 3 255 Modifier 3 255 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 171 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Spherical Mapping Object Effect Global Effect Spherical Mapping adjusts a rectangular output to project on a portion of a sphere It is especially useful for projecting a collage onto a sphere or a portion of a sphere Spherical mapping utilizes a total of nine Effect Modifier parameters to adjust positioning In addition to the three modifiers associated with the Global Effect two Graphics Object Effects provide six additional Modifier parameters Use these adjustments in conjunction with Keystone parameters and Ratio parameters to refine the output shape on the spherical surface For a more detailed setup guide for Spherical Mapping see Mapping a Collage to a Spherical Surface on page 134 Spherical Mapping Outside Effect Mode parameter DMX value 142 This option corrects shape distortions and controls blending for collages projected onto the outside surface of a sphere Spherical Mapping Inside Effect Mode parameter DMX value 143 This Global Effect corrects shape distortions and controls blending for collages projected onto the inside surface of a sphere Modifier Parameter Adjustments When Spherical Mapping is selected the associated Global Effect Modifier parameters adjust Modifier
293. r the network for easier identification of servers on your network e Compare all the Configuration Items of a certain type for a group of fixtures For example viewing the CPU Temperature for all the fixtures on a network e Control monitor display settings for Axon media servers 204 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA Viewing Fixture Configuration Values To view configuration information for a individual server click on All Servers in the left pane of the CMA window and select the to view all the servers on the fixture network Select a server in the left pane to view its configuration information in the right pane HighEnd DL2 Management Client File Configuration Help HIGH END SYSTEMS All Servers 5 servers eB Mr Th ET E 220 Art Net Subnet HH User Media 10 0 1 220 Art Net Universe gt I User Objects 10 0 1 220 Disk Free Space Badar ann 1 1 Hes Stock Media J 10 01 220 DMS Proteceal 11 1 1 10 0 1 220 Fixture ID i ila 10 0 1 220 DMX Source DMxB12 H Avon t OoOo 10 0 1 220 Start Channel O01 Mac OS X Viewing Server Configuration To access Server Configuration information for an individual server select the Configuration option under the individual server To view configuration information for all Servers on the network select All Configurations in the left pane The right pane now displays configuration values for all the
294. r this example follow with a cue that sets the Play Mode parameter of Play Loop Forward DMX 0 and brings up the Opacity to 100 for the same graphic object on all units you are configuring for the panorama Mapping a Collage to a Spherical Surface The Spherical Mapping effect takes the normal rectangular output and wraps it on selected portion of a sphere This is the same as wrapping a flat map on to a globe The horizontal position of a point is its longitude The vertical position of a point is its latitude Adjusting the Spherical Mapping effect requires a total of nine Modifier parameters Selecting Spherical Mapping along with the Collage Generator effect uses the available Global Effects In addition to the three Modifier Parameters associated with the Spherical Mapping selection six Modifier parameters are accessed by using two Graphic Effect Mode parameters Any available Effect from any Graphic Object can be used The two Effects parameters do not have to be from the same Graphic Object One of these Effect enables the Modifier parameters to control the vertical position of the projector actually the graphics viewpoint the vertical position of the sphere and a vertical size control The other Effect provides Effect Modifiers to control of the amount of vertical bend in horizontal lines the vertical center of the added bend and a horizontal size control Spherical Mapping Setup Guide Before You Begin Successful spherical mappi
295. r using 26 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Medium Select key color using 27 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Coarse Select key color using 28 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using 29 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color 30 using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 31 Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Scan Line Mod1 selects scan line as texture Mod2 fades from original image to converted 32 image Mod3 not used reserved Transparent Wipes Mod1 width of transparent area Mod2 center of transparent area 33 Mod3 transparency mode Pixel Twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center Mod3 direction and amount of twist Picture in Picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture center Mod3 subpicture size Magnifying Lens Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y 36 lens center Mod3 lens size Magnifying Lens 2 Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y 37 lens center Mod3 lens size Cartoon Edge Modi Edge Color Mod2 38 Contrast Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity Color DeConverge Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left Horizontal Mirror Mod1 mirror center Mod2 and 40 Mod3 not used RGB Swap to BGR 41 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to RBG 42 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GR
296. ransparent area Mod3 transparency mode Pixel Twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center Mod3 direction and amount of twist Picture in Picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture center Mod3 subpicture size Magnifying Lens Mod1 x lens center 36 Mod2 y lens center Mod3 lens size Magnifying Lens 2 Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center Mod3 lens size Cartoon Edge Mod1 Edge Color Mod2 Contrast Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity Color DeConverge Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left Horizontal Mirror Mod1 mirror center Mod2 and Mods not used RGB Swap to BGR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to RBG 42 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GRB 43 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 276 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Modi Color Scheme selection Mod2 Zero intensity point in color scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme Mod2 Intensity bandwidth Mod3 Transparency level Raindrop effect Mod1 controls size speed Mod2 seeds the random number generator and Mod3 46 controls raindrop rate Scale RGB Mod1 scale red Mod2 scale green Mod3 scale blue Maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and 47 Mod sets overall color range Tiling On Scaler of 128 1 to
297. re Gradient Mod1fades original to converted Mod2 not used reserved DL2 Digital Light User Manual 247 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Negative Art Mod1 fades from original image to converted image Mod2 subtracts red from 0 128 subtracts green from 129 255 Exposure Control Mod1 adjusts color contrast Mod2 adjusts color shift Invert B amp W Keep Color Mod1 black comparison level Mod2 white comparison level Texture Mixing Mod1 Source media file zat Crossfade from original to source texture Image Scale and Rotate Mod1 image scale Mod2 rotation angle Film Roll Mod1 horizontal roll speed Mod2 Vertical roll soeed Pixelate Mod1 amount of pixelation Mod 2 not 15 used 48 Visual Mode Faux LED Mod1 LED size Mod2 spacing Faux Tile Mod1 Tile size Mod2 spacing Fuzzifier Mod1 x axis distance Mod2 y axis distance Drop Shadow Mod1 horizontal shadow size Mod2 vertical shadow size Zoom Blur Mod1 horizontal position center Mod2 vertical position center Chroma Shift Mod1 horizontal shift Mod2 vertical shift ShakeNBake Mod1 horizontal shake Mod2 vertical shake Reserved Defaults to Reserved Defaults to 0 254 e T and Scan Mod1 horizontal position Mod2 vertical position i Adjusts option selected in Channel 69 for DL 2 zo ag Visual Mode fixtures or Channel 46 for Axon Media Servers 9 955 0 100 Modifier 1 The type of adju
298. reen Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Scan Line Mod1 selects scan line as texture Global Mod2 fades from original image to converted Effect 2 image Mod3 not used reserved Transparent wipes Mod1 width of transparent area Mod2 center of transparent area Mod3 transparency mode Pixel Twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center Mod3 direction and amount of twist Picture in Picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture center Mod3 subpicture size Magnifying lens Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center Mod3 lens size Magnifying lens 2 Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center Mod lens size Cartoon Edge Modi Edge Color Mod2 Contrast Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity Color DeConverge Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down 3 and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left Horizontal Mirror Mod1 mirror center Mod2 and 40 Mods not used RGB Swap to BGR 4 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to RBG 42 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 238 DL2 Digital Light User Manual N O N 00 oo w N Z gt 60 oo O oo 7 3 8 9 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol RGB Swap to GRB Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Modi C
299. rol Parameter Projector Options These Control parameter options remotely access and operate the internal projector s menu system DMX Value Control Option Description Range 180 184 Displays the Projector s internal Menu System 185 188 Projector Up arrow 189 192 Projector Down arrow Note These options control the directional buttons on the projector menu display 193 196 Projector Left arrow i and cannot be activated until you set the 197 200 Projector Right arrow Dimmer parameter to 0 201 204 Store Menu selection Projector Floor Orientation These commands activate the projector s setting for specific 205 208 mounting or projection alternatives Projector Ceiling Orientation Once set these commands maintain their value until reset even 209 212 after shutdown and re homing For example if the Control parameter is set to switch the unit to Ceiling orientation then the unit will remain in Ceiling orientation until another command is sent to switch back to Floor This allows the Control parameter to Projector Rear Projection revert to another value without losing the orientation or mirroring 217 220 status 213 216 Projector Front Projection Input from External RGBHV Video input can be utilized with either RGBHV or VGA but not to Projector both You can select between RGBHV and VGA in the menu 225 228 Graphics Engine to Projector System see DMX_Control Screen on page 27 RGBHV is the factory d
300. rom 0 bottom edge to 255 100 top edge of the image The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX vale 255 Modifier 1 DMX value 128 Modifier 2 DMX value 128 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 255 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 9 Modifier 1 DMX value 0 Modifier 1 DMX value 255 Modifier 2 DMX value 0 Modifier 2 DMX value 255 94 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Pixelate Effect Mode parameter DMX value 15 This options divides the image into rectangles using the center pixel color of each as it s color You can control the number of divisions Modifier 1 Controls the number of divisions from the fewest number of cells as Since each division is a single color fewer larger boxes result in reduced color variation Modifier 2 Not Used Original Content Visual Mode Modifier 1 DMX value 128 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 15 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 95 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Posterizer Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 6 This effect uses the associated Modifier 1 parameter to posterize by replacing each color in an image with the highest values of that color but expanding it only to the border of that color There is no bleeding or blending of colors Note In this visual mode you won t see a change in the image until you adjust the Modifier 1 parameter Mod
301. ronize any graphic object output on one server to any other graphic object output on another server You can only synchronize output to one media server However you can synchronize outputs from multiple media servers to the same server The Ethernet link can support multiple synchronizations at the same time Default DMX Value 0 No synchronization Each fixture on the network is assigned a fixture ID Currently synchronization can be with only one media server The Synchronization server is selected with the Sync To parameter channel of Graphic Object One The Sync To parameter channels for Graphic Objects 2 and 3 are reserved and default to 0 Sync Mode The Sync Mode parameter defines the type of synchronization between Graphic Objects You can synchronize to the frame of the movie the 3 D object rotation either forward or reverse or both When using the Sync Mode parameter keep the following in mind e Any Sync Mode value above 15 16 255 defaults back to 0 e Any settings affected by the synchronize mode you select need to be mirrored on both objects to Sync correctly e Setting a Graphic Object to sync to itself will have no effect DMX Default Value 0 no sync type selection No selection Le Synchronize to Graphic Object 3 movie time O A Synchronize sD objectrotaton Synchronize to Graphic Object 1 movie time and rotation 1 O 9 Synchronize to reverse 3 D object rotation 3 O ua Synchronize to Graphic Object 2 mo
302. rresrne 222 Frequently Asked QUESTIONS 2 0 cccccce cece cece eee eee esse ee ee eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeee ee seeenaneneeeeey 224 XX DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter 18 Restoring the System You can perform a system restore on the Axon or DL 2 Server with your System Restore CD Hardware Requirements isccsisicnssecessentecwssncsentscnesesneceeewaseew ew wenden ewes aana 225 Performing the System Restore cisssiiciicscesecccssesecenesensessesensseseeseesenissesccesenss 225 Appendix A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol DL 2 fixtures and Axon Media Servers utilize the same DMX protocol except that DL 2 fixtures include channels for motion and camera control This table describes the Standard Dual and Single Protocol for DL 2 fixtures and Axon Media Servers Protocol TADIC sertescciweidavesicaddaicdsnctcaciwncadincancutevsuesscasceuesdsdeccduceiadscutwemeenetnn 229 Appendix B MSpeed Conversion Table This table lists the MSpeed motor movement times and their corresponding DMX controller values Appendix C Custom User Content There are several considerations to keep in mind when creating custom content to control with the DL 2 graphics engine software Preparing Custom Content sssssss22 2 22 222222u220uuu0uu220uunuununnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 289 ENCOder SCICCTION vicviiiieisdeietedenssesenesniessntnnsanisanesasanewee EA E a AE E an aN 289 Creating 3 D Objects isicsissicisccdsicsiiedvvedeenseesccedacetedadeassenesssssenenssssseresesss
303. s Global Control Modifier Parameter selects text color Four in one displays each layers output and combined output in a 2 x 2 array Reserved 34 On screen Statistics Reserved Displays the selected media file for each graphic object plus the final composite image Displays the selected media file for each graphic 56 object plus the final composite image and the image s position in an applied collage effect Displays the current media file for each graphic object plus the final composite image with the result of an applied collage effect and curved surface adjustment Global Displays the media file for each graphic object 35 Control plus the first effect applied to it if any Modifier Displays the media file for each graphic object with up to two effects applied to it Displays the media file for each graphic object with up to the first three effects applied to it Reserved Text color gray Text color red Text color blue Text color green EE co 20 30 NA mupo mo sees apid ok 2 miop ioe irst ee tects apples iot S Rens HS ma DL2 Digital Light User Manual 245 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Graphic 1 Functions Standard Dual Single Protocol Selects meet ahaned level from completely i i Opacity transparent 0 to opaque 255 Peo ane Graphic 1 Content Definition Ne Sab CBr array tT 3 t First Stock 3 D Object flat plane 37 3 D Object File Additional Stock 3
304. s Wobbulation Modi size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Sinewave Vertical with Z axis Wobbulation Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Glow Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Glow Color Cycle Mod1 red cycle speed Mod2 110 Effect green cycle speed Mod3 blue cycle speed Mode 1 Reserved defaults to Effect 0 75 79 Downward Vertical Streaks Mod1 start positon gq Mod2 streak angle Mod3 fade Gaussian Blur Mod1 sample distance Mod2 filter pass number Mod3 curve shape Sharpen Mod1 sample distance Mod2 filter pass number Mod3 sharpen scale Reserved Defaults to effect mode 0 Spherical mapping control 1 Mod 1 projector y offset Mod2 sphere y offset Mod3 vertical size Defaults to 0 and is ignored unless Spherical Mapping is selected as a Global Effect option Spherical mapping control 2 Mod 1 vertical bend correction Mod2 vertical bend correction center Mod3 horizontal size adjustment Defaults to 0 and is ignored unless Spherical Mapping is selected as a Global Effect option Pan and Scan Mod1 horizontal position Mod2 vertical position Mod3 Zoom These Modifier parameters adjust the option 114 Effect Mode 1 selected in Channel 110 for DL 2 fixtures or 0 255 0 100 Modifier 1 Channel 89 for Axon Media Servers The type of adjustment and the default value depends on the particular effect 112 91 Fit cana NOTE Setting the Graphic Effect Mode DMX 0 255 0 100 SUES 25
305. s output to a Sets Longitude Sets Latitude Sets Latitude portion of a sphere s outside surface Angle Angle Center 143 Spherical Mapping Inside maps output to a portion Sets Longitude Sets Latitude Sets Latitude of a sphere s inside surface Angle Angle Center Mattes apply provided mattes over image Matte Effect Matte Pattern Texture Source Source 145 Collage Generator 360 adds right and left edge Selects Array Selects array a Edge blending to enable 360 degree panoramas Type cell to display blending 255 Pan and Scale Zooms in and pans across a Horizontal Vertical Zoom in still image position position and out DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 111 Selects Array Selects array Adjusts Edge Type cell to display blending CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Global Control The Global Control parameter allows access to different global control modes How you set the Global control parameter determines the functionality of the Global Control Modifier parameter Setting this parameter to a DMX value of 255 brings up On screen programming statistics In this case the Global Control Modifier parameter controls the text color Shutdown and Reset Options When the Global Intensity parameter is set to 0 you can Shutdown Axon DMX Value 120 130 or Reset the internal Graphics Engine for either Axon or DL 2 media servers DMX Value 145 149 Four in One Control Option The Four in One control option maps the media file con
306. s will not be necessary and you can proceed to Lesson 1 To set up the DL 2 fixture for the tutorials 1 Select the DL 2 s MOTION fixture and set the Dimmer parameter to 100 DMX 255 This will open the mechanical iris 2 Set the GLOBAL fixture Intensity parameter and GRAPHIC OBJECT 1 fixture Opacity parameter to 100 DMX 255 3 Select the GRAPHIC OBJECT 1 and set the Media Folder to DMX 39 HES Setup and Test Dial the Media File to DMX 5 This will bring up the convergence bitmap 4 Select the DL 2 s MOTION fixture and adjust Pan and Tilt prarameters until the fixture is projecting to the desired location and adjust the Focus parameter until the convergence bitmap becomes sharply focused 5 Now you can remove or knockout the GRAPHIC OBJ ECT from the programmer and still retain the MOTION and GLOBAL parameter settings 6 Store these values somewhere on your console to a palette or preset so that this setup can be quickly recalled whenever you need to adjust the Pan Tilt and Focus DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 45 CHAPTER 5 Tutorials Lesson l Cross Fading Between Graphic Objects 1 On your lighting console set MOTION fixture Dimmer parameter for DL 2 fixtures the GLOBAL fixture Intensity parameter and GRAPHIC OBJECT 1 fixture Opacity parameter to 100 DMX value 255 Define Graphic Object 2 Set the Media Folder Parameter for the GRAPHIC OBJECT 1 fixture to DMX value 4 This selects pre
307. scaler y axis scaler O M Color to Alpha varies the transparency level of an Red to Green to Blue to image s component color values alpha alpha alpha Color to Alpha Inverted varies the transparency Inverted level of the inverse of an image s component color green values to alpha Controls raindrop rate Raindrop simulates raindrops falling on a liquid Controls surface size speed D oO Inverted blue to alpha Inverted red to alpha 2 Texture Mixing Crossfades between the current Selects Crossfade g Selects Source Source Effect Between image and another graphic object texture Texture Level Textures O1 Im le and Rotate scales and rotates the Selects Sets age SCA lt a Scales Rotation Rotation media file texture applied to a 3 D object Image Angle Speed Film Roll scrolls the media file texture horizontally Horizontal Vertical roll Scales or vertically roll speed speed Image Pixelate divides the image into rectangles using Sets amount of Scales Scales the center pixel color of each box as it s color Pixelation horizontally vertically Faux LED divides the image into a grid of circles Faux Tile divides the image into square tiles Tile divides the Faux Tile divides the image into square tiles into square tiles Color peaking Fuzzifier creates a multi image blurring effect mONzoNIAI venice Fuzz decay distance distance Drop Shadow creates a scalable drop shadow Horizontal Vertical shadow Shadow behind the
308. se the CMY parameter controls to adjust the three Effect Mode 1 Modifier parameters for both the Global and Graphic fixture types The default for Effect Mode 1 is set to CMY1 as well Effect Mode 2 Modifier channels are labeled Mod 1 Mod 2 and Mod 3 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 173 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Texture Mixing Effect Mode parameter DMX value 51 Use Texture Mixing to mix two media file outputs on one object With this option you can crossfade the texture media file content from one active Graphic Object to the texture of another Graphic Object When the Texture Mixing option is selected in the example to the right the media file output of Graphic Object 1 minus applied effects is selected and mixed to Graphic Object 2 at an opacity of 50 Modifier 1 Selects the Source file for the texture you want to pull A DMX value 1 selects the media file content from Graphic Object 1 a value 2 selects from Graphic Object 2 and a value 3 selects from Graphic Object 3 Modifier 2 Selects the effect level you want to use for the source file A DMX value 0 selects the original file without effects If effects have been applied to the image A DMX value 1 includes the first applied effect DMX 2 includes the first two effects and DMX 3 includes the first three effects Modifier 3 Adjusts Graphic Object opacity of the source texture from a DMX value of 0 transparent to 255 100
309. seeeeeeeeeesssggannens 213 Replacing the Fixture FICK srren a a nE E Ea TAA ES 213 Cleaning the Internal Projector Filter sesssssrssrrrsrrenrrenrrrerrrerrresrrerrresrne 214 Replacing The LAMP sicicisesetecscssadeaes sees eet wswe winced eea Eaua AEA AAAA Ea seeseecmesadaeasens 215 Replacing The FUSE sesiiscssnssiscicsecedaveseveredivar aces sien ERA aR ANNAAS 216 Cleaning or Replacing the Front WindOW sssssnnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 216 Replacing Motor Driver Boards ssssssss2s222u222 2222 2 222220uu2220uu200uununnnnnnnnn 217 Fixture Head Driver BOard esrin tel ctac deed iat cena adit tonneau danas 218 Replacing Fixture Base Driver Board cccccccceeceeseeee eset eeeesseeeeeeeeeeeesesgunanees 218 TFOUDIESNOOUNG is ce esdetecscccacanetaedsevedanadasadacndasavevacucxseuss saaceeasseanuseeaneeasaueudess 219 BURON SNOUT COMMANA ister unsure ecettauieee poapeeeee aun A E 219 Status Message Menu Display ccccececeeceeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseeneeeeeeeesgggennnes 219 BUTEOM ACTON Jstatmioninawascn rates deta tucscoteneominiuiae out A a N 220 DRAG UNV MET ease acct gmc E E rn tel idee A 220 Supported Error Warning Messages ccceccce cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeesegananees 220 SY SECM State WEDS irer y estan mete Neds as N EE E r E 221 BOalGiL ED Slates dadanccercdsnsteasceek se E ET E EE TEA 222 General Troubleshooting SUGGESTIONS s ssrsssrrssrrrerrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrres
310. settings for this parameter accommodate Indoor and Outdoor lighting conditions Orientation The Camera Orientation parameter can Vertically Invert Flip or Horizontally Invert Mirror the camera s image being viewed by the camera All four combinations of Vertical and Horizontal Invert are available Camera Effects The Camera Effects parameter provides several options for manipulating the camera s image This parameter provides the ability to convert the camera s image to black and white B amp W or invert the color Negative art A snapshot can also be taken of the camera s image Freeze Frame with or without one of these effects applied 186 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter l6 Content Management Application CMA A Content Management Application CMA running on an Axon media server or a computer connected through an Ethernet network gives you remote control of content software and configuration management functions The Content Management Application software that shipped on CD with your Axon Media Server communicates is used to e Upload and download custom digital content to fixtures e Configure units for use in a DMX environment e Update software for multiple units Both DL 2 fixtures and Axon media servers can be accessed remotely by the CMA if they are connected to the same Ethernet network DMX Universe 1 DMX Universe 2 Ll T AXON lt MNO e m oA Ee o S o I D
311. siest and most reliable content selection rendering and output Rotating a 3 D Object The Rotation parameters for each object control 3 D object rotation with 16 bit precision You can rotate a 3 D object up to 720 in either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction around the X Y and or Z axis Note Remember that rotation changes could affect an object s relationship to other objects When you rotate an object you are rotating it around the selected axis X Rotation produces the effect of a top to bottom flip Y Rotation produces a left to right flip Z Rotation causes a circular motion X Rotation Y Rotation Z Rotation Rotates image Rotates image Rotates image about the x axis about the y axis about the z axis DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 67 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale The Rotation parameters suggested default values are the midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value range which is equal to no rotation Increasing the DMX value from the midpoint indexes the object in a clockwise direction Reducing the DMX value below the midpoint indexes the object in a counterclockwise direction When the DMX value for a rotation parameter is greater than the 720 limit in either direction the object begins rotating continuously Additional adjustment to the DMX values increases the speed of continuous rotation Counter clockwise Clockwise i Indexed Rotation o Indexed Rotation 720 0 i 0 720 Rot
312. sing Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color 34 using Modi red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Scan Line Mod1 selects scan line as texture Mod2 fades from original image to converted image Mod3 not used reserved Transparent Wipes Mod1 width of transparent area Mod2 center of transparent area Mod3 transparency mode Pixel Twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center Mod3 direction and amount of twist Picture in Picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture center Mod3 subpicture size Magnifying Lens Mod1 x lens center Mod2 y lens center Mod3 lens size Magnifying Lens 2 Mod1 x lens center Mod2 lens center Mod3 lens size Cartoon Edge Mod1 Edge Color Mod2 Contrast Mod3 Edge detection sensitivity Color DeConverge Mod1 Moves red up Mod2 Moves green down and right Mod3 Moves blue down and left Horizontal Mirror Mod1 mirror center Mod2 and Mods not used RGB Swap to BGR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to RBG Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GRB 43 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 250 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to color Modi Color Scheme selection Mod2 Zero intensity point in color scheme Mod3 Fading Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity transparent Mod1 Color Scheme Mod2 Intensity
313. sing or expanding the image vertically Default DMX Value 128 50 no adjustment DMX value settings below the midpoint of the range compress the image vertically from maximum compression at a value of 0 to no compression at a value of 128 Y Ratio DMX value 2 100 DMX value settings above the midpoint of the atio value 255 100 range expands the image vertically from no expansion at a value of 128 to maximum expansion at a value of 255 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 119 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Global Viewpoint Mode The Global Viewpoint Mode parameter defines a 3 D space and the Viewpoint Position parameters modify your viewing location with the defined 3 D space Each Viewpoint Mode uses three values to specify a viewpoint in space This point in space is specified by the horizontal angle vertical angle and zoom Within any 3 D space you can choose the viewpoint target as e Center of 3 D space e Center of Object 1 e Center of Object 2 e Center of Object 3 Default DMX Value 0 Perspective view Spherical Coordinates with the focus at the center of the 3 D space Perspective View Spherical Coordinates This Viewpoint mode creates a 3 D space with a perspective view of a 3 D space Viewpoints are located in terms of X Y and Z positions located on a sphere surrounding the image DEOBAL Z VIEWPOINT Global Viewpoint set with X Y and Z Output displayed with global positions all e
314. splay 0 36767 0 49 X Position Centers object along X axis in display 32768 32768 50 Moves object right from center of display a Moves object down from center of display 0 36767 0 49 32768 50 Maximum object size along Z axis 10 1 0 0 0 Y Position Centers object along Y axis in display 32768 50 Moves object up from center of display pais Moves object nearer from center of display 0 36767 0 49 Centers object along Z axis in display 32768 50 32768 50 Moves object back along Z axis at center of display DL2 Digital Light User Manual 271 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Graphic 3 Function Standard Protocol i Selects transparency level from completely i i Opacity transparent 0 to opaque 255 AASS RA Graphic 3 Content Definition ne lt lt 1 4 2 7 4 First Stock 3 D Object ue plane 134 113 3 D Object File 2 a First User 3 D Objects Additional User Objects 1 sas 255 No selection selection HES Folder 1 erer HES folder 2 40 135 114 Media Folder First User folder 44 User folder 41 e o u Folders 42 239 a 239 Reserved 240 254 254 Ha video camera capture The Media File parameter is ignored No No selection 136 115 Media File Doer Media File Additional Media Files 2 255 a TES 137 116 Defines the beginning of a Media File segment as 0 100 138 117 a percentage of the movie length ree i 118 Defines the end of a Media File segment as a 0 a0 1
315. ssing the Fixture Hours Reset returns the value to 0 Info_Version Screen 2 The Software Version field and Firmware i software Version Version field display software versions as A Firmware Version 12048 lt V Major Minor Build z Windows XPe 2 0 0 A Fixture Name field displays a name for easy m A Pan Ened Version 1 0 reference in developing your show using the Tilt Encd Version 1 0 Content Management Application F Unique ID 0 011112F4B81 Fixture Name 0011112F4B81 IP Address 192 168 1 100 Info_Status Tab z 3 This screen displays status errors and warnings Hot Sates hone on items including A Filter Life Out Error e Temperature z T e Filter life 2 Eii e Lamp life gt e USB and Camera Communication e USB Security peer pees Error Warning Messages on page 220 34 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Reset Screen The Reset screen provides options to reset Shutdown and upgrade software Reboot Media Server restarts the fixture s internal graphics engine software Delete User Content removes all user content on the selected fixture s Upgrade Factory Content lets you reinstall factory content in a recovery situation Note A copy of the DL 2 Factory Content can be obtained only from High End Systems customer service Set DMX File Test Info CHAPTER 3 The DL 2 Menu System Reboot Media Server _ Restart Delete User Content Delete Upgrad
316. st B Pixel Twist swirls a portion of the texture y direction and center center degree 35 Picture in picture duplicates the texture and X a y subpicture subpicture overlays it on the original a center size Magnifying lens applies spherical overlay that magnifies a portion of the texture X lens center Y lens center Lens size Magnifying lens 2 applies spherical overlay that magnifies a portion of the texture X lens center Y lens center Lens size Cartoon Edge creates variable outline around Enhances Edge detection Moves Green Moves Blue Color DeConverge offsets pixels from original Moves Red position pixels up Pixels down Pixels down and right and left Transparent Wipes opens the selected graphic EEEN wine Selects to reveal another graphic positioned behind it p center of wipe DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 101 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects DMX Effect Mode Value Name Definition Ei Horizontal Mirror creates a mirror effect Not Used Not Used RGB swap to RGB swapto BGR Red to Blue Blueto Red to Red 3 RGB swap to GRB Green to Red Selects zero intensity point AK Controls fading Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity Selects Color to color Scheme gt gt Intensity key turns pixels of selected intensity a Controls transparent bandwidth Transparency D O1 Seeds random generator RGB Scale varies color value Red Green Blue 48 Tiling On x axis
317. stment and the default value depends on the particular visual mode option Visual Mode For more about Modifier parameter functionality ey 0 Modifier 2 see Visual Mode on page 80 and Visual Mode 9 299 0 100 Options on page 82 248 DL2 Digital Light User Manual DL 2 an Off no effects selection o CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB reduces color values 1 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values D Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta 3 Mod3 yellow RGB Add All Pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add 2 All Pixels 5 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add non black pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR 7 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to BGR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 1 if color value lt DMX value invert color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 2 if color value gt DMX invert color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 10 Solarize if color value lt DMX set color to 0 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 4 if color value gt DMX set color to 0 12 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue DotP and Resample 13 Mod1 Mod2 and Mod3 control resampling Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue All or Nothing Color value greater than M
318. sts Cokol Alternate content optimization option Color color chif Inverts Black and White components Sets Black Sets White Invert B W Comparison Comparison Color remains unaffected Level Level Texture Crossfades between the current image Selects the Controls a hi l Source Graphic Crossfade Mixing and another graphic object texture Object Texture NO o_o 80 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Visual Mode Option DMX a Image Scale Scales and rotates the media file Sets 13 Scales Image Rotation and Rotate texture applied to a 3 D object Angle Scrolls the media file texture Sets Horizontal Sets Vertical horizontally or vertically Roll Speed Roll Speed Divides the image into rectangles Adi Pixelate using the center pixel color of each Jue e armounio Not Used pixelation box as it s color Faux LED Divides the image into a grid of circles Varies grid from Varies the to mimic an LED wall 100x100 to 10x10 spacing and B W 7 Varies grid from Varies the Divides the image into square tiles 100x106 to 10x10 spacing and B W i i Sets horizontal Zoom Biur Zooms into a position on the image PASION Sets vertical with a mult image blurring effect center position center Chroma Shifts the red blue and green Horizontal Vertical Shift component colors shift shift ShakeNBake Introduces a random vibration effect Horizontal shake a Pan l T l ee l a Zooms in a
319. t 4 Run the safety cable through the loop on the fixture s base and around the truss Note High End Systems does not recommend operating the DL 2 fixture with the base perpendicular to the stage floor fixture mounted sideways Sideways mounting will result in significantly decreased lamp life Linking DL 2 Fixtures DL 2 fixtures should be linked to a standard DMX512 link for control by a DMX desk as well as a Ethernet fixture link for CMA functions Setting up a Standard DMX Link The number of fixtures on a link will be determined by the combined number of channels required by all the fixtures The DMX channel range of a DL 2 fixture is determined by the protocol mode you choose e DL 2 Standard Protocol 170 channels e DL 2 Dual Protocol 132 channels e Single Protocol 94 channels Use data grade cable and 5 pin XLR cable connectors For cable and connector specification see Cable and Connector Specifications on page 293 Test each cable with a voltage ohm meter VOM to verify correct polarity and to make sure that the negative and positive pins are not grounded or shorted to the shield or to each other CAUTION Do not connect anything to the ground lug on the XLR connectors Do not connect or allow contact between the common cable shield and the fixture s chassis ground Grounding the common could cause a ground loop and or erratic behavior To link one or more fixtures to a DMX controller 1 Con
320. t User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Off no effects selection CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB reduces color values 1 Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to All Pixels increases color values D Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY Add to Non black Pixels increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta 3 Mod3 yellow RGB Add All Pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add 2 All Pixels 5 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Add non black pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR 7 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to BGR Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 1 if color value lt DMX value invert color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 2 if color value gt DMX invert color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue 10 Solarize if color value lt DMX set color to 0 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue NA Solarize 4 if color value gt DMX set color to 0 12 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue DotP and Resample 13 Mod1 Mod2 and Mod3 control resampling Color Cycle DMX value controls cycle speed 14 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue All or Nothing Color value greater than Mod value color 255 else color 0 15 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solid Color RGB Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Invert Modi red to inverted red Mod2 green to 17 inverted green Mods blue to invert
321. t to 255 100 maximum Modifier 3 Adjusts edge detection sensitivity from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Collage Generator Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 134 Standard or DMX value 141 Enhanced NOTE The Standard Collage Generator option should only be used with legacy shows The Enhanced Collage Generator option s higher resolution for arrays provides the best output The DL2 Standard Collage Generator enables multiple DL2 units to create virtually seamless panoramic media projections controlled from a DMX console You can display either stock or custom content For more information about this global effect option see Chapter 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Effect on page 123 The Enhanced Collage Generator option DMX 141 provides cleaner images and better edge blending Modifier 1 Selects which type of collage array to use from DMX Values 1 63 A DMX value of 0 No collage DMX Values of 64 255 are reserved and default to No collage Modifier 2 Selects which portion of the grid a particular DL2 will display DMX values 0 63 step through grid pattern selected by the Modifier 1 parameter DMX values 64 255 default to the upper left corner of the grid Modifier 3 Adjusts edge blending between the selected portion of the image being projected by the fixture and adjacent portions being projected by other fixtures DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 153
322. taetaa EA wate ase 172 spherical Mapping OUISIVS arose eter eetee se tetera e ASEA 172 Spherical Mapping INSA E rrene aa a a a nde 172 Modifier Parameter Adjustments ssssssssrssrrrerrrerrrrsrrrsrrrsrererrrerrrerrrerrrene 172 Texture MKN aena a a a a a A a a ans 174 Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular s ssssssssssrsssrrnesrrrsrrrsrererrrerrrerrresrrrerne 175 Text re Ripple Circular seters ea E ENE AEE r ERARA A EEEE 175 Texture RIDIS HOLZONES secorra a N e ET A E a A 176 Texture Ripple Vertical rras tonsure a A a A EA AAA 176 PUN anoa T A EAT nee A nate a 177 Transparent WIPES eeina a E E AS 177 LOO B a saaa ET Gan dai E EE O Ea 178 Chapter 14 Fixture Motion Functions This chapter describes mechanical control for the DL 2 fixture with it s internal projector Pant and Tilt setetesceeressresesssescuenuetendeustsusveueusboteanesieencancnnaaieaananuadesedesatacecasaaate 179 DIMER was asc iter ote ee nants aia a aa aata tahaa keai aha aE SEESE 179 FOCUS erssaece cei aisles wiuitiuinisltininiaiaisiwialuiuwiulaiumiouietnisiutantantanta niente bis is a aaia 179 ZOOM saranane eee EEEE AUAA eben ebanbbaneeaus 179 MSpe d Motor Speed sirririeipensara ebanneesnaEeesaeEsalanEeeaA 180 Control Function ODtIONS gt sssrin a aaeanoa inin ni 180 Fixture OPera tiOn ai a a E a E OA EA 180 Projector CONTO l ceesre a T distances A A 181 Control Parameter Projector OptionS sssssssssrssrrrnerrrrrrerrrrrerrrrrrrrrrrerrrrerne 181 Usi
323. tance Mod3 fuzz decay Drop Shadow Mod1 horizontal size Mod2 58 vertical size Mod3 shadow opacity Zoom Blur Mod1 horizontal position center 59 Mod2 vertical position center Mod3 zoom Chroma Shift Mod1 horizontal shift Mod2 vertical shift Mod3 Scale ShakeNBake Mod1 horizontal shake Mod2 61 vertical shake Mod3 Scale Slats Vertical Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade 234 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Slats Horizontal Mod1 number Mod2 displacement Mod3 fade Reserved Defaults to effect mode 0 ca 79 Downward Vertical Streaks Mod1 start nes 2 Mod2 streak angle Mod3 fade Gaussian Blur Mod1 sample distance Mod2 filter pass number Mod3 scales the effect Sharpen Mod1 sample distance Mod2 filter pass number Mod3 sharpen scale Reserved Defaults to effect mode 0 KJ 127 Mask color Mod1 red Mod2 green 128 Mod3 blue Edge fade color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Mask color and Edge fade color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mods blue Background Color Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Background Color Cycle Mod1 red speed Mod2 green speed Mod3 blue speed Framing Modi Mode Mod2 Profile Mod3 Source Collage Mod1 grid style selection Mod2 grid Global portion displayed Mod3 edge blend adjustment Effect 1 Corrects output for vertical convex cylinder Mo
324. te is www suzyvaughan com Suzy Vaughan is also an attorney specializing in intellectual property issues How much does it typically cost to license copyrighted material The answer depends entirely on what material you want to use and how you plan to use it Prices can range from hundreds of dollars for photography content to thousands of dollars for a highly desirable film video clip Since price is content sensitive the best thing to do is to contact a clearinghouse like Suzy Vaughan Associates and let them find out for you viii DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Table of Contents DL 2 Digital Lightwith Collage Software cccccccccc cece eee ee ee ee ees i Contacting High End SYSLEMS cciccascsnccedananctessacvuntaverssensassidacaneenseusuetensiaweewweeie ii PAE ae EEE E E AE E EEA A cos eee as eee iii Declaration of Conformity s sssssssrsssrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrerrrrnrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrnne IV Product Modification Warning cccccccceeeeeeeee eset tees eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeggannags V FCC ANTONMOUON sie ciuntmeieanaeatcuctontauies EE etn eeaatedieacees V Important Safety IMO Mator gusaeni eiaa AE ENNES V EEL E E EEA tance cee E E E E A A EE O vi FOO Machine Warning Say vosectn2cttany chi eeoeenuandiere een AEO A a vi Packaged Media NOUCE a c2stscseettscceseatnnwwenrncacniedamnniutentasidesaveanerstedconeadadecad vi Warnan y IMOrmMaHON senrirsrea a a EEA E Sreeecsumuusert ss vi What You
325. tent of each of the graphics objects and the combined output to a four quadrant grid This option helps you visualize what the graphics engine is doing When the Global Control parameter is set to a DMX value 253 you can use the Global Control Modifier parameter to control the Four in One control option You will be able to observe the Collage and Curved Surface support effects as well as up to 3 effects applied to each graphical object Setting a DMX value 31 32 or 33 lets you display up to three effects applied to a Graphic Object These effects are accessed according to rendering hierarchy used by the graphics engine The following table sets up an example of three graphic objects with x s indicating applied effects Effect Hierarchy eran Object aa ia Object rapa Object 112 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Using this example the following table illustrates the results for Four in One control values selected in the Global Control Modifier parameter DMX Value 4 in 1 Display Graphic Object 1 Texture Visual Effect Graphic Object 2 Texture Effect 1 Graphic Object 3 Texture Visual Effect Graphic Object 1 Texture Visual Effect Effect 2 Final Composite Image Graphic Object 2 Texture Effect 1 Effect 2 Graphic Object 3 Texture Visual Effect Effect 1 Graphic Object 1 Texture Visual Effect Effect 2 Final Composite Image
326. that show with one operation To clone user content 1 In the Management Client Window select All Server in the left pane 2 Select the Server with the content you want to clone in the right pane 3 Select Clone Content from the Media Files or 3D Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list A Clone Content Wizard lets you select one or more servers on the fixture network as the destination for the cloned content Clone Content Wizard HIGH END SYSTEMS Select the destination media servers Name IP Address Software Version Model O brian 192 168 1 106 1 0 0 206 O wo 192 168 1 108 1 0 0 218 A three 192 168 1 103 1 0 0 218 Back Next gt Cancel The cloning process erases all destination server s user content and replaces it with the selected server s user content Stock content is unaffected DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 201 CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA Deleting Content To delete all User Content from a server Delete Content 1 In the Management Client Window select a All Server in the left pane HIGH END SYSTEMS 2 Select the Server with the content you want to delete in the right pane Delete all content from one 3 From the drop down menu or the right click popup list select Delete Content A dialog box OKs cancels the action DMX Summary The DMX Summary lets you view all the content for a single server in a table format with the follow
327. the CMA window A Status Bar at the bottom of the page indicates the number of files or folders within a selected folder in the left pane as well as free space on the local computer harddrive and it s IP address Viewing Server Identification Information Selecting the All Server view displays all the DL 2 and Axon servers on the fixture network In the following example four servers have been identified on the network The right pane contains the following details in a table format e Server ID number defaults to 1 but can be configured in the CMA or in the DL 2 fixture s Menu system e Server Name is a name you assign to a DL 2 fixture or Axon server e IP Address is assigned to that unit by the router or Auto IP Software Version Number 190 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA Model identifies the media server as either DL 2 or Axon HighFnd D1 Management Client Ble Servers Help HIGH END SYSTEMS EE BE 4A Seras 4 servers Sollware Version m bnen 5 E brian 192 168 1 106 1 00 20 OL fe three 2 p 2 hwo 192168 1 108 100 718 DL2 amp dats Bp three 192168 1 103 10073 DL2 WO fae P j 1 321681104 100 214 fy Al Configuration a re sai NOTE Clicking in a column heading sorts the table according to the values in that column In the All Server view the drop down menu or a right click on a server in the right pane gives you the these opt
328. tilizing two DMX channels for a single parameter 65535 values become available for controlling and adjusting parameter functions This is known as 16 bit DMX You can adjust 16 bit DMX values in both coarse and fine increments The first channel of the pair provides coarse control changes of the DMX value in increments of 256 The second channel provides fine control and changes of the DMX value in increments of 1 Individual access of the two DMX channels used with 16 bit parameters varies by lighting console Most modern DMX consoles bind these two channels into a single 16 bit parameter to accurately perform 16 bit crossfades Consult your lighting console manual for further information DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 37 CHAPTER 4 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start Determining a DMX Start Channel The DMX Start Channel is the first channel of a device s channel range on a DMX link There are 512 available channels on each DMX universe divided among all the devices in a particular universe A device must have a unique DMX Start Channel number in order to respond independently to controller commands To determine each device s DMX Start Channel identify the footprint of every device on the universe The device s footprint is the number of consecutive DMX channels a device requires and is determined by the channels in the fixture s protocol The fixture s DMX channel range must not overlap any other device s channel range on t
329. ting keystone x values toward 255 100 moves the respective corner x positions horizontally toward the center of that image edge Adjusting keystone y values toward 255 100 causes the respective corner y positions to be moved vertically toward the center of that edge of the image Tip These parameters can also be used to create interesting skewing as a design effect Keystone Top Left X DMX value 85 Keystone Top Right Y DMX value 170 Keystone Top Left Y DMX value 85 All other Keystone parameter DMX values 255 Keystone Top Right X DMX value 85 Keystone Top Right Y DMX value 85 118 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 11 Global Functions X Ratio The X Ratio Parameter shapes the output to adjust for keystone effects created in certain output situations This parameter adjusts the output by compressing or expanding the image horizontally Default DMX Value 128 50 no adjustment DMX value settings below the midpoint of the range compress the image horizontally from maximum compression at a value of 0 to no compression at a value of 128 DMX value settings above the midpoint of the range expand the image horizontally from no expansion at a value of 128 to maximum expansion at a value of 255 Original media file X Ratio DMX value 255 100 Y Ratio The Y Ratio parameter shapes the output to adjust for keystone effects created in certain output situations This parameter adjusts the output by compres
330. tions Opacity and Effects Film Roll Visual Mode parameter DMX value 14 This option scrolls the media file texture horizontally or vertically independent from the 3 D object it overlays and allows you to control the scrolling speed Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint scroll left increasing in speed as you approach 0 Values above the midpoint scroll right increasing in speed to 255 100 Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint scroll down increasing in speed as you approach 0 Values above the midpoint scroll up increasing in speed to 255 100 Fire Gradient Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 8 This option maps image colors to a Red to Yellow gradient creating a fiery effect Modifier 1 Maps the image color values from no adjustment at a value of 0 to all red to yellow tones at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Not Used Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 8 Visual Mode Modifier 1 DMX value 255 100 88 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects Fuzzifier Visual Mode parameter DMX value 18 This option blurs the media file texture horizontally or vertically independent from the 3 D object it overlays and allows you to control the scrolling speed and image scaling Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 0 no adjustment Increasing DMX values blur
331. tions Rotation Position Scale 78 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and ffects You can adjust opacity and apply a variety of color mixing and geometric effects to each individual Graphic Object The parameters described in this chapter are set for each Graphic Object you define Parameters for composite image intensity and effects are described in Chapter 11 Global Functions Note The suggested default DMX values given for each parameter are recommended to build libraries that provide the easiest and most reliable content selection rendering and output Opacity Adjusting an object s opacity allows one object to show through another You can adjust the Opacity of an individual 3 D object from completely transparent to full opacity using this parameter Increase opacity from not visible at a value of zero to full opacity at a value of 255 Default DMX Value 0 completely transparent The Global Intensity parameter provides a similar adjustment to the combined image This global control parameter controls intensity levels on the overall image see Global Intensity on page 107 When you have multiple objects in relation to each other the Global Intensity parameter is the best way to apply a fade to the composite image Tip The Dimmer Object Opacity and Global Intensity parameters all have to be greater than O to make a defined image visible Graphic Object 1 Intensity DM
332. to BRG Modi red to inverted blue Mod2 green to 19 inverted red Mod3 blue to inverted green APPENDIX A d Axon DMX Protocol DL2 Digital Light User Manual 0 4 NA 279 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Texture Ripple Horizontal 99 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Vertical 23 Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular Mod1 size Mod2 rate Mod3 offset Chromakey Fine Select key color using 26 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Medium Select key color using 97 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Coarse Select key color using 28 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Fine Select key color using 29 Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Medium Select key color 30 using Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Chromakey Inverse Coarse Select key color 34 using Modi red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Scan Line Mod1 selects scan line as texture Mod2 fades from original image to converted image Mod3 not used reserved Transparent Wipes Mod1 width of transparent area Mod2 center of transparent area Mod3 transparency mode Pixel Twist Mod1 x twist center Mod2 y twist center Mod3 direction and amount of twist Picture in Picture Mod1 x subpicture center Mod2 y subpicture center Mod3 subpicture size Magnifying Lens Mod1 x lens
333. to magenta ata value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Transitions the green component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to yellow ata value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Transitions the blue component from no adjustment at a value of 0 to cyan ata value of 255 100 RGB Scale M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 47 Reduce and increase color components in the image as a part of the overall color range Note the maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and Mod3 sets overall color range Modifier 1 Scales Red in the Media file A DMX Value of 128 no adjustment DMX values below 128 50 reduce color value DMX values over 128 increase color value Modifier 2 Scales Green in the Media file A DMX Value of 128 no adjustment DMX values below 128 50 reduce color value DMX values over 128 increase color value Modifier 3 Scales Blue in the Media file A DMX Value of 128 no adjustment DMX values below 128 50 reduce color value DMX values over 128 increase color value DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 149 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Swap to BGR M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 41 This option allows you to swap colors All red values become green and all blue values become red Green values are unaffected Modifier 1 Transitions red color component to blue from 0 no color change to 255 100 green Modifier 2 No change to green color component Modifier
334. trol on page 181 The LCD Menu display is off If the Blue LED is off the Computer isn t receiving power Press and hold the Top and Bottom Tab select buttons to restart computer see Menu Panel Components on page 21 e If the screen is not backlit press the LCD power button see LCD Display Adjustment Buttons on page 22 e Check the Video In Video Out adapter on the video card middle plug connection e Check that the connectors for the composite video cable at the LCD Screen and the Video card are seated securely Fixture behaves erratically or Verify that the last unit on the DMX link is properly terminated see Setting won t respond to DMX up a Standard DMX Link on page 10 control e To control the DL 2 with DMX you must first enable DMX through the menu System see DMX_ Control Screen on page 27 or the CMA see Viewing and Editing Server Configuration on page 204 e If you re using DMX to control the projector using its native menu system make sure you send a safe command after each button command otherwise it s analogous to pressing a button on the projector menu system and not releasing it see page Projector Control on page 181 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 223 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Frequently Asked Questions How are DL 2 fixture IP addresses determined In environments that utilize numerous DL 2s is there risk of IP address conflicts DL 2 fixture IP addresses ar
335. ulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 72 This option creates a Vertical sinewave pattern and then varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the x axis without affecting the media file that is applied as a texture Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum offset 170 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Slats M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Vertical Slats Effect Mode parameter DMX value 62 Horizontal Slats Effect Mode parameter DMX value 63 These options render the image in offset slats Modifier 1 Adjusts the number of slats from from a DMX value of 0 no slate to 255 the maximum number of slats Modifier 2 Adjusts the displacement of the slats from a DMX value of 0 no displacement to 255 image completely removed from Original content screen Modifier 3 When the DMX value for Modifier 1 gt 0 Modifier 3 fades from the original image to the slatted image A DMX value of 0 the original image with no effect applied Increasing the value fades to the slatted image with 255 the slatted image at full opacity Vertical Slat Option Horizontal Slat Option ffect Mode paramete
336. um red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Glow Color Cycle W Object Effect JGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 74 Glow colorizes and creates a glow on the 3 D object separate from the media texture on it You can apply this option to any 3 D object no matter which media file texture is applied to it This parameter provides an option to view a 3 D object without an associated texture Modifier 1 Defines the red color component speed A DMX value of 128 50 default cycle speed DMX Values above the midpoint increase cycle speed in a forward direction to 255 100 fastest change speed DMX values below the midpoint increase cycle speed ina backward direction to 0 fastest change speed Modifier 2 Defines the green color component speed in the same way as Modifier 1 Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component speed in the same way as Modifier 1 Intensity Key W Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 45 This option turns pixels of a selected intensity transparent or applies the reverse effect Modifier 1 Selects intensity from a DMX value of 0 no intensity to 255 100 full intensity Modifier 2 Selects intensity bandwidth from a DMX value of 0 narrowest bandwidth to 255 widest bandwidth
337. urdy stable surface that will support more than the 53 5 kg 118 Ib weight of the DL 2 fixture If the surface is above floor height use Safety cables to secure the fixture to the surface Truss Mounting When mounting the fixture on a truss or another type of support e Verify the truss or support will handle the combined weight of all the devices on the truss e Always mount the DL 2 fixture with the mounting bracket assembly that shipped with your fixture and a safety cable attached using the mounting bracket to the fixture s base WARNING Before mounting disconnect power to the fixture If it has been operating allow the fixture to cool for five minutes before handling Do not use C Clamps to mount the DL 2 fixture to truss AN Use the following steps to mount a DL 2 fixture on a standard truss 1 Due to it s size and weight at least two people should support the fixture while another attaches clamps and safety cables Always stand on a firm stable surface when mounting a fixture to its support 2 Mount the clamps that shipped with fixture to the mounting brackets and then attach the two mounting brackets to the base of the fixture using the provided quarter turn screws Bracket screw holes cable loop DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration 3 Tighten the clamps firmly to the fixture s base and to the suppor
338. ure Shutter Priority Shutter Speed 4 a k Auto Exposure Shutter Priority i i Shutter Speed 2 a Auto Exposure Shutter Priority i Shutter Speed 1 Saga Kaaaate Auto Balance 0 63 63 0 25 25 White Balance Outdoor 96 127 39 49 ae R Manual Red and Blue gain value adjustment 128 191 50 74 Freeze Frame OFF B amp W ON 192 223 76 88 Freeze Frame ON B amp W ON 224 255 89 100 Red gain adjustment Requires White Balance Blue Gain adjustment Requires White Balance i Plae Gam Mode 128 191 is jean A DL2 Digital Light User Manual 231 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Global Effect 1 Global Functions Standard Dual Single Protocol 22 1 oe Selects intensity level for the composite image 0 255 0 100 255 100 Intensity Global Effects Off no effects selection O O CMY simulates CMY by subtracting RGB Reduces color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY adds to all pixels Increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow CMY adds to non black pixels Increases color values Mod1 cyan Mod2 magenta Mod3 yellow RGB Add all pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green 4 Mod3 blue RGB Add 2 all pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green 5 Mod3 blue RGB Add non black pixels Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue RGB Swap to GBR Mod1 red Mod2 green 7 Mod3 blue RGB Swap to BRG Mod1 red Mod2 green Mod3 blue Solarize 1 If color value lt DMX va
339. ure on a flat rectangular object that can be positioned to form a drop shadow effect You won t see the shadow until you select a Modifier 1 or 2 DMX value above or below 128 50 Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint move the shadow right as you approach 0 maximum horizontal shadow width Values above the midpoint move the shadow left as you approach 0 maximum horizontal shadow width at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint move the shadow down as you approach 0 maximum vertical shadow width Values above the midpoint move the shadow up as you approach 0 maximum vertical shadow width at a value of 255 100 Original Content Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 19 Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 19 Visual Mode Modifier 1 DMX value 0 Visual Mode Modifier 2 DMX value 255 84 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Opacity and Effects xposure Control Visual Mode Parameter DMX value 10 Exposure Control adjusts the image Black level and Contrast to optimize the projected image for your performance environment You can use it to easily modify the black level and contrast for a Specific application Exposure Control provides finer Contrast and Black level control than the Content Optimization option which pushes colors to saturation more quickly Modifier
340. user numbers e g 1 5 corresponds to DL 2 1 where user number 1 is the motion 2 is the global and 3 5 the graphic fixture types Viewing Output To output an image from a DL 2 fixture 1 Open the dimmer on the motion fixture and assign the global intensity to full 2 Assign an object s opacity to full When programming with Wholehog software the Media Folder and Object parameters default to 1 so choosing any Media File value between 1 and 37 displays a media loop from the HES Core folder Media Folder 1 on a flat 4x3 rectangle Object 1 The Dimmer Global Intensity and Object Opacity parameters all need values greater than zero for an image to be visible If you have trouble viewing output and you are not using a lighting console from High End Systems check that the library for your desk has the correct default settings for all DMX channels 18 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 2 setup and Configuration Shutting Down the Fixture Recommended Shutdown Options There are two recommended ways to shutdown the fixture 1 A DMX controller can shut down the fixture s motion controls and projector remotely with the shutdown option of the control channel see Fixture Operations on page 180 2 The DL 2 fixture automatically shuts down in the event of DMX data loss The default time is 10 min To edit the length of time the fixture waits for a DMX input before shutting down use the CMA see Editing Configuration Valu
341. ustment and the default value Modifier 2 depends on the particular effect 0 255 0 100 NA o For more about Modifier functionality see Global Global Effect 2 Effect Mode 1 and Effect Mode 2 on page Modifier 3 108 and specific effect options listed 0 255 0 100 alphabetically in Chapter 13 DL2 Digital Light User Manual 241 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Global Mask Round is closing om outsidein J o o Round ins closing frominsideot 1 Reciange closing rom ouside in Reciange closing rom inside out Checkerboard varaion 8 Racial wipe vaiatont SB Racial wipe vitona 7 Radial wipe varaton SB Racial wipe vaiaton 8 Tangles varaion n Forzoal dove doshg A Riana les closing fom side tT 18 Pnwhesl ooo Ovals closing from outsidein 2 Ovals closing frominside out 2B Oscilating is closing rom outside in 29 Periodic strobe round iris mask closing from 128 outside in Round iris closing from inside out Rectangle closing from outside in Rectangle closing from inside out 242 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Radial wipe variation2 Radial wipe variation2 variation 2 135 Triangles variation 1 ooo variation 1 138 Horizontal doors Horizontal doors closing 142 Vertical Vertical wipe closing from inside out Vertical wipe closing from inside out from inside out a4 Vertical Vertical panels closing from outside in2 closing from outside in 2 149 H
342. vertical bend correction center Mod3 horizontal size adjustment Defaults to 0 254 and is ignored unless Spherical Mapping is 253 selected as a Global Effect option Pan and Scan Mod1 horizontal position Mod2 vertical position Mod3 Zoom 282 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol These Modifier parameters adjust the option Effect Mode 2 selected in Channel 153 for DL 2 fixtures or Modifier 1 Channel 131 for Axon Media Servers The type of adjustment and the default value depends on the particular effect 0 255 0 100 Effect Mode 2 NOTE Setting the Graphic Effect Mode DMX 0 255 0 100 Modifier 2 253 or 254 activates specific spherical mapping control options for Modifier parameters For more about Modifier parameter functionality see Effect Effect Mode 2 1 Mode and Effect 2 Mode on page 100 and Modifier 3 specific effect options listed alphabetically in Chapter 13 0 255 0 100 DL2 Digital Light User Manual 283 APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol 156 135 157 136 158 137 159 138 160 139 161 140 Graphic 3 Rotation Continuous variable speed counterclockwise 0 object rotation around X axis fast to slow 16382 Continuous rotation stop 16383 25 X axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around X E ae 25 49 49 Rotation axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute re 249 2 vertical flip 0 rotation around X axis 32768 50
343. veusmiihetnke wwe diaaunenays 28 DMA RaW SCEE Crisia A a E AATRE 29 See a E T N E EE A E EA E A A A A 30 Sets FIXCUre SElSeM iner a TENAR EO aaa 30 Set Projector Sreem ccirorin in a aa a EA ease Seis 31 FIE Sc reS ete e E E E T a eee at ata ite 32 X DL 2 Digital Light User Manual MGS Ue Tea ENEE cet ets Glebe a tauren AAEE EA AEE EAS Ea OEE 33 TESE THOME SChECI kiire A E E ra dave Sh Cee Ui ae A 33 rest Self Lest SCreen ciicanimrtelisencultentagadesendecdorhe tess pundulatonann Vase E e 33 POEA parsers sae state secs le anegeaSn sine aba aa a baal Ce E ne 34 WACO OUN chef a coi ionth aspen oy oietuss a cana aint a Comune Sauer oUs 34 NTO Versiono CrON aa wsite tsetse a A we oanantussoue 34 tO SCAtUS NAD E E E sal E ison eu tans mee 34 FRRESEE STEEN iittala tireeae TEE eri onda Saree E meee ee N 35 Chapter 4 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start If you are new to DMX programing this chapter will give you a brief overview on programming Axon and DL 2 media servers followed by a example of using a Wholehog console to patch and display output from an Axon or DL 2 media server DMX Programming OvervieW waccccsccccsceessencseeeeesseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaanseeeeeeaas 37 DMX SLA LINKS cee scueedveriuninns tusnacevaruad ESKATE lace m Oeil led Led eateatat dy 37 8 Dit vs 16 bit DMX Parameters nicer kainen aa E Aa 37 Determining a DMX Start Channel ssssssssrsnsrresrrrsrrrerrrerrrerrrenrrrnrrrrrrrrrererere 38 DL
344. vie time and rotation 2 11 Synchronize to Graphic Object 1 movie time and reverse rotation 1 Synchronize to Graphic Object 2 movie time and reverse rotation 2 Synchronize to Graphic Object 3 movie time and reverse rotation 3 Synchronize to Graphic Object 3 movie time and rotation 3 106 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual Chapter II Global Functions Global Graphic controls affect the composite image created by defining two or three separate object graphics You can adjust intensity define masks select a point in space to view the composite image and control keystone correction Global Intensity The Global Intensity parameter creates a smooth fade to video black that doesn t affect the opacity relationship between individual objects Use this parameter to adjust the intensity of a composite image over the separate Graphic Object s Opacity parameter settings Increase intensity from not visible at a DMX value of 0 to full intensity at a value of 255 100 Default DMX Value 0 no intensity video black Tip The Dimmer Object Opacity and Global Graphic Object 1 Intensity DMX 255 100 Intensity parameters all need DMX values greater Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX 255 100 than O for a defined image to be visible Graphic Object 1 Intensity DMX 255 100 Global Intensity DMX 128 50 Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX 179 70 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 107 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions
345. w 4 Right click anywhere in the CMA Window or use the Server s pull down menu to select Upgrade Software The Upgrade Wizard will prompt you to browse to the location where you saved a copy of latest version 5 After locating the upgrade file press Next The Upgrade Wizard displays a list of all servers connected to the fixture network DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 203 CHAPTER 16 Content Management Application CMA 6 Click in the box to the left of the server name to select a server s for upgrading Upgrade Wizard HIGH END SYSTEMS Choose the servers to upgrade _ Software Version 10 10 10 103 10 10 10 102 10 10 10 10F 10 10 10 10 10 100 10 105 10 10 10 706 Select All Clear All 7 Click Next to continue upgrade The server will reboot after the upgrading the software Mac OS X Upgrading Software To upgrade multiple servers select multiple fixtures from the All Servers list Viewing and Editing Server Configuration The CMA lets you remotely view and modify fixture settings Some settings like Lamp Hours CPU Temperature Software Versions etc are view only Other settings such as Fixture ID various Projector settings DMX Start Channel etc can be modified configured All of these settings are also available for DL 2 fixtures through the onboard menu system The CMA also has some additional configuration features that let you e Assign a name to servers connected ove
346. w 16382 Continuous rotation stop 16383 i eee Z axis Rotates the object counterclockwise around Z 16384 26 49 Rotation axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 32767 0 rotation 0 rotation around Z axis Z axis 32768 50 32768 50 creuar 6 cies he obiect code around Zash Rotates the object clockwise around Z axis in et 51 74 J steps to 720 degrees absolute 49151 Continuous rotation stop 49152 Continuous variable speed clockwise object 49154 76 100 rotation around Z axis slow to fast 65535 270 DL2 Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DL 2 and Axon DMX Protocol Graphic 2 Scaling Minimum object size along X axis 1 10 o0fo Increases object size along X axis from minimum 1 127 1 49 to actual size 103 Scale X Actual size along X axis 128 50 Increases object size along X axis from actual to 429 254 51 99 maximum size Maximum object size along X axis 10 1 1 is 1 1 i is 10 1 0 Minimum object size along Y axis 1 10 EJ Increases object size along Y axis from minimum 4_497 1 49 to actual size 104 Scale Y Actual size along Y axis 1 1 i is 10 1 0 ject si is 1 10 is 1 1 1 Increases object size along Y axis from actual to 429 254 51 99 maximum size 55 Maximum object size along Y axis 10 1 255 55 Minimum object size along Z axis 1 10 ol Increases object size along Z axis from minimum 1 127 to actual size 0 maximum size Graphic 2 Position Moves object left from center of di
347. without affecting the underlying object Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase speed and direction A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255 100 fastest speed DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction from no adjustment to 0 fastest speed Texture Ripple Vertical M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 23 This option varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the y axis without affecting the underlying object Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase speed and direction A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255 100 fastest speed DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction from no adjustment to 0 fastest speed 176 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Tiling W Object Effect Global Effect Ef
348. y on your keyboard 5 Allow the System Restore menu to load Depending on the speed of your USB drive it will take between 3 5 minutes load During this time a number of small windows will appear and disappear Wait until you see a full screen menu titled Axon System Restore Menu or DL 2 System Restore Menu DL2 System Restore Menu System Restore Exit 6 Using the lt Tab gt key on your keyboard or using your mouse select the system restore option or Exit to cancel the operation 7 The next page will ask you to confirm your selection Press Confirm and the restore will begin Click Confirm to begin a Full System Restore Confirm eiites K 226 DL 2 Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 18 Restoring the System 8 Allow the restore to run This will take between 10 30 minutes depending on the speed of your USB drive Status will be displayed throughout the restore Copyright CG 1999 2603 Microsoft Corporation On computer IMAGE BUILDER status Partitioning hard drive DL 2 Digital Light User Manual 227 CHAPTER 18 Restoring the System 9 When this part of the restore is completed the media server will automatically restart Restore completed successfully Your machine will restart automatically in 15 seconds NOTE Please wait until after your device restarts to remove the System Restore media and the USB drive 10 After allowing a few minutes for the media server to
349. yback Any encoder you use will need to provide options that achieve the following specifications e Size to 640x480 pixels e All l frames an I frame every 1 frame for optimal tracking e Constant Bit Rate CBR data rates of 10 to 12 megabits sec e Closed Group of Picture GOP e Sequence headers each GOP every frame e Progressive frames since it s a progressive display device not interlaced e End of sequence Sequence Style Axon Media Server User Manual 289 APPENDIX C Custom User Content All the encoders have demos and will batch encode ExpertHD need a small script and a settings file to batch encode Note TMPGEncoder includes filters that let you light optimize in the encoder Creating 3 D Objects In general any 3 D modeling program can be used to create objects If the particular 3 D modeler does not export in DirectX x format a translation program will be needed to translate the object from the modeler s output format to the DirectX x format For example you can use Newtek s Lightwave 3 D modeler to generate 3 D objects in lwo format and then convert the object to x format using Deep Exploration from Right Hemisphere The following list includes some general notes and tips for creating a custom 3 D object e With the control parameters position scaling and rotation set at their default values a rectangle measuring 13 0m 9 75m Om will just fill the screen e Objects are stored in Microsoft s Dire

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

User Manual HDMI Extender 30M 3D  EX300 Power Recorder USER`S MANUAL  Vie professionnelle  Herzlichen Glückwunsch zum Kauf des Sony  2-POST EELR336A  HX 4000  Sea Gull Lighting 61251-824 Installation Guide  USER GUIDE  光ファイバ小型心線対照器 FID-03SF/R, FID  160KB  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file